Virgin import of AMD (am-utils) v6.0a16vendor/amd/6.0a16

4 files changed, 12757 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/contrib/amd/doc/am-utils.texi b/contrib/amd/doc/am-utils.texi
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ca545031e180
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/amd/doc/am-utils.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,7816 @@
+\input texinfo          @c -*-texinfo-*-
+@c
+@c Copyright (c) 1997-1998 Erez Zadok
+@c Copyright (c) 1989 Jan-Simon Pendry
+@c Copyright (c) 1989 Imperial College of Science, Technology & Medicine
+@c Copyright (c) 1989 The Regents of the University of California.
+@c All rights reserved.
+@c
+@c This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+@c Jan-Simon Pendry at Imperial College, London.
+@c
+@c Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+@c modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+@c are met:
+@c 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+@c    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+@c 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+@c    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+@c    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+@c 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+@c    must display the following acknowledgment:
+@c      This product includes software developed by the University of
+@c      California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+@c 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+@c    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+@c    without specific prior written permission.
+@c
+@c THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+@c ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+@c IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+@c ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+@c FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+@c DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+@c OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+@c HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+@c LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+@c OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+@c
+@c      %W% (Berkeley) %G%
+@c
+@c $Id: am-utils.texi,v 6.0 1997/02/09 15:11:50 ezk beta $
+@c
+@setfilename am-utils.info
+
+@include version.texi
+
+@c info directory entry
+@direntry
+* Am-utils: (am-utils).          The Amd automounter suite of utilities
+@end direntry
+
+@titlepage
+@title Am-utils (4.4BSD Automounter Utilities)
+@subtitle For version @value{VERSION}, @value{UPDATED}
+
+@author Erez Zadok
+(Originally by Jan-Simon Pendry and Nick Williams)
+
+@page
+Copyright @copyright{} 1997-1998 Erez Zadok
+@*
+Copyright @copyright{} 1989 Jan-Simon Pendry
+@*
+Copyright @copyright{} 1989 Imperial College of Science, Technology & Medicine
+@*
+Copyright @copyright{} 1989 The Regents of the University of California.
+@sp
+All Rights Reserved.
+@vskip 1ex
+Permission to copy this document, or any portion of it, as
+necessary for use of this software is granted provided this
+copyright notice and statement of permission are included.
+@end titlepage
+@page
+
+@c Define a new index for options.
+@syncodeindex pg cp
+@syncodeindex vr cp
+
+@ifinfo
+
+@c ################################################################
+@node Top, License, , (DIR)
+Am-utils - The 4.4BSD Automounter Tool Suite
+*********************************************
+
+Am-utils is the 4.4BSD Automounter Tool Suite, which includes the Amd
+automounter, the Amq query and control program, the Hlfsd daemon, and
+other tools.  This Info file describes how to use and understand the
+tools within Am-utils.
+@end ifinfo
+
+@menu
+* License::                  Explains the terms and conditions for using
+                             and distributing Am-utils.
+* Distrib::                  How to get the latest Am-utils distribution.
+* Intro::                    An introduction to Automounting concepts.
+* History::                  History of am-utils' development.
+* Overview::                 An overview of Amd.
+* Supported Platforms::      Machines and Systems supported by Amd.
+* Mount Maps::               Details of mount maps
+* Amd Command Line Options:: All the Amd command line options explained. 
+* Filesystem Types::         The different mount types supported by Amd.
+* Amd Configuration File::   The amd.conf file syntax and meaning.
+* Run-time Administration::  How to start, stop and control Amd.
+* FSinfo::                   The FSinfo filesystem management tool.
+* Hlfsd::                    The Home-Link Filesystem server.
+* Assorted Tools::           Other tools which come with am-utils.
+* Examples::                 Some examples showing how Amd might be used.
+* Internals::                Implementation details.
+* Acknowledgments & Trademarks:: Legal Notes
+
+Indexes
+* Index::                    An item for each concept.
+@end menu
+
+@iftex
+@unnumbered Preface
+
+This manual documents the use of the 4.4BSD automounter tool suite,
+which includes @i{Amd}, @i{Amq}, @i{Hlfsd}, and other programs.  This is
+primarily a reference manual.  While no tutorial exists, there are
+examples available.  @xref{Examples}.
+
+This manual comes in two forms: the published form and the Info form.
+The Info form is for on-line perusal with the INFO program which is
+distributed along with GNU texinfo package (a version of which is
+available for GNU Emacs).@footnote{GNU packages can be found in
+@url{ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/}.}  Both forms contain substantially
+the same text and are generated from a common source file, which is
+distributed with the @i{Am-utils} source.
+@end iftex
+
+@c ################################################################
+@node License, Distrib, Top, Top
+@unnumbered License
+@cindex License Information
+
+@i{Am-utils} is not in the public domain; it is copyrighted and there are
+restrictions on its distribution.
+
+Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
+met:
+
+@enumerate
+
+@item
+Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
+this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+
+@item
+Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+
+@item
+All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+must display the following acknowledgment:
+
+@cartouche
+``This product includes software developed by the University of
+California, Berkeley and its contributors, as well as the Trustees of
+Columbia University.''
+@end cartouche
+
+@item
+Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may
+be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+without specific prior written permission.
+
+@end enumerate
+
+THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS
+BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
+CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
+SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
+INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
+CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
+ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
+THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+
+@c ################################################################
+@node Distrib, Intro, License, Top
+@unnumbered Source Distribution
+@cindex Source code distribution
+@cindex Obtaining the source code
+
+The @i{Am-utils} home page is located in
+@example
+@url{http://www.cs.columbia.edu/~ezk/am-utils/}
+@end example
+
+You can get the latest distribution version of @i{Am-utils} from
+@example
+@url{ftp://shekel.mcl.cs.columbia.edu/pub/am-utils/am-utils.tar.gz}
+@end example
+
+Alpha and beta distributions are available in
+@example
+@url{ftp://shekel.mcl.cs.columbia.edu/pub/am-utils/}.
+@end example
+
+Revision 5.2 was part of the 4.3BSD Reno distribution.
+
+Revision 5.3bsdnet, a late alpha version of 5.3, was part
+of the BSD network version 2 distribution
+
+Revision 6.0 was made independently by @email{ezk@@cs.columbia.edu,Erez
+Zadok} at the @uref{http://www.cs.columbia.edu/,Computer Science
+Department} of @uref{http://www.columbia.edu/,Columbia University}, as
+part of his @uref{http://www.cs.columbia.edu/~ezk/research/tp/thesis_proposal.html,PhD thesis work}. @xref{History} for more details.
+
+@unnumberedsec Bug Reports
+@cindex Bug reports
+
+Before reporting a bug, see if it is a known one in the
+@uref{http://www.cs.columbia.edu/~ezk/am-utils/BUGS.txt,bugs} file.
+Send all bug reports to @email{amd-dev@@majordomo.cs.columbia.edu}
+quoting the details of the release and your configuration.  These can be
+obtained by running the command @samp{amd -v}.  It would greatly help if
+you could provide a reproducible procedure for detecting the bug you are
+reporting.
+
+Providing working patches is highly encouraged.  Every patch
+incorporated, however small, will get its author an honorable mention in
+the @uref{http://www.cs.columbia.edu/~ezk/am-utils/AUTHORS.txt,authors
+file}.
+
+@unnumberedsec Mailing List
+@cindex Mailing list
+
+There are two mailing lists for people interested in keeping up-to-date
+with developments.
+
+@c ###############
+
+@enumerate
+
+@item
+The older list, @samp{amd-workers} is for general "how to" questions and
+announcements.  To subscribe, send a note to
+@email{amd-workers-request@@majordomo.glue.umd.edu}.@footnote{Note that
+the older address, @email{amd-workers-request@@acl.lanl.gov}, is
+defunct.}  To post a message to this list, send mail to
+@email{amd-workers@@majordomo.glue.umd.edu}.
+
+@item
+The developers only list, @samp{amd-dev} is for
+
+@itemize @minus
+@item
+announcements of alpha and beta releases of am-utils
+@item
+reporting of bugs and patches
+@item
+discussions of new features for am-utils
+@item
+implementation and porting issues
+@end itemize
+
+To subscribe, send a note to @email{majordomo@@majordomo.cs.columbia.edu}
+with the single body text line @samp{subscribe amd-dev}.  To post a
+message to this list, send mail to
+@email{amd-dev@@majordomo.cs.columbia.edu}.  To avoid as much spam as
+possible, only subscribers to this list may post to it.
+
+Subscribers of @samp{amd-dev} are most suitable if they have the time
+and resources to test new and buggy versions of amd, on as many
+different platforms as possible.  They should also be prepared to learn
+and use the GNU Autoconf, Automake, and Libtool packages, and of course,
+be very familiar with the complex code in the am-utils package.  In
+other words, subscribers on this list should be able to contribute
+meaningfully to the development of amd.
+
+@end enumerate
+
+@c ################################################################
+@node Intro, History, Distrib, Top
+@unnumbered Introduction
+@cindex Introduction
+
+An @dfn{automounter} maintains a cache of mounted filesystems.
+Filesystems are mounted on demand when they are first referenced,
+and unmounted after a period of inactivity.
+
+@i{Amd} may be used as a replacement for Sun's automounter.  The choice
+of which filesystem to mount can be controlled dynamically with
+@dfn{selectors}.  Selectors allow decisions of the form ``hostname is
+@var{this},'' or ``architecture is not @var{that}.''  Selectors may be
+combined arbitrarily.  @i{Amd} also supports a variety of filesystem
+types, including NFS, UFS and the novel @dfn{program} filesystem.  The
+combination of selectors and multiple filesystem types allows identical
+configuration files to be used on all machines thus reducing the
+administrative overhead.
+
+@i{Amd} ensures that it will not hang if a remote server goes down.
+Moreover, @i{Amd} can determine when a remote server has become
+inaccessible and then mount replacement filesystems as and when they
+become available.
+
+@i{Amd} contains no proprietary source code and has been ported to
+numerous flavors of Unix.
+
+@c ################################################################
+@node History, Overview, Intro, Top
+@unnumbered History
+@cindex History
+
+The @i{Amd} package has been without an official maintainer since 1992.
+Several people have stepped in to maintain it unofficially.  Most
+notable were the `upl' (Unofficial Patch Level) releases of @i{Amd},
+created by me (@email{ezk@@cs.columbia.edu,Erez Zadok}), and available from
+@url{ftp://ftp.cs.columbia.edu/pub/amd/}.  The last such unofficial
+release was `upl102'.
+
+Through the process of patching and aging, it was becoming more and more
+apparent that @i{Amd} was in much need of revitalizing.  Maintaining
+@i{Amd} had become a difficult task.  I took it upon myself to cleanup
+the code, so that it would be easier to port to new platforms, add new
+features, keep up with the many new feature requests, and deal with the
+never ending stream of bug reports.
+
+I have been working on such a release of @i{Amd} on and off since
+January of 1996.  The new suite of tools is currently named "am-utils"
+(AutoMounter Utilities), in line with GNU naming conventions, befitting
+the contents of the package.  In October of 1996 I had received enough
+offers to help me with this task that I decided to make a mailing list
+for this group of people.  Around the same time, @i{Amd} had become a
+necessary part of my PhD thesis work, resulting in more work performed
+on am-utils.
+
+Am-utils version 6.0 was numbered with a major new release number to
+distinguish it from the last official release of @i{Amd} (5.x).  Many
+new features have been added such as a GNU @code{configure} system, NFS
+Version 3, Autofs support, a run-time configuration file (`amd.conf'),
+many new ports, more scripts and programs, as well as numerous bug
+fixes.  Another reason for the new major release number was to alert
+users of am-utils that user-visible interfaces may have changed.  In
+order to make @i{Amd} work well for the next 10 years, and be easier to
+maintain, it was necessary to remove old or unused features, change
+various syntax files, etc.  However, great care was taken to ensure the
+maximum possible backwards compatibility.
+
+@c ################################################################
+@node Overview, Supported Platforms, History, Top
+@chapter Overview
+
+@i{Amd} maintains a cache of mounted filesystems.  Filesystems are
+@dfn{demand-mounted} when they are first referenced, and unmounted after
+a period of inactivity.  @i{Amd} may be used as a replacement for Sun's
+@b{automount}(8) program.  It contains no proprietary source code and
+has been ported to numerous flavors of Unix.  @xref{Supported
+Platforms}.@refill
+
+@i{Amd} was designed as the basis for experimenting with filesystem
+layout and management.  Although @i{Amd} has many direct applications it
+is loaded with additional features which have little practical use.  At
+some point the infrequently used components may be removed to streamline
+the production system.
+
+@c @i{Amd} supports the notion of @dfn{replicated} filesystems by evaluating
+@c each member of a list of possible filesystem locations in parallel.
+@c @i{Amd} checks that each cached mapping remains valid.  Should a mapping be
+@c lost -- such as happens when a fileserver goes down -- @i{Amd} automatically
+@c selects a replacement should one be available.
+@c
+@menu
+* Fundamentals::
+* Filesystems and Volumes::
+* Volume Naming::
+* Volume Binding::
+* Operational Principles::
+* Mounting a Volume::
+* Automatic Unmounting::
+* Keep-alives::
+* Non-blocking Operation::
+@end menu
+
+@node Fundamentals, Filesystems and Volumes, Overview, Overview
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Fundamentals
+@cindex Automounter fundamentals
+
+The fundamental concept behind @i{Amd} is the ability to separate the
+name used to refer to a file from the name used to refer to its physical
+storage location.  This allows the same files to be accessed with the
+same name regardless of where in the network the name is used.  This is
+very different from placing @file{/n/hostname} in front of the pathname
+since that includes location dependent information which may change if
+files are moved to another machine.
+
+By placing the required mappings in a centrally administered database,
+filesystems can be re-organized without requiring changes to
+configuration files, shell scripts and so on.
+
+@node Filesystems and Volumes, Volume Naming, Fundamentals, Overview
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Filesystems and Volumes
+@cindex Filesystem
+@cindex Volume
+@cindex Fileserver
+@cindex sublink
+
+@i{Amd} views the world as a set of fileservers, each containing one or
+more filesystems where each filesystem contains one or more
+@dfn{volumes}.  Here the term @dfn{volume} is used to refer to a
+coherent set of files such as a user's home directory or a @TeX{}
+distribution.@refill
+
+In order to access the contents of a volume, @i{Amd} must be told in
+which filesystem the volume resides and which host owns the filesystem.
+By default the host is assumed to be local and the volume is assumed to
+be the entire filesystem.  If a filesystem contains more than one
+volume, then a @dfn{sublink} is used to refer to the sub-directory
+within the filesystem where the volume can be found.
+
+@node Volume Naming, Volume Binding, Filesystems and Volumes, Overview
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Volume Naming
+@cindex Volume names
+@cindex Network-wide naming
+@cindex Replicated volumes
+@cindex Duplicated volumes
+@cindex Replacement volumes
+
+Volume names are defined to be unique across the entire network.  A
+volume name is the pathname to the volume's root as known by the users
+of that volume.  Since this name uniquely identifies the volume
+contents, all volumes can be named and accessed from each host, subject
+to administrative controls.
+
+Volumes may be replicated or duplicated.  Replicated volumes contain
+identical copies of the same data and reside at two or more locations in
+the network.  Each of the replicated volumes can be used
+interchangeably.  Duplicated volumes each have the same name but contain
+different, though functionally identical, data.  For example,
+@samp{/vol/tex} might be the name of a @TeX{} distribution which varied
+for each machine architecture.@refill
+
+@i{Amd} provides facilities to take advantage of both replicated and
+duplicated volumes.  Configuration options allow a single set of
+configuration data to be shared across an entire network by taking
+advantage of replicated and duplicated volumes.
+
+@i{Amd} can take advantage of replacement volumes by mounting them as
+required should an active fileserver become unavailable.
+
+@node Volume Binding, Operational Principles, Volume Naming, Overview
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Volume Binding
+@cindex Volume binding
+@cindex Unix namespace
+@cindex Namespace
+@cindex Binding names to filesystems
+
+Unix implements a namespace of hierarchically mounted filesystems.  Two
+forms of binding between names and files are provided.  A @dfn{hard
+link} completes the binding when the name is added to the filesystem.  A
+@dfn{soft link} delays the binding until the name is accessed.  An
+@dfn{automounter} adds a further form in which the binding of name to
+filesystem is delayed until the name is accessed.@refill
+
+The target volume, in its general form, is a tuple (host, filesystem,
+sublink) which can be used to name the physical location of any volume
+in the network.
+
+When a target is referenced, @i{Amd} ignores the sublink element and
+determines whether the required filesystem is already mounted.  This is
+done by computing the local mount point for the filesystem and checking
+for an existing filesystem mounted at the same place.  If such a
+filesystem already exists then it is assumed to be functionally
+identical to the target filesystem.  By default there is a one-to-one
+mapping between the pair (host, filesystem) and the local mount point so
+this assumption is valid.
+
+@node Operational Principles, Mounting a Volume, Volume Binding, Overview
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Operational Principles
+@cindex Operational principles
+
+@i{Amd} operates by introducing new mount points into the namespace.
+These are called @dfn{automount} points.  The kernel sees these
+automount points as NFS filesystems being served by @i{Amd}.  Having
+attached itself to the namespace, @i{Amd} is now able to control the
+view the rest of the system has of those mount points.  RPC calls are
+received from the kernel one at a time.
+
+When a @dfn{lookup} call is received @i{Amd} checks whether the name is
+already known.  If it is not, the required volume is mounted.  A
+symbolic link pointing to the volume root is then returned.  Once the
+symbolic link is returned, the kernel will send all other requests
+direct to the mounted filesystem.
+
+If a volume is not yet mounted, @i{Amd} consults a configuration
+@dfn{mount-map} corresponding to the automount point.  @i{Amd} then
+makes a runtime decision on what and where to mount a filesystem based
+on the information obtained from the map.
+
+@i{Amd} does not implement all the NFS requests; only those relevant
+to name binding such as @dfn{lookup}, @dfn{readlink} and @dfn{readdir}.
+Some other calls are also implemented but most simply return an error
+code; for example @dfn{mkdir} always returns ``read-only filesystem''.
+
+@node Mounting a Volume, Automatic Unmounting, Operational Principles, Overview
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Mounting a Volume
+@cindex Mounting a volume
+@cindex Location lists
+@cindex Alternate locations
+@cindex Mount retries
+@cindex Background mounts
+
+Each automount point has a corresponding mount map.  The mount map
+contains a list of key--value pairs.  The key is the name of the volume
+to be mounted.  The value is a list of locations describing where the
+filesystem is stored in the network.  In the source for the map the
+value would look like
+
+@display
+location1  location2  @dots{}  locationN
+@end display
+
+@i{Amd} examines each location in turn.  Each location may contain
+@dfn{selectors} which control whether @i{Amd} can use that location.
+For example, the location may be restricted to use by certain hosts.
+Those locations which cannot be used are ignored.
+
+@i{Amd} attempts to mount the filesystem described by each remaining
+location until a mount succeeds or @i{Amd} can no longer proceed.  The
+latter can occur in three ways:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+If none of the locations could be used, or if all of the locations
+caused an error, then the last error is returned.
+
+@item
+If a location could be used but was being mounted in the background then
+@i{Amd} marks that mount as being ``in progress'' and continues with
+the next request; no reply is sent to the kernel.
+
+@item
+Lastly, one or more of the mounts may have been @dfn{deferred}.  A mount
+is deferred if extra information is required before the mount can
+proceed.  When the information becomes available the mount will take
+place, but in the mean time no reply is sent to the kernel.  If the
+mount is deferred, @i{Amd} continues to try any remaining locations.
+@end itemize
+
+Once a volume has been mounted, @i{Amd} establishes a @dfn{volume
+mapping} which is used to satisfy subsequent requests.@refill
+
+@node Automatic Unmounting, Keep-alives, Mounting a Volume, Overview
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Automatic Unmounting
+
+To avoid an ever increasing number of filesystem mounts, @i{Amd} removes
+volume mappings which have not been used recently.  A time-to-live
+interval is associated with each mapping and when that expires the
+mapping is removed.  When the last reference to a filesystem is removed,
+that filesystem is unmounted.  If the unmount fails, for example the
+filesystem is still busy, the mapping is re-instated and its
+time-to-live interval is extended.  The global default for this grace
+period is controlled by the @code{-w} command-line option (@pxref{-w
+Option, -w}) or the @i{amd.conf} parameter @samp{dismount_interval}
+(@pxref{dismount_interval Parameter}).  It is also possible to set this
+value on a per-mount basis (@pxref{opts Option, opts, opts}).
+
+Filesystems can be forcefully timed out using the @i{Amq} command.
+@xref{Run-time Administration}.
+
+@node Keep-alives, Non-blocking Operation, Automatic Unmounting, Overview
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Keep-alives
+@cindex Keep-alives
+@cindex Server crashes
+@cindex NFS ping
+
+Use of some filesystem types requires the presence of a server on
+another machine.  If a machine crashes then it is of no concern to
+processes on that machine that the filesystem is unavailable.  However,
+to processes on a remote host using that machine as a fileserver this
+event is important.  This situation is most widely recognized when an
+NFS server crashes and the behavior observed on client machines is that
+more and more processes hang.  In order to provide the possibility of
+recovery, @i{Amd} implements a @dfn{keep-alive} interval timer for some
+filesystem types.  Currently only NFS makes use of this service.
+
+The basis of the NFS keep-alive implementation is the observation that
+most sites maintain replicated copies of common system data such as
+manual pages, most or all programs, system source code and so on.  If
+one of those servers goes down it would be reasonable to mount one of
+the others as a replacement.
+
+The first part of the process is to keep track of which fileservers are
+up and which are down.  @i{Amd} does this by sending RPC requests to the
+servers' NFS @code{NullProc} and checking whether a reply is returned.
+While the server state is uncertain the requests are re-transmitted at
+three second intervals and if no reply is received after four attempts
+the server is marked down.  If a reply is received the fileserver is
+marked up and stays in that state for 30 seconds at which time another
+NFS ping is sent.
+
+Once a fileserver is marked down, requests continue to be sent every 30
+seconds in order to determine when the fileserver comes back up.  During
+this time any reference through @i{Amd} to the filesystems on that
+server fail with the error ``Operation would block''.  If a replacement
+volume is available then it will be mounted, otherwise the error is
+returned to the user.
+
+@c @i{Amd} keeps track of which servers are up and which are down.
+@c It does this by sending RPC requests to the servers' NFS {\sc NullProc} and
+@c checking whether a reply is returned.  If no replies are received after a
+@c short period, @i{Amd} marks the fileserver @dfn{down}.
+@c RPC requests continue to be sent so that it will notice when a fileserver
+@c comes back up.
+@c ICMP echo packets \cite{rfc:icmp} are not used because it is the availability
+@c of the NFS service that is important, not the existence of a base kernel.
+@c Whenever a reference to a fileserver which is down is made via @i{Amd}, an alternate
+@c filesystem is mounted if one is available.
+@c
+Although this action does not protect user files, which are unique on
+the network, or processes which do not access files via @i{Amd} or
+already have open files on the hung filesystem, it can prevent most new
+processes from hanging.
+
+By default, fileserver state is not maintained for NFS/TCP mounts.  The
+remote fileserver is always assumed to be up.
+@c
+@c With a suitable combination of filesystem management and mount-maps,
+@c machines can be protected against most server downtime.  This can be
+@c enhanced by allocating boot-servers dynamically which allows a diskless
+@c workstation to be quickly restarted if necessary.  Once the root filesystem
+@c is mounted, @i{Amd} can be started and allowed to mount the remainder of
+@c the filesystem from whichever fileservers are available.
+
+@node Non-blocking Operation, , Keep-alives, Overview
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Non-blocking Operation
+@cindex Non-blocking operation
+@cindex Multiple-threaded server
+@cindex RPC retries
+
+Since there is only one instance of @i{Amd} for each automount point,
+and usually only one instance on each machine, it is important that it
+is always available to service kernel calls.  @i{Amd} goes to great
+lengths to ensure that it does not block in a system call.  As a last
+resort @i{Amd} will fork before it attempts a system call that may block
+indefinitely, such as mounting an NFS filesystem.  Other tasks such as
+obtaining filehandle information for an NFS filesystem, are done using a
+purpose built non-blocking RPC library which is integrated with
+@i{Amd}'s task scheduler.  This library is also used to implement NFS
+keep-alives (@pxref{Keep-alives}).
+
+Whenever a mount is deferred or backgrounded, @i{Amd} must wait for it
+to complete before replying to the kernel.  However, this would cause
+@i{Amd} to block waiting for a reply to be constructed.  Rather than do
+this, @i{Amd} simply @dfn{drops} the call under the assumption that the
+kernel RPC mechanism will automatically retry the request.
+
+@c ################################################################
+@node Supported Platforms, Mount Maps, Overview, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter Supported Platforms
+@cindex Supported Platforms
+@cindex shared libraries
+@cindex NFS V.3 support
+
+@i{Am-utils} has been ported to a wide variety of machines and operating
+systems.  @i{Am-utils}'s code works for little-endian and big-endian
+machines, as well as 32 bit and 64 bit architectures.  Furthermore, when
+@i{Am-utils} ports to an Operating System on one architecture, it is generally
+readily portable to the same Operating System on all platforms on which
+it is available.
+
+The table below lists those platforms supported by the latest release.
+The listing is based on the standard output from GNU's
+@code{config.guess} script.  Since significant changes have been made to
+am-utils, not all systems listed here have been verified working for all
+features.
+
+@multitable {Auto-Configured System Name} {Config} {Compile} {Amd} {NFS3} {Shlib} {Hlfsd}
+
+@item @b{Auto-Configured System Name}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab @b{Config} @tab @b{Compile} @tab @b{Amd} @tab @b{NFS3} @tab @b{Shlib} @tab @b{Hlfsd}
+
+@item @b{alpha-dec-osf2.1}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab       @tab      @tab    
+
+@item @b{alpha-dec-osf4.0}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab yes   @tab      @tab    
+
+@item @b{alphaev5-unknown-linux-gnu}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab yes  @tab 
+
+@item @b{hppa1.0-hp-hpux11.00}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab no    @tab      @tab
+
+@item @b{hppa1.1-hp-hpux10.10}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab no   @tab
+
+@item @b{hppa1.1-hp-hpux10.20}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab no   @tab
+
+@item @b{hppa1.1-hp-hpux9.01}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab      @tab    
+
+@item @b{hppa1.1-hp-hpux9.05}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab      @tab    
+
+@item @b{hppa1.1-hp-hpux9.07}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab      @tab    
+
+@item @b{i386-pc-bsdi2.1}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab      @tab    
+
+@item @b{i386-pc-bsdi3.0}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab      @tab    
+
+@item @b{i386-pc-bsdi3.1}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab      @tab    
+
+@item @b{i386-pc-solaris2.5.1}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab yes
+
+@item @b{i386-pc-solaris2.6}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab yes
+
+@item @b{i386-unknown-freebsd2.1.0}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab      @tab 
+
+@item @b{i386-unknown-freebsd2.2.1}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab yes  @tab 
+
+@item @b{i386-unknown-freebsd3.0}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab 
+
+@item @b{i386-unknown-netbsd1.2.1}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab 
+
+@item @b{i386-unknown-netbsd1.3}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab 
+
+@item @b{i386-unknown-netbsd1.3.1}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab 
+
+@item @b{i386-unknown-openbsd2.1}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab 
+
+@item @b{i486-ncr-sysv4.3.03}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab      @tab yes   @tab      @tab 
+
+@item @b{i486-pc-linux-gnulibc1}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab yes  @tab 
+
+@item @b{i586-pc-linux-gnulinc1}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab yes  @tab 
+
+@item @b{i686-pc-linux-gnu}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab yes  @tab 
+
+@item @b{m68k-hp-hpux9.00}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab      @tab    
+
+@item @b{m68k-sun-sunos4.1.1}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab      @tab    
+
+@item @b{m68k-next-nextstep3}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab      @tab    
+
+@item @b{mips-dec-ultrix4.3}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab      @tab 
+
+@item @b{mips-sgi-irix5.2}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab         @tab       @tab      @tab       @tab      @tab 
+
+@item @b{mips-sgi-irix5.3}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab yes   @tab      @tab 
+
+@item @b{mips-sgi-irix6.2}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab yes   @tab      @tab 
+
+@item @b{mips-sgi-irix6.4}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab 
+
+@item @b{powerpc-ibm-aix4.1.5.0}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab      @tab 
+
+@item @b{powerpc-ibm-aix4.2.1.0}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab yes   @tab      @tab 
+
+@item @b{rs6000-ibm-aix3.2}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab      @tab 
+
+@item @b{rs6000-ibm-aix3.2.5}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab      @tab 
+
+@item @b{rs6000-ibm-aix4.1.4.0}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab      @tab 
+
+@item @b{rs6000-ibm-aix4.1.5.0}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab      @tab 
+
+@item @b{sparc-sun-solaris2.3}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab      @tab 
+
+@item @b{sparc-sun-solaris2.4}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab yes  @tab 
+
+@item @b{sparc-sun-solaris2.5}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab 
+
+@item @b{sparc-sun-solaris2.5.1}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab yes
+
+@item @b{sparc-sun-solaris2.6}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab yes
+
+@item @b{sparc-sun-sunos4.1.1}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab yes  @tab 
+
+@item @b{sparc-sun-sunos4.1.3}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab yes  @tab 
+
+@item @b{sparc-sun-sunos4.1.3C}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab yes  @tab 
+
+@item @b{sparc-sun-sunos4.1.3_U1}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab yes  @tab 
+
+@item @b{sparc-sun-sunos4.1.4}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab yes  @tab 
+
+@item @b{sparc-unknown-linux-gnulibc1}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab n/a   @tab yes  @tab 
+
+@item @b{sparc-unknown-netbsd1.2E}
+@c {Config}  {Compile}  {Amd}     {NFS V.3}  {Shlib}   {Hlfsd}
+@tab yes     @tab yes   @tab yes  @tab       @tab      @tab 
+
+@end multitable
+
+See the @file{INSTALL} in the distribution for more specific details on
+building and/or configuring for some systems.
+
+@c ################################################################
+@node Mount Maps, Amd Command Line Options, Supported Platforms, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter Mount Maps
+@cindex Mount maps
+@cindex Automounter configuration maps
+@cindex Mount information
+
+@i{Amd} has no built-in knowledge of machines or filesystems.
+External @dfn{mount-maps} are used to provide the required information.
+Specifically, @i{Amd} needs to know when and under what conditions it
+should mount filesystems.
+
+The map entry corresponding to the requested name contains a list of
+possible locations from which to resolve the request.  Each location
+specifies filesystem type, information required by that filesystem (for
+example the block special device in the case of UFS), and some
+information describing where to mount the filesystem (@pxref{fs Option}).  A
+location may also contain @dfn{selectors} (@pxref{Selectors}).@refill
+
+@menu
+* Map Types::
+* Key Lookup::
+* Location Format::
+@end menu
+
+@node Map Types, Key Lookup, Mount Maps, Mount Maps
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Map Types
+@cindex Mount map types
+@cindex Map types
+@cindex Configuration map types
+@cindex Types of mount map
+@cindex Types of configuration map
+@cindex Determining the map type
+
+A mount-map provides the run-time configuration information to @i{Amd}.
+Maps can be implemented in many ways.  Some of the forms supported by
+@i{Amd} are regular files, ndbm databases, NIS maps, the @dfn{Hesiod}
+name server, and even the password file.
+
+A mount-map @dfn{name} is a sequence of characters.  When an automount
+point is created a handle on the mount-map is obtained.  For each map
+type configured, @i{Amd} attempts to reference the map of the
+appropriate type.  If a map is found, @i{Amd} notes the type for future
+use and deletes the reference, for example closing any open file
+descriptors.  The available maps are configured when @i{Amd} is built
+and can be displayed by running the command @samp{amd -v}.
+
+When using an @i{Amd} configuration file (@pxref{Amd Configuration File})
+and the keyword @samp{map_type} (@pxref{map_type Parameter}), you may
+force the map used to any type.
+
+By default, @i{Amd} caches data in a mode dependent on the type of map.
+This is the same as specifying @samp{cache:=mapdefault} and selects a
+suitable default cache mode depending on the map type.  The individual
+defaults are described below.  The @var{cache} option can be specified
+on automount points to alter the caching behavior (@pxref{Automount
+Filesystem}).@refill
+
+The following map types have been implemented, though some are not
+available on all machines.  Run the command @samp{amd -v} to obtain a
+list of map types configured on your machine.
+
+@menu
+* File maps::
+* ndbm maps::
+* NIS maps::
+* NIS+ maps::
+* Hesiod maps::
+* Password maps::
+* Union maps::
+* LDAP maps::
+@end menu
+
+@node File maps, ndbm maps, Map Types, Map Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection File maps
+@cindex File maps
+@cindex Flat file maps
+@cindex File map syntactic conventions
+
+When @i{Amd} searches a file for a map entry it does a simple scan of
+the file and supports both comments and continuation lines.
+
+Continuation lines are indicated by a backslash character (@samp{\}) as
+the last character of a line in the file.  The backslash, newline character
+@emph{and any leading white space on the following line} are discarded.  A maximum
+line length of 2047 characters is enforced after continuation lines are read
+but before comments are stripped.  Each line must end with
+a newline character; that is newlines are terminators, not separators.
+The following examples illustrate this:
+
+@example
+key     valA   valB;   \
+          valC
+@end example
+
+specifies @emph{three} locations, and is identical to
+
+@example
+key     valA   valB;   valC
+@end example
+
+However,
+
+@example
+key     valA   valB;\
+          valC
+@end example
+
+specifies only @emph{two} locations, and is identical to
+
+@example
+key     valA   valB;valC
+@end example
+
+After a complete line has been read from the file, including
+continuations, @i{Amd} determines whether there is a comment on the
+line.  A comment begins with a hash (``@samp{#}'') character and
+continues to the end of the line.  There is no way to escape or change
+the comment lead-in character.
+
+Note that continuation lines and comment support @dfn{only} apply to
+file maps, or ndbm maps built with the @code{mk-amd-map} program.
+
+When caching is enabled, file maps have a default cache mode of
+@code{all} (@pxref{Automount Filesystem}).
+
+@node ndbm maps, NIS maps, File maps, Map Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection ndbm maps
+@cindex ndbm maps
+
+An ndbm map may be used as a fast access form of a file map.  The program,
+@code{mk-amd-map}, converts a normal map file into an ndbm database.
+This program supports the same continuation and comment conventions that
+are provided for file maps.  Note that ndbm format files may @emph{not}
+be sharable across machine architectures.  The notion of speed generally
+only applies to large maps; a small map, less than a single disk block,
+is almost certainly better implemented as a file map.
+
+ndbm maps have a default cache mode of @samp{all} (@pxref{Automount Filesystem}).
+
+@node NIS maps, NIS+ maps, ndbm maps, Map Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection NIS maps
+@cindex NIS (YP) maps
+
+When using NIS (formerly YP), an @i{Amd} map is implemented directly
+by the underlying NIS map.  Comments and continuation lines are
+@emph{not} supported in the automounter and must be stripped when
+constructing the NIS server's database.
+
+NIS maps have a default cache mode of @code{all} (@pxref{Automount
+Filesystem}).
+
+The following rule illustrates what could be added to your NIS @file{Makefile},
+in this case causing the @file{amd.home} map to be rebuilt:
+@example
+$(YPTSDIR)/amd.home.time: $(ETCDIR)/amd.home
+    -@@sed -e "s/#.*$$//" -e "/^$$/d" $(ETCDIR)/amd.home | \
+      awk '@{  \
+         for (i = 1; i <= NF; i++) \
+             if (i == NF) @{ \
+             if (substr($$i, length($$i), 1) == "\\") \
+                 printf("%s", substr($$i, 1, length($$i) - 1)); \
+             else \
+                 printf("%s\n", $$i); \
+             @} \
+             else \
+             printf("%s ", $$i); \
+         @}' | \
+    $(MAKEDBM) - $(YPDBDIR)/amd.home; \
+    touch $(YPTSDIR)/amd.home.time; \
+    echo "updated amd.home"; \
+    if [ ! $(NOPUSH) ]; then \
+        $(YPPUSH) amd.home; \
+        echo "pushed amd.home"; \
+    else \
+        : ; \
+    fi
+@end example
+
+Here @code{$(YPTSDIR)} contains the time stamp files, and @code{$(YPDBDIR)} contains
+the dbm format NIS files.
+
+@node NIS+ maps, Hesiod maps, NIS maps, Map Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection NIS+ maps
+@cindex NIS+ maps
+
+NIS+ maps do not support cache mode @samp{all} and, when caching is
+enabled, have a default cache mode of @samp{inc}.
+
+XXX: FILL IN WITH AN EXAMPLE.
+
+@node Hesiod maps, Password maps, NIS+ maps, Map Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Hesiod maps
+@cindex Hesiod maps
+
+When the map name begins with the string @samp{hesiod.} lookups are made
+using the @dfn{Hesiod} name server.  The string following the dot is
+used as a name qualifier and is prepended with the key being located.
+The entire string is then resolved in the @code{automount} context, or
+the @i{amd.conf} parameter @samp{hesiod_base} (@pxref{hesiod_base
+Parameter}).  For example, if the the key is @samp{jsp} and map name is
+@samp{hesiod.homes} then @dfn{Hesiod} is asked to resolve
+@samp{jsp.homes.automount}.
+
+Hesiod maps do not support cache mode @samp{all} and, when caching is
+enabled, have a default cache mode of @samp{inc} (@pxref{Automount
+Filesystem}).
+
+The following is an example of a @dfn{Hesiod} map entry:
+
+@example
+jsp.homes.automount HS TXT "rfs:=/home/charm;rhost:=charm;sublink:=jsp"
+njw.homes.automount HS TXT "rfs:=/home/dylan/dk2;rhost:=dylan;sublink:=njw"
+@end example
+
+@node Password maps, Union maps, Hesiod maps, Map Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Password maps
+@cindex Password file maps
+@cindex /etc/passwd maps
+@cindex User maps, automatic generation
+@cindex Automatic generation of user maps
+@cindex Using the password file as a map
+
+The password map support is unlike the four previous map types.  When
+the map name is the string @file{/etc/passwd} @i{Amd} can lookup a user
+name in the password file and re-arrange the home directory field to
+produce a usable map entry.
+
+@i{Amd} assumes the home directory has the format
+`@t{/}@i{anydir}@t{/}@i{dom1}@t{/../}@i{domN}@t{/}@i{login}'.
+@c @footnote{This interpretation is not necessarily exactly what you want.}
+It breaks this string into a map entry where @code{$@{rfs@}} has the
+value `@t{/}@i{anydir}@t{/}@i{domN}', @code{$@{rhost@}} has the value
+`@i{domN}@t{.}@i{...}@t{.}@i{dom1}', and @code{$@{sublink@}} has the
+value @i{login}.@refill
+
+Thus if the password file entry was
+
+@example
+/home/achilles/jsp
+@end example
+
+the map entry used by @i{Amd} would be
+
+@example
+rfs:=/home/achilles;rhost:=achilles;sublink:=jsp
+@end example
+
+Similarly, if the password file entry was
+
+@example
+/home/cc/sugar/mjh
+@end example
+
+the map entry used by @i{Amd} would be 
+
+@example
+rfs:=/home/sugar;rhost:=sugar.cc;sublink:=jsp
+@end example
+
+@node Union maps, LDAP maps , Password maps, Map Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Union maps
+@cindex Union file maps
+
+The union map support is provided specifically for use with the union
+filesystem, @pxref{Union Filesystem}.
+
+It is identified by the string @samp{union:} which is followed by a
+colon separated list of directories.  The directories are read in order,
+and the names of all entries are recorded in the map cache.  Later
+directories take precedence over earlier ones.  The union filesystem
+type then uses the map cache to determine the union of the names in all
+the directories.
+
+@node LDAP maps, , Union maps, Map Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection LDAP maps
+@cindex LDAP maps
+@cindex Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
+
+LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) maps do not support cache
+mode @samp{all} and, when caching is enabled, have a default cache mode
+of @samp{inc}.
+
+For example, an @i{Amd} map @samp{amd.home} that looks as follows:
+
+@example
+/defaults    opts:=rw,intr;type:=link
+
+zing         -rhost:=shekel \
+             host==shekel \
+             host!=shekel;type:=nfs
+@end example
+@noindent
+when converted to LDAP (@pxref{amd2ldif}), will result in the following
+LDAP database:
+@example
+$ amd2ldif amd.home CUCS < amd.home
+dn: cn=amdmap timestamp, CUCS
+cn             : amdmap timestamp
+objectClass    : amdmapTimestamp
+amdmapTimestamp: 873071363
+
+dn: cn=amdmap amd.home[/defaults], CUCS
+cn          : amdmap amd.home[/defaults]
+objectClass : amdmap
+amdmapName  : amd.home
+amdmapKey   : /defaults
+amdmapValue : opts:=rw,intr;type:=link
+
+dn: cn=amdmap amd.home[], CUCS
+cn          : amdmap amd.home[]
+objectClass : amdmap
+amdmapName  : amd.home
+amdmapKey   : 
+amdmapValue : 
+
+dn: cn=amdmap amd.home[zing], CUCS
+cn          : amdmap amd.home[zing]
+objectClass : amdmap
+amdmapName  : amd.home
+amdmapKey   : zing
+amdmapValue : -rhost:=shekel host==shekel host!=shekel;type:=nfs
+@end example
+
+@c subsection Gdbm
+
+@node Key Lookup, Location Format, Map Types, Mount Maps
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section How keys are looked up
+@cindex Key lookup
+@cindex Map lookup
+@cindex Looking up keys
+@cindex How keys are looked up
+@cindex Wildcards in maps
+
+The key is located in the map whose type was determined when the
+automount point was first created.  In general the key is a pathname
+component.  In some circumstances this may be modified by variable
+expansion (@pxref{Variable Expansion}) and prefixing.  If the automount
+point has a prefix, specified by the @var{pref} option, then that is
+prepended to the search key before the map is searched.
+
+If the map cache is a @samp{regexp} cache then the key is treated as an
+egrep-style regular expression, otherwise a normal string comparison is
+made.
+
+If the key cannot be found then a @dfn{wildcard} match is attempted.
+@i{Amd} repeatedly strips the basename from the key, appends @samp{/*} and
+attempts a lookup.  Finally, @i{Amd} attempts to locate the special key @samp{*}.
+
+For example, the following sequence would be checked if @file{home/dylan/dk2} was
+being located:
+
+@example
+   home/dylan/dk2
+   home/dylan/*
+   home/*
+   *
+@end example
+
+At any point when a wildcard is found, @i{Amd} proceeds as if an exact
+match had been found and the value field is then used to resolve the
+mount request, otherwise an error code is propagated back to the kernel.
+(@pxref{Filesystem Types}).@refill
+
+@node Location Format, , Key Lookup, Mount Maps
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Location Format
+@cindex Location format
+@cindex Map entry format
+@cindex How locations are parsed
+
+The value field from the lookup provides the information required to
+mount a filesystem.  The information is parsed according to the syntax
+shown below.
+
+@display
+@i{location-list}:
+                  @i{location-selection}
+                  @i{location-list} @i{white-space} @t{||} @i{white-space} @i{location-selection}
+@i{location-selection}:
+                  @i{location}
+                  @i{location-selection} @i{white-space} @i{location}
+@i{location}:
+                  @i{location-info}
+                  @t{-}@i{location-info}
+                  @t{-}
+@i{location-info}:
+                  @i{sel-or-opt}
+                  @i{location-info}@t{;}@i{sel-or-opt}
+                  @t{;}
+@i{sel-or-opt}:
+                  @i{selection}
+                  @i{opt-ass}
+@i{selection}:
+                  selector@t{==}@i{value}
+                  selector@t{!=}@i{value}
+@i{opt-ass}:
+                  option@t{:=}@i{value}
+@i{white-space}:
+                  space
+                  tab
+@end display
+
+Note that unquoted whitespace is not allowed in a location description.
+White space is only allowed, and is mandatory, where shown with non-terminal
+@i{white-space}.
+
+A @dfn{location-selection} is a list of possible volumes with which to
+satisfy the request.  @dfn{location-selection}s are separated by the
+@samp{||} operator.  The effect of this operator is to prevent use of
+location-selections to its right if any of the location-selections on
+its left were selected whether or not any of them were successfully
+mounted (@pxref{Selectors}).@refill
+
+The location-selection, and singleton @dfn{location-list},
+@samp{type:=ufs;dev:=/dev/xd1g} would inform @i{Amd} to mount a UFS
+filesystem from the block special device @file{/dev/xd1g}.
+
+The @dfn{sel-or-opt} component is either the name of an option required
+by a specific filesystem, or it is the name of a built-in, predefined
+selector such as the architecture type.  The value may be quoted with
+double quotes @samp{"}, for example
+@samp{type:="ufs";dev:="/dev/xd1g"}.  These quotes are stripped when the
+value is parsed and there is no way to get a double quote into a value
+field.  Double quotes are used to get white space into a value field,
+which is needed for the program filesystem (@pxref{Program Filesystem}).@refill
+
+@menu
+* Map Defaults::
+* Variable Expansion::
+* Selectors::
+* Map Options::
+@end menu
+
+@node Map Defaults, Variable Expansion, Location Format, Location Format
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Map Defaults
+@cindex Map defaults
+@cindex How to set default map parameters
+@cindex Setting default map parameters
+
+A location beginning with a dash @samp{-} is used to specify default
+values for subsequent locations.  Any previously specified defaults in
+the location-list are discarded.  The default string can be empty in
+which case no defaults apply.
+
+The location @samp{-fs:=/mnt;opts:=ro} would set the local mount point
+to @file{/mnt} and cause mounts to be read-only by default.  Defaults
+specified this way are appended to, and so override, any global map
+defaults given with @samp{/defaults}).
+
+@c
+@c A @samp{/defaults} value @dfn{gdef} and a location list
+@c \begin{quote}
+@c $@samp{-}@dfn{def}_a $\verb*+ +$ @dfn{loc}_{a_1} $\verb*+ +$ @dfn{loc}_{a_2} $\verb*+ +$ @samp{-}@dfn{def}_b $\verb*+ +$ @dfn{loc}_{b_1} \ldots$
+@c \end{quote}
+@c is equivalent to
+@c \begin{quote}
+@c $@samp{-}@dfn{gdef}@samp{;}@dfn{def}_a $\verb*+ +$ @dfn{loc}_{a_1} $\verb*+ +$ @dfn{loc}_{a_2} $\verb*+ +$ @samp{-}@dfn{gdef}@samp{;}@dfn{def}_b $\verb*+ +$ @dfn{loc}_{b_1} \ldots$
+@c \end{quote}
+@c which is equivalent to
+@c \begin{quote}
+@c $@dfn{gdef}@samp{;}@dfn{def}_a@samp{;}@dfn{loc}_{a_1} $\verb*+ +$@dfn{gdef}@samp{;}@dfn{def}_a@samp{;}@dfn{loc}_{a_2} $\verb*+ +$@dfn{gdef}@samp{;}@dfn{def}_b@samp{;}@dfn{loc}_{b_1} \ldots$
+@c \end{quote}
+
+@node Variable Expansion, Selectors, Map Defaults, Location Format
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Variable Expansion
+@cindex Variable expansion
+@cindex How variables are expanded
+@cindex Pathname operators
+@cindex Domain stripping
+@cindex Domainname operators
+@cindex Stripping the local domain name
+@cindex Environment variables
+@cindex How to access environment variables in maps
+
+To allow generic location specifications @i{Amd} does variable expansion
+on each location and also on some of the option strings.  Any option or
+selector appearing in the form @code{$@dfn{var}} is replaced by the
+current value of that option or selector.  For example, if the value of
+@code{$@{key@}} was @samp{bin}, @code{$@{autodir@}} was @samp{/a} and
+@code{$@{fs@}} was `@t{$@{autodir@}}@t{/local/}@t{$@{key@}}' then
+after expansion @code{$@{fs@}} would have the value @samp{/a/local/bin}.
+Any environment variable can be accessed in a similar way.@refill
+
+Two pathname operators are available when expanding a variable.  If the
+variable name begins with @samp{/} then only the last component of the
+pathname is substituted.  For example, if @code{$@{path@}} was
+@samp{/foo/bar} then @code{$@{/path@}} would be expanded to @samp{bar}.
+Similarly, if the variable name ends with @samp{/} then all but the last
+component of the pathname is substituted.  In the previous example,
+@code{$@{path/@}} would be expanded to @samp{/foo}.@refill
+
+Two domain name operators are also provided.  If the variable name
+begins with @samp{.} then only the domain part of the name is
+substituted.  For example, if @code{$@{rhost@}} was
+@samp{swan.doc.ic.ac.uk} then @code{$@{.rhost@}} would be expanded to
+@samp{doc.ic.ac.uk}.  Similarly, if the variable name ends with @samp{.}
+then only the host component is substituted.  In the previous example,
+@code{$@{rhost.@}} would be expanded to @samp{swan}.@refill
+
+Variable expansion is a two phase process.  Before a location is parsed,
+all references to selectors, @i{eg} @code{$@{path@}}, are expanded.  The
+location is then parsed, selections are evaluated and option assignments
+recorded.  If there were no selections or they all succeeded the
+location is used and the values of the following options are expanded in
+the order given: @var{sublink}, @var{rfs}, @var{fs}, @var{opts},
+@var{remopts}, @var{mount} and @var{unmount}.
+
+Note that expansion of option values is done after @dfn{all} assignments
+have been completed and not in a purely left to right order as is done
+by the shell.  This generally has the desired effect but care must be
+taken if one of the options references another, in which case the
+ordering can become significant.
+
+There are two special cases concerning variable expansion:
+
+@enumerate
+@item
+before a map is consulted, any selectors in the name received
+from the kernel are expanded.  For example, if the request from the
+kernel was for `@t{$@{arch@}}@t{.bin}' and the machine architecture
+was @samp{vax}, the value given to @code{$@{key@}} would be
+@samp{vax.bin}.@refill
+
+@item
+the value of @code{$@{rhost@}} is expanded and normalized before the
+other options are expanded.  The normalization process strips any local
+sub-domain components.  For example, if @code{$@{domain@}} was
+@samp{Berkeley.EDU} and @code{$@{rhost@}} was initially
+@samp{snow.Berkeley.EDU}, after the normalization it would simply be
+@samp{snow}.  Hostname normalization is currently done in a
+@emph{case-dependent} manner.@refill
+@end enumerate
+
+@c======================================================================
+@node Selectors, Map Options, Variable Expansion, Location Format
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Selectors
+@cindex Selectors
+
+Selectors are used to control the use of a location.  It is possible to
+share a mount map between many machines in such a way that filesystem
+location, architecture and operating system differences are hidden from
+the users.  A selector of the form @samp{arch==sun3;os==sunos4} would only
+apply on Sun-3s running SunOS 4.x.
+
+Selectors can be negated by using @samp{!=} instead of @samp{==}.  For
+example to select a location on all non-Vax machines the selector
+@samp{arch!=vax} would be used.
+
+Selectors are evaluated left to right.  If a selector fails then that
+location is ignored.  Thus the selectors form a conjunction and the
+locations form a disjunction.  If all the locations are ignored or
+otherwise fail then @i{Amd} uses the @dfn{error} filesystem
+(@pxref{Error Filesystem}).  This is equivalent to having a location
+@samp{type:=error} at the end of each mount-map entry.@refill
+
+The default value of many of the selectors listed here can be overridden
+by an @i{Amd} command line switch or in an @i{Amd} configuration file.
+@xref{Amd Configuration File}.
+
+These are the selectors currently implemented.
+
+@menu
+* arch Selector Variable::
+* autodir Selector Variable::
+* byte Selector Variable::
+* cluster Selector Variable::
+* domain Selector Variable::
+* host Selector Variable::
+* hostd Selector Variable::
+* karch Selector Variable::
+* os Selector Variable::
+* osver Selector Variable::
+
+* key Selector Variable::
+* map Selector Variable::
+* netnumber Selector Variable::
+* network Selector Variable::
+* path Selector Variable::
+* wire Selector Variable::
+
+* exists Selector Function::
+* false Selector Function::
+* netgrp Selector Function::
+* in_network Selector Function::
+* true Selector Function::
+@end menu
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node arch Selector Variable, autodir Selector Variable, Selectors, Selectors
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection arch Selector Variable
+@cindex arch Selector Variable
+@cindex arch, mount selector
+@cindex Mount selector; arch
+@cindex Selector; arch
+
+The machine architecture which was automatically determined at compile
+time.  The architecture type can be displayed by running the command
+@samp{amd -v}.  @xref{Supported Platforms}.@refill
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node autodir Selector Variable, byte Selector Variable, arch Selector Variable, Selectors
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection autodir Selector Variable
+@cindex autodir Selector Variable
+@cindex autodir, mount selector
+@cindex Mount selector; autodir
+@cindex Selector; autodir
+
+The default directory under which to mount filesystems.  This may be
+changed by the @code{-a} command line option.  @xref{fs Option}.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node byte Selector Variable, cluster Selector Variable, autodir Selector Variable, Selectors
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection byte Selector Variable
+@cindex byte Selector Variable
+@cindex byte, mount selector
+@cindex Mount selector; byte
+@cindex Selector; byte
+
+The machine's byte ordering.  This is either @samp{little}, indicating
+little-endian, or @samp{big}, indicating big-endian.  One possible use
+is to share @samp{rwho} databases (@pxref{rwho servers}).  Another is to
+share ndbm databases, however this use can be considered a courageous
+juggling act.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node cluster Selector Variable, domain Selector Variable, byte Selector Variable, Selectors
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection cluster Selector Variable
+@cindex cluster Selector Variable
+@cindex cluster, mount selector
+@cindex Mount selector; cluster
+@cindex Selector; cluster
+
+This is provided as a hook for the name of the local cluster.  This can
+be used to decide which servers to use for copies of replicated
+filesystems.  @code{$@{cluster@}} defaults to the value of
+@code{$@{domain@}} unless a different value is set with the @code{-C}
+command line option.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node domain Selector Variable, host Selector Variable, cluster Selector Variable, Selectors
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection domain Selector Variable
+@cindex domain Selector Variable
+@cindex domain, mount selector
+@cindex Mount selector; domain
+@cindex Selector; domain
+
+The local domain name as specified by the @code{-d} command line option.
+@xref{host Selector Variable}.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node host Selector Variable, hostd Selector Variable, domain Selector Variable, Selectors
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection host Selector Variable
+@cindex host Selector Variable
+@cindex host, mount selector
+@cindex Mount selector; host
+@cindex Selector; host
+
+The local hostname as determined by @b{gethostname}(2).  If no domain
+name was specified on the command line and the hostname contains a
+period @samp{.} then the string before the period is used as the host
+name, and the string after the period is assigned to @code{$@{domain@}}.
+For example, if the hostname is @samp{styx.doc.ic.ac.uk} then
+@code{host} would be @samp{styx} and @code{domain} would be
+@samp{doc.ic.ac.uk}.  @code{hostd} would be
+@samp{styx.doc.ic.ac.uk}.@refill
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node hostd Selector Variable, karch Selector Variable, host Selector Variable, Selectors
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection hostd Selector Variable
+@cindex hostd Selector Variable
+@cindex hostd, mount selector
+@cindex Mount selector; hostd
+@cindex Selector; hostd
+
+This resolves to the @code{$@{host@}} and @code{$@{domain@}}
+concatenated with a @samp{.} inserted between them if required.  If
+@code{$@{domain@}} is an empty string then @code{$@{host@}} and
+@code{$@{hostd@}} will be identical.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node karch Selector Variable, os Selector Variable, hostd Selector Variable, Selectors
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection karch Selector Variable
+@cindex karch Selector Variable
+@cindex karch, mount selector
+@cindex Mount selector; karch
+@cindex Selector; karch
+
+This is provided as a hook for the kernel architecture.  This is used on
+SunOS 4 and SunOS 5, for example, to distinguish between different
+@samp{/usr/kvm} volumes.  @code{$@{karch@}} defaults to the ``machine''
+value gotten from @b{uname}(2).  If the @b{uname}(2) system call is not
+available, the value of @code{$@{karch@}} defaults to that of
+@code{$@{arch@}}.  Finally, a different value can be set with the @code{-k}
+command line option.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node os Selector Variable, osver Selector Variable, karch Selector Variable, Selectors
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection os Selector Variable
+@cindex os Selector Variable
+@cindex os, mount selector
+@cindex Mount selector; os
+@cindex Selector; os
+
+The operating system.  Like the machine architecture, this is
+automatically determined at compile time.  The operating system name can
+be displayed by running the command @samp{amd -v}.  @xref{Supported
+Platforms}.@refill
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node osver Selector Variable, key Selector Variable, os Selector Variable, Selectors
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection osver Selector Variable
+@cindex osver Selector Variable
+@cindex osver, mount selector
+@cindex Mount selector; osver
+@cindex Selector; osver
+
+The operating system version.  Like the machine architecture, this is
+automatically determined at compile time.  The operating system name can
+be displayed by running the command @samp{amd -v}.  @xref{Supported
+Platforms}.@refill
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@ifhtml
+<HR>
+@end ifhtml
+@sp 3
+The following selectors are also provided.  Unlike the other selectors,
+they vary for each lookup.  Note that when the name from the kernel is
+expanded prior to a map lookup, these selectors are all defined as empty
+strings.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node key Selector Variable, map Selector Variable, osver Selector Variable, Selectors
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection key Selector Variable
+@cindex key Selector Variable
+@cindex key, mount selector
+@cindex Mount selector; key
+@cindex Selector; key
+
+The name being resolved.  For example, if @file{/home} is an automount
+point, then accessing @file{/home/foo} would set @code{$@{key@}} to the
+string @samp{foo}.  The key is prefixed by the @var{pref} option set in
+the parent mount point.  The default prefix is an empty string.  If the
+prefix was @file{blah/} then @code{$@{key@}} would be set to
+@file{blah/foo}.@refill
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node map Selector Variable, netnumber Selector Variable, key Selector Variable, Selectors
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection map Selector Variable
+@cindex map Selector Variable
+@cindex map, mount selector
+@cindex Mount selector; map
+@cindex Selector; map
+
+The name of the mount map being used.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node netnumber Selector Variable, network Selector Variable, map Selector Variable, Selectors
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection netnumber Selector Variable
+@cindex netnumber Selector Variable
+@cindex netnumber, mount selector
+@cindex Mount selector; netnumber
+@cindex Selector; netnumber
+
+This selector is identical to the @samp{in_network} selector function,
+see @ref{in_network Selector Function}.  It will match either the name
+or number of @i{any} network interface on which this host is connected
+to.  The names and numbers of all attached interfaces are available from
+the output of @samp{amd -v}.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node network Selector Variable, path Selector Variable, netnumber Selector Variable, Selectors
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection network Selector Variable
+@cindex network Selector Variable
+@cindex network, mount selector
+@cindex Mount selector; network
+@cindex Selector; network
+
+This selector is identical to the @samp{in_network} selector function,
+see @ref{in_network Selector Function}.  It will match either the name
+or number of @i{any} network interface on which this host is connected
+to.  The names and numbers of all attached interfaces are available from
+the output of @samp{amd -v}.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node path Selector Variable, wire Selector Variable, network Selector Variable, Selectors
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection path Selector Variable
+@cindex path Selector Variable
+@cindex path, mount selector
+@cindex Mount selector; path
+@cindex Selector; path
+
+The full pathname of the name being resolved.  For example
+@file{/home/foo} in the example above.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node wire Selector Variable, exists Selector Function, path Selector Variable, Selectors
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection wire Selector Variable
+@cindex wire Selector Variable
+@cindex wire, mount selector
+@cindex Mount selector; wire
+@cindex Selector; wire
+
+This selector is identical to the @samp{in_network} selector function,
+see @ref{in_network Selector Function}.  It will match either the name
+or number of @i{any} network interface on which this host is connected
+to.  The names and numbers of all attached interfaces are available from
+the output of @samp{amd -v}.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@ifhtml
+<HR>
+@end ifhtml
+@sp 2
+The following boolean functions are selectors which take an argument
+@i{ARG}.  They return a value of true or false, and thus do not need to
+be compared with a value.  Each of these may be negated by prepending
+@samp{!} to their name.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node exists Selector Function, false Selector Function, wire Selector Variable, Selectors
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection exists Selector Function
+@cindex exists Selector Function
+@cindex exists, boolean mount selector
+@cindex !exists, boolean mount selector
+@cindex Mount selector; exists
+@cindex Selector; exists
+
+If the file listed by @i{ARG} exists (via @b{lstat}(2)), this function
+evaluates to true.  Otherwise it evaluates to false.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node false Selector Function, netgrp Selector Function, exists Selector Function, Selectors
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection false Selector Function
+@cindex false Selector Function
+@cindex false, boolean mount selector
+@cindex !false, boolean mount selector
+@cindex Mount selector; false
+@cindex Selector; false
+
+Always evaluates to false.  @i{ARG} is ignored.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node netgrp Selector Function, in_network Selector Function, false Selector Function, Selectors
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection netgrp Selector Function
+@cindex netgrp Selector Function
+@cindex netgrp, boolean mount selector
+@cindex !netgrp, boolean mount selector
+@cindex Mount selector; netgrp
+@cindex Selector; netgrp
+
+If the current host as determined by the value of @code{$@{host@}} is a
+member of the netgroup @i{ARG}, this selector evaluates to true.
+Otherwise it evaluates to false.
+
+For example, suppose you have a netgroup @samp{ppp-hosts}, and for
+reasons of performance, these have a local @file{/home} partition, while
+all other clients on the faster network can access a shared home
+directory.  A common map to use for both might look like the following:
+
+@example
+home/*  netgrp(ppp-hosts);type:=link;fs:=/local/$@{key@} \
+        !netgrp(ppp-hosts);type:=nfs;rhost=serv1;rfs:=/remote/$@{key@}
+@end example
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node in_network Selector Function, true Selector Function, netgrp Selector Function, Selectors
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection in_network Selector Function
+@cindex in_network Selector Function
+@cindex in_network, boolean mount selector
+@cindex !in_network, boolean mount selector
+@cindex Mount selector; in_network
+@cindex Selector; in_network
+
+If the current host has any network interface that is locally attached
+to the network specified in @i{ARG} (either via name or number), this
+selector evaluates to true.  Otherwise it evaluates to false.
+
+For example, suppose you have two servers that have an exportable
+@file{/opt} that smaller clients can NFS mount.  The two servers are
+say, @samp{serv1} on network @samp{foo-net.site.com} and @samp{serv2} on
+network @samp{123.4.5.0}.  You can write a map to be used by all clients
+that will attempt to mount the closest one as follows:
+
+@example
+opt in_network(foo-net.site.com);rhost:=serv1;rfs:=/opt \
+    in_network(123.4.5.0);rhost:=serv2;rfs:=/opt \
+    rhost:=fallback-server
+@end example
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node true Selector Function, , in_network Selector Function, Selectors
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection true Selector Function
+@cindex true Selector Function
+@cindex true, boolean mount selector
+@cindex !true, boolean mount selector
+@cindex Mount selector; true
+@cindex Selector; true
+
+Always evaluates to true.  @i{ARG} is ignored.
+
+@c ================================================================
+@node Map Options,  , Selectors, Location Format
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Map Options
+@cindex Map options
+@cindex Setting map options
+
+Options are parsed concurrently with selectors.  The difference is that
+when an option is seen the string following the @samp{:=} is
+recorded for later use.  As a minimum the @var{type} option must be
+specified.  Each filesystem type has other options which must also be
+specified.  @xref{Filesystem Types}, for details on the filesystem
+specific options.@refill
+
+Superfluous option specifications are ignored and are not reported
+as errors.
+
+The following options apply to more than one filesystem type.
+
+@menu
+* addopts Option::
+* delay Option::
+* fs Option::
+* opts Option::
+* remopts Option::
+* sublink Option::
+* type Option::
+@end menu
+
+@node addopts Option, delay Option, Map Options, Map Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection addopts Option
+@cindex Setting additional options on a mount location
+@cindex Overriding or adding options to a mount
+@cindex addopts, mount option
+@cindex Mount option; addopts
+
+This option adds additional options to default options normally
+specified in the @samp{/defaults} entry or the defaults of the key entry
+being processed (@xref{opts Option}).  Normally when you specify
+@samp{opts} in both the @samp{/defaults} and the map entry, the latter
+overrides the former completely.  But with @samp{addopts} it will
+append the options and override any conflicting ones.
+
+Options which start with @samp{no} will override those with the same
+name that do not start with @samp{no} and vice verse.  Special handling
+is given to inverted options such as @samp{soft} and @samp{hard},
+@samp{bg} and @samp{fg}, @samp{ro} and @samp{rw}, etc.
+
+For example, if the default options specified were
+@example
+opts:=rw,nosuid,intr,rsize=1024,wsize=1024,quota,posix
+@end example
+
+and the ones specified in a map entry were
+
+@example
+addopts:=grpid,suid,ro,rsize=2048,quota,nointr
+@end example
+
+then the actual options used would be
+
+@example
+wsize=1024,posix,grpid,suid,ro,rsize=2048,quota,nointr
+@end example
+
+@node delay Option, fs Option, addopts Option, Map Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection delay Option
+@cindex Setting a delay on a mount location
+@cindex Delaying mounts from specific locations
+@cindex Primary server
+@cindex Secondary server
+@cindex delay, mount option
+@cindex Mount option; delay
+
+The delay, in seconds, before an attempt will be made to mount from the
+current location.  Auxiliary data, such as network address, file handles
+and so on are computed regardless of this value.
+
+A delay can be used to implement the notion of primary and secondary
+file servers.  The secondary servers would have a delay of a few
+seconds, thus giving the primary servers a chance to respond first.
+
+@node fs Option, opts Option, delay Option, Map Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection fs Option
+@cindex Setting the local mount point
+@cindex Overriding the default mount point
+@cindex fs, mount option
+@cindex Mount option; fs
+
+The local mount point.  The semantics of this option vary between
+filesystems.
+
+For NFS and UFS filesystems the value of @code{$@{fs@}} is used as the
+local mount point.  For other filesystem types it has other meanings
+which are described in the section describing the respective filesystem
+type.  It is important that this string uniquely identifies the
+filesystem being mounted.  To satisfy this requirement, it should
+contain the name of the host on which the filesystem is resident and the
+pathname of the filesystem on the local or remote host.
+
+The reason for requiring the hostname is clear if replicated filesystems
+are considered.  If a fileserver goes down and a replacement filesystem
+is mounted then the @dfn{local} mount point @dfn{must} be different from
+that of the filesystem which is hung.  Some encoding of the filesystem
+name is required if more than one filesystem is to be mounted from any
+given host.
+
+If the hostname is first in the path then all mounts from a particular
+host will be gathered below a single directory.  If that server goes
+down then the hung mount points are less likely to be accidentally
+referenced, for example when @b{getcwd}(3) traverses the namespace to
+find the pathname of the current directory.
+
+The @samp{fs} option defaults to
+@code{$@{autodir@}/$@{rhost@}$@{rfs@}}.  In addition,
+@samp{rhost} defaults to the local host name (@code{$@{host@}}) and
+@samp{rfs} defaults to the value of @code{$@{path@}}, which is the full
+path of the requested file; @samp{/home/foo} in the example above
+(@pxref{Selectors}).  @code{$@{autodir@}} defaults to @samp{/a} but may
+be changed with the @code{-a} command line option.  Sun's automounter
+defaults to @samp{/tmp_mnt}.  Note that there is no @samp{/} between
+the @code{$@{rhost@}} and @code{$@{rfs@}} since @code{$@{rfs@}} begins
+with a @samp{/}.@refill
+
+@node opts Option, remopts Option, fs Option, Map Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection opts Option
+@cindex Setting system mount options
+@cindex Passing parameters to the mount system call
+@cindex mount system call
+@cindex mount system call flags
+@cindex The mount system call
+@cindex opts, mount option
+@cindex Mount option; opts
+
+The options to pass to the mount system call.  A leading @samp{-} is
+silently ignored.  The mount options supported generally correspond to
+those used by @b{mount}(8) and are listed below.  Some additional
+pseudo-options are interpreted by @i{Amd} and are also listed.
+
+Unless specifically overridden, each of the system default mount options
+applies.  Any options not recognized are ignored.  If no options list is
+supplied the string @samp{rw,defaults} is used and all the system
+default mount options apply.  Options which are not applicable for a
+particular operating system are silently ignored.  For example, only 4.4BSD
+is known to implement the @code{compress} and @code{spongy} options.
+
+@table @code
+
+@item acdirmax=@var{n}
+@cindex Mount flags; acdirmax
+Set the maximum directory attribute cache timeout to @var{n}.
+
+@item acdirmin=@var{n}
+@cindex Mount flags; acdirmin
+Set the minimum directory attribute cache timeout to @var{n}.
+
+@item acregmax=@var{n}
+@cindex Mount flags; acregmax
+Set the maximum file attribute cache timeout to @var{n}.
+
+@item acregmin=@var{n}
+@cindex Mount flags; acregmin
+Set the minimum file attribute cache timeout to @var{n}.
+
+@item actimeo=@var{n}
+@cindex Mount flags; actimeo
+Set the overall attribute cache timeout to @var{n}.
+
+@item auto
+@cindex Mount flags; auto
+@itemx ignore
+@cindex Mount flags; ignore
+Ignore this mount by @b{df}(1).
+
+@item cache
+@cindex Mount flags; cache
+Allow data to be cached from a remote server for this mount.
+
+@item compress
+@cindex Mount flags; compress
+Use NFS compression protocol.
+
+@item defperm
+@cindex Mount flags; defperm
+Ignore the permission mode bits, and default file permissions to 0555,
+UID 0, and GID 0.  Useful for CD-ROMs formatted as ISO-9660.
+
+@item dev
+@cindex Mount flags; dev
+Allow local special devices on this filesystem.
+
+@item dumbtimr
+@cindex Mount flags; dumbtimr
+(XXX: a dumb timer?)
+
+@item fsid
+@cindex Mount flags; fsid
+Set ID of filesystem.
+
+@item grpid
+@cindex Mount flags; grpid
+Use BSD directory group-id semantics.
+
+@item int
+@cindex Mount flags; int
+@itemx intr
+@cindex Mount flags; intr
+Allow keyboard interrupts on hard mounts.
+
+@item multi
+@cindex Mount flags; multi
+Perform multi-component lookup on files.
+
+@item maxgroups
+@cindex Mount flags; maxgroups
+Set the maximum number of groups to allow for this mount.
+
+@item nfsv3
+@cindex Mount flags; nfsv3
+Use NFS Version 3 for this mount.
+
+@item noac
+@cindex Mount flags; noac
+Turn off the attribute cache.
+
+@item noauto
+@cindex Mount flags; noauto
+(XXX: No automatic what?)
+
+@item nocache
+@cindex Mount flags; nocache
+Do not allow data to be cached from a remote server for this
+mount.
+
+@item noconn
+@cindex Mount flags; noconn
+Don't make a connection on datagram transports.
+
+@item nocto
+@cindex Mount flags; nocto
+No close-to-open consistency.
+
+@item nodefperm
+@cindex Mount flags; nodefperm
+Do not ignore the permission mode bits.  Useful for CD-ROMS formatted as
+ISO-9660.
+
+@item nodev
+@cindex Mount flags; nodev
+@itemx nodevs
+@cindex Mount flags; nodevs
+Don't allow local special devices on this filesystem.
+
+@item noint
+@cindex Mount flags; noint
+Do not allow keyboard interrupts for this mount
+
+@item nosub
+@cindex Mount flags; nosub
+Disallow mounts beneath this mount.
+
+@item nosuid
+@cindex Mount flags; nosuid
+Don't allow set-uid or set-gid executables on this filesystem.
+
+@item noversion
+@cindex Mount flags; noversion
+Strip the extension @samp{;#} from the version string of files recorded
+on an ISO-9660 CD-ROM.
+
+@item overlay
+@cindex Mount flags; overlay
+Overlay this mount on top of an existing mount, if any.
+
+@item pgthresh=@var{n}
+@cindex Mount flags; pgthresh
+Set the paging threshold to @var{n} kilobytes.
+
+@item port=@var{n}
+@cindex Mount flags; port
+Set the NFS port to @var{n}.
+
+@item posix
+@cindex Mount flags; posix
+Turn on POSIX static pathconf for mounts.
+
+@item proto=@var{s}
+@cindex Mount flags; proto
+Use transport protocol @var{s} for NFS (can be @code{"tcp"} or @code{"udp"}).
+
+@item quota
+@cindex Mount flags; quota
+Enable quota checking on this mount.
+
+@item rdonly
+@cindex Mount flags; rdonly
+@itemx ro
+@cindex Mount flags; ro
+Mount this filesystem readonly.
+
+@item resvport
+@cindex Mount flags; resvport
+Use a reserved port (smaller than 1024) for remote NFS mounts.  Most
+systems assume that, but some allow for mounts to occur on non-reserved
+ports.   This causes problems when such a system tries to NFS mount one
+that requires reserved ports.  It is recommended that this option always
+be on.
+
+@item retrans=@i{n}
+@cindex Mount flags; retrans
+The number of NFS retransmits made before a user error is generated by a
+@samp{soft} mounted filesystem, and before a @samp{hard} mounted
+filesystem reports @samp{NFS server @dfn{yoyo} not responding still
+trying}.
+
+@item retry
+@cindex Mount flags; retry
+Set the NFS retry counter.
+
+@item rrip
+@cindex Mount flags; rrip
+Uses the Rock Ridge Interchange Protocol (RRIP) extensions to ISO-9660.
+
+@item rsize=@var{n}
+@cindex Mount flags; rsize
+The NFS read packet size.  You may need to set this if you are using
+NFS/UDP through a gateway or a slow link.
+
+@item rw
+@cindex Mount flags; rw
+Allow reads and writes on this filesystem.
+
+@item soft
+@cindex Mount flags; soft
+Give up after @dfn{retrans} retransmissions.
+
+@item spongy
+@cindex Mount flags; spongy
+Like @samp{soft} for status requests, and @samp{hard} for data transfers.
+
+@item suid
+@cindex Mount flags; suid
+Allow set-uid programs on this mount.
+
+@item symttl
+@cindex Mount flags; symttl
+Turn of the symbolic link cache time-to-live.
+
+@item sync
+@cindex Mount flags; sync
+Perform synchronous filesystem operations on this mount.
+
+@item tcp
+@cindex Mount flags; tcp
+Use TCP/IP instead of UDP/IP, ignored if the NFS implementation does not
+support TCP/IP mounts.
+
+@item timeo=@var{n}
+@cindex Mount flags; timeo
+The NFS timeout, in tenth-seconds, before a request is retransmitted.
+
+@item vers=@var{n}
+@cindex Mount flags; vers
+ Use NFS protocol version number @var{n} (can be 2 or 3).
+
+@item wsize=@var{n}
+@cindex Mount flags; wsize
+The NFS write packet size.  You may need to set this if you are using
+NFS/UDP through a gateway or a slow link.
+
+@end table
+
+The following options are implemented by @i{Amd}, rather than being
+passed to the kernel.
+
+@table @code
+
+@item nounmount
+@cindex Mount flags; nounmount
+Configures the mount so that its time-to-live will
+never expire.  This is also the default for some filesystem types.
+@c
+@c Implementation broken:
+
+@item ping=@var{n}
+@cindex Mount flags; ping
+The interval, in seconds, between keep-alive pings.  When four
+consecutive pings have failed the mount point is marked as hung.  This
+interval defaults to 30 seconds.  If the ping interval is less than zero,
+no pings are sent and the host is assumed to be always
+up.  By default, pings are not sent for an NFS/TCP mount.
+
+@item retry=@var{n}
+@cindex Mount flags; retry=@var{n}
+The number of times to retry the mount system call.
+
+@item utimeout=@var{n}
+@cindex Mount flags; utimeout=@var{n}
+The interval, in seconds, by which the mount's
+time-to-live is extended after an unmount attempt
+has failed.  In fact the interval is extended before the unmount is
+attempted to avoid thrashing.  The default value is 120 seconds (two
+minutes) or as set by the @code{-w} command line option.
+
+@end table
+
+@node remopts Option, sublink Option, opts Option, Map Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection remopts Option
+@cindex Setting system mount options for non-local networks
+@cindex remopts, mount option
+@cindex Mount option; remopts
+
+This option has the same use as @code{$@{opts@}} but applies only when
+the remote host is on a non-local network.  For example, when using NFS
+across a gateway it is often necessary to use smaller values for the
+data read and write sizes.  This can simply be done by specifying the
+small values in @var{remopts}.  When a non-local host is accessed, the
+smaller sizes will automatically be used.
+
+@i{Amd} determines whether a host is local by examining the network
+interface configuration at startup.  Any interface changes made after
+@i{Amd} has been started will not be noticed.  The likely effect will
+be that a host may incorrectly be declared non-local.
+
+Unless otherwise set, the value of @code{$@{remopts@}} is the same as
+the value of @code{$@{opts@}}.
+
+@node sublink Option, type Option, remopts Option, Map Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection sublink Option
+@cindex Setting the sublink option
+@cindex sublink, mount option
+@cindex Mount option; sublink
+
+The subdirectory within the mounted filesystem to which the reference
+should point.  This can be used to prevent duplicate mounts in cases
+where multiple directories in the same mounted filesystem are used.
+
+@node type Option, , sublink Option, Map Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection type Option
+@cindex Setting the filesystem type option
+@cindex type, mount option
+@cindex Mount option; type
+
+The filesystem type to be used.  @xref{Filesystem Types}, for a full
+description of each type.@refill
+
+@c ################################################################
+@node Amd Command Line Options, Filesystem Types, Mount Maps, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter @i{Amd} Command Line Options
+@cindex Command line options, Amd
+@cindex Amd command line options
+@cindex Overriding defaults on the command line
+
+Many of @i{Amd}'s parameters can be set from the command line.  The
+command line is also used to specify automount points and maps.
+
+The general format of a command line is
+
+@example
+amd [@i{options}] [@{ @i{directory} @i{map-name} [-@i{map-options}] @} ...]
+@end example
+
+For each directory and map-name given or specified in the
+@file{amd.conf} file, @i{Amd} establishes an automount point.  The
+@dfn{map-options} may be any sequence of options or
+selectors---@pxref{Location Format}.  The @dfn{map-options} apply only
+to @i{Amd}'s mount point.
+
+@samp{type:=toplvl;cache:=mapdefault;fs:=$@{map@}} is the default value for the
+map options.  Default options for a map are read from a special entry in
+the map whose key is the string @samp{/defaults}.  When default options
+are given they are prepended to any options specified in the mount-map
+locations as explained in @ref{Map Defaults}.
+
+The @dfn{options} are any combination of those listed below.
+
+Once the command line has been parsed, the automount points are mounted.
+The mount points are created if they do not already exist, in which case they
+will be removed when @i{Amd} exits.
+Finally, @i{Amd} disassociates itself from its controlling terminal and
+forks into the background.
+
+Note: Even if @i{Amd} has been built with @samp{-DDEBUG} (via
+@code{configure --enable-debug}), it will still background itself and
+disassociate itself from the controlling terminal.  To use a debugger it
+is necessary to specify @samp{-D nodaemon} on the command line.
+However, even with all of this, mounts and unmounts are performed in the
+background, and @i{Amd} will always fork before doing them.  Therefore,
+debugging what happens closely during un/mounts is more challenging.
+
+@emph{All} of @i{Amd}'s command options (save @code{-F} and @code{-T})
+can be specified in the @file{amd.conf} file. @xref{Amd Configuration
+File}.  If @i{Amd} is invoked without any command line options, it will
+default to using the configuration file @file{/etc/amd.conf}, if one
+exists.
+
+@menu
+* -a Option::   Automount directory.
+* -c Option::   Cache timeout interval.
+* -d Option::   Domain name.
+* -k Option::   Kernel architecture.
+* -l Option::   Log file.
+* -n Option::   Hostname normalization.
+* -o Option::   Operating system version.
+* -p Option::   Output process id.
+* -r Option::   Restart existing mounts.
+* -t Option::   Kernel RPC timeout.
+* -v Option::   Version information.
+* -w Option::   Wait interval after failed unmount.
+* -x Option::   Log options.
+* -y Option::   NIS domain.
+* -C-Option::   Cluster name.
+* -D-Option::   Debug flags.
+* -F Option::   Amd configuration file.
+* -H Option::   Show brief help.
+* -O-Option::   Operating system name.
+* -S Option::   Lock executable pages in memory.
+* -T-Option::   Set tag for configuration file.
+@end menu
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node -a Option, -c Option, Amd Command Line Options, Amd Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @code{-a} @var{directory}
+@cindex Automount directory
+@cindex Setting the default mount directory
+
+Specifies the default mount directory.  This option changes the variable
+@code{$@{autodir@}} which otherwise defaults to @file{/a}.  For example,
+some sites prefer @file{/amd} or @file{/n}.
+
+@example
+amd -a /amd ...
+@end example
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node -c Option, -d Option, -a Option, Amd Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @code{-c} @var{cache-interval}
+@cindex Cache interval
+@cindex Interval before a filesystem times out
+@cindex Setting the interval before a filesystem times out
+@cindex Changing the interval before a filesystem times out
+
+Selects the period, in seconds, for which a name is cached by @i{Amd}.
+If no reference is made to the volume in this period, @i{Amd} discards
+the volume name to filesystem mapping.
+
+Once the last reference to a filesystem has been removed, @i{Amd}
+attempts to unmount the filesystem.  If the unmount fails the interval
+is extended by a further period as specified by the @samp{-w} command
+line option or by the @samp{utimeout} mount option.
+
+The default @dfn{cache-interval} is 300 seconds (five minutes).
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node -d Option, -k Option, -c Option, Amd Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @code{-d} @var{domain}
+@cindex Domain name
+@cindex Setting the local domain name
+@cindex Overriding the local domain name
+
+Specifies the host's domain.  This sets the internal variable
+@code{$@{domain@}} and affects the @code{$@{hostd@}} variable.
+
+If this option is not specified and the hostname already contains the
+local domain then that is used, otherwise the default value of
+@code{$@{domain@}} is @samp{unknown.domain}.
+
+For example, if the local domain was @samp{doc.ic.ac.uk}, @i{Amd} could
+be started as follows:
+
+@example
+amd -d doc.ic.ac.uk ...
+@end example
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node -k Option, -l Option, -d Option, Amd Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @code{-k} @var{kernel-architecture}
+@cindex Setting the Kernel architecture
+
+Specifies the kernel architecture of the system.  This is usually the
+output of @samp{uname -m} (the ``machine'' value gotten from
+@b{uname}(2)).  If the @b{uname}(2) system call is not available, the
+value of @code{$@{karch@}} defaults to that of @code{$@{arch@}}.
+
+The only effect of this option is to set the variable @code{$@{karch@}}.
+
+This option would be used as follows:
+
+@example
+amd -k `arch -k` ...
+@end example
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node -l Option, -n Option, -k Option, Amd Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @code{-l} @var{log-option}
+@cindex Log filename
+@cindex Setting the log file
+@cindex Using syslog to log errors
+@cindex syslog
+
+Selects the form of logging to be made.  Several special @dfn{log-options}
+are recognized.
+
+@enumerate
+@item
+If @dfn{log-option} is the string @samp{syslog}, @i{Amd} will use the
+@b{syslog}(3) mechanism.  If your system supports syslog facilities, then
+the default facility used is @samp{LOG_DAEMON}.
+
+@item
+@cindex syslog facility; specifying an alternate
+When using syslog, if you wish to change the facility, append its name
+to the log option name, delimited by a single colon.  For example, if
+@dfn{log-options} is the string @samp{syslog:local7} then @b{Amd} will
+log messages via @b{syslog}(3) using the @samp{LOG_LOCAL7} facility.  If
+the facility name specified is not recognized, @i{Amd} will default to
+@samp{LOG_DAEMON}.  Note: while you can use any syslog facility
+available on your system, it is generally a bad idea to use those
+reserved for other services such as @samp{kern}, @samp{lpr},
+@samp{cron}, etc.
+
+@item
+If @dfn{log-option} is the string @samp{/dev/stderr}, @i{Amd} will use
+standard error, which is also the default target for log messages.  To
+implement this, @i{Amd} simulates the effect of the @samp{/dev/fd}
+driver.
+@end enumerate
+
+Any other string is taken as a filename to use for logging.  Log
+messages are appended to the file if it already exists, otherwise a new
+file is created.  The file is opened once and then held open, rather
+than being re-opened for each message.
+
+Normally, when long-running daemons hold an open file descriptor on a
+log file, it is impossible to ``rotate'' the log file and compress older
+logs on a daily basis.  The daemon needs to be told to discard (via
+@b{close}(2)) its file handle, and re-open the log file.  This is done
+using @code{amq -l} @i{log-option}. @xref{Amq -l option}.
+
+If the @samp{syslog} option is specified but the system does not support
+syslog or if the named file cannot be opened or created, @i{Amd} will
+use standard error.  Error messages generated before @i{Amd} has
+finished parsing the command line are printed on standard error.
+
+Since @i{Amd} tends to generate a lot of logging information (especially
+if debugging was turned on), and due to it being an important program
+running on the system, it is usually best to log to a separate disk
+file.  In that case @i{Amd} would be started as follows:
+
+@example
+amd -l /var/log/amd ...
+@end example
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node -n Option, -o Option, -l Option, Amd Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @code{-n}
+@cindex Hostname normalization
+@cindex Aliased hostnames
+@cindex Resolving aliased hostnames
+@cindex Normalizing hostnames
+
+Normalizes the remote hostname before using it.  Normalization is done
+by replacing the value of @code{$@{rhost@}} with the (generally fully
+qualified) primary name returned by a hostname lookup.
+
+This option should be used if several names are used to refer to a
+single host in a mount map.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node -o Option, -p Option, -n Option, Amd Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @code{-o} @var{op-sys-ver}
+@cindex Operating System version
+@cindex Setting the Operating System version
+
+Override the compiled-in version number of the operating system, with
+@var{op-sys-ver}.  Useful when the built-in version is not desired for
+backward compatibility reasons.  For example, if the built-in version is
+@samp{2.5.1}, you can override it to @samp{5.5.1}, and use older maps
+that were written with the latter in mind.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node -p Option, -r Option, -o Option, Amd Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @code{-p}
+@cindex Process id
+@cindex Displaying the process id
+@cindex process id of Amd daemon
+@cindex pid file, creating with -p option
+@cindex Creating a pid file
+
+Causes @i{Amd}'s process id to be printed on standard output.
+This can be redirected to a suitable file for use with kill:
+
+@example
+amd -p > /var/run/amd.pid ...
+@end example
+
+This option only has an affect if @i{Amd} is running in daemon mode.
+If @i{Amd} is started with the @code{-D nodaemon} debug flag, this
+option is ignored.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node -r Option, -t Option, -p Option, Amd Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @code{-r}
+@cindex Restarting existing mounts
+@cindex Picking up existing mounts
+
+Tells @i{Amd} to restart existing mounts (@pxref{Inheritance Filesystem}).
+@c @dfn{This option will be made the default in the next release.}
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node -t Option, -v Option, -r Option, Amd Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @code{-t} @var{timeout.retransmit}
+@cindex Setting Amd's RPC parameters
+
+Specifies the RPC @dfn{timeout} and @dfn{retransmit} intervals used by
+the kernel to communicate to @i{Amd}.  These are used to set the
+@samp{timeo} and @samp{retrans} mount options.
+
+@i{Amd} relies on the kernel RPC retransmit mechanism to trigger mount
+retries.  The value of this parameter changes the retry interval.  Too
+long an interval gives poor interactive response, too short an interval
+causes excessive retries.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node -v Option, -w Option, -t Option, Amd Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @code{-v}
+@cindex Version information
+@cindex Discovering version information
+@cindex How to discover your version of Amd
+
+Print version information on standard error and then exit.  The output
+is of the form:
+
+@example
+Copyright (c) 1997-1998 Erez Zadok
+Copyright (c) 1990 Jan-Simon Pendry
+Copyright (c) 1990 Imperial College of Science, Technology & Medicine
+Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
+am-utils version 6.0a15 (build 61).
+Built by ezk@@cs.columbia.edu on date Wed Oct 22 15:21:03 EDT 1997.
+cpu=sparc (big-endian), arch=sun4, karch=sun4u.
+full_os=solaris2.5.1, os=sos5, osver=5.5.1, vendor=sun.
+Map support for: root, passwd, union, nisplus, nis, ndbm, file, error.
+AMFS: nfs, link, nfsx, nfsl, host, linkx, program, union, inherit, 
+      ufs, lofs, hsfs, pcfs, auto, direct, toplvl, error.
+FS: autofs, cachefs, cdfs, lofs, nfs, nfs3, pcfs, tfs, tmpfs, ufs.
+Network 1: wire="mcl-lab-net.cs.columbia.edu" (netnumber=128.59.13).
+Network 2: wire="14-net.cs.columbia.edu" (netnumber=128.59.14).
+Network 3: wire="old-net.cs.columbia.edu" (netnumber=128.59.16).
+@end example
+
+The information includes the version number, number of times @i{Amd} was
+compiled on the local system, release date and name of the release.
+Following come the cpu type, byte ordering, and the architecture and
+kernel architecture as @code{$@{arch@}} and @code{$@{karch@}},
+respectively.  The next line lists the full name of the system, the
+variables @code{$@{os@}} and @code{$@{osver@}}, and the vendor's
+name. @xref{Supported Platforms}.
+
+Then come a list of map types supported, filesystems internally
+supported by @i{Amd} (AMFS), and generic filesystems available (FS).
+Finally all known networks (if any) of this host are listed by name
+and number.  They are available via the variables
+@code{$@{wire@}} or @code{$@{network@}}, and
+@code{$@{netnumber@}} (@pxref{Selectors}) or the @samp{in_network}
+selector function (@pxref{in_network Selector Function}).
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node -w Option, -x Option, -v Option, Amd Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @code{-w} @var{wait-timeout}
+@cindex Setting the interval between unmount attempts
+@cindex unmount attempt backoff interval
+
+Selects the interval in seconds between unmount attempts after the
+initial time-to-live has expired.
+
+This defaults to 120 seconds (two minutes).
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node -x Option, -y Option, -w Option, Amd Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @code{-x} @var{opts}
+@cindex Log message selection
+@cindex Selecting specific log messages
+@cindex How to select log messages
+@cindex syslog priorities
+
+Specifies the type and verbosity of log messages.  @dfn{opts} is
+a comma separated list selected from the following options:
+
+@table @code
+@item fatal
+Fatal errors
+@item error
+Non-fatal errors
+@item user
+Non-fatal user errors
+@item warn
+Recoverable errors
+@item warning
+Alias for @code{warn}
+@item info
+Information messages
+@item map
+Mount map usage
+@item stats
+Additional statistics
+@item all
+All of the above
+@end table
+
+Initially a set of default logging flags is enabled.  This is as if
+@samp{-x all,nomap,nostats} had been selected.  The command line is
+parsed and logging is controlled by the @code{-x} option.  The very first
+set of logging flags is saved and can not be subsequently disabled using
+@i{Amq}.  This default set of options is useful for general production
+use.@refill
+
+The @samp{info} messages include details of what is mounted and
+unmounted and when filesystems have timed out.  If you want to have the
+default set of messages without the @samp{info} messages then you simply
+need @samp{-x noinfo}.  The messages given by @samp{user} relate to
+errors in the mount maps, so these are useful when new maps are
+installed.  The following table lists the syslog priorities used for each
+of the message types.@refill
+
+@table @code
+@item fatal
+@samp{LOG_CRIT}
+@item error
+@samp{LOG_ERR}
+@item user
+@samp{LOG_WARNING}
+@item warning
+@samp{LOG_WARNING}
+@item info
+@samp{LOG_INFO}
+@item debug
+@samp{LOG_DEBUG}
+@item map
+@samp{LOG_DEBUG}
+@item stats
+@samp{LOG_INFO}
+@end table
+
+
+The options can be prefixed by the string @samp{no} to indicate
+that this option should be turned off.  For example, to obtain all
+but @samp{info} messages the option @samp{-x all,noinfo} would be used.
+
+If @i{Amd} was built with debugging enabled the @code{debug} option is
+automatically enabled regardless of the command line options.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node -y Option, -C-Option, -x Option, Amd Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @code{-y} @var{NIS-domain}
+@cindex NIS (YP) domain name
+@cindex Overriding the NIS (YP) domain name
+@cindex Setting the NIS (YP) domain name
+@cindex YP domain name
+
+Selects an alternate NIS domain.  This is useful for debugging and
+cross-domain shared mounting.  If this flag is specified, @i{Amd}
+immediately attempts to bind to a server for this domain.
+@c @i{Amd} refers to NIS maps when it starts, unless the @code{-m} option
+@c is specified, and whenever required in a mount map.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node -C-Option, -D-Option, -y Option, Amd Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @code{-C} @var{cluster-name}
+@cindex Cluster names
+@cindex Setting the cluster name
+
+Specifies the name of the cluster of which the local machine is a member.
+The only effect is to set the variable @code{$@{cluster@}}.
+The @dfn{cluster-name} is will usually obtained by running another command which uses
+a database to map the local hostname into a cluster name.
+@code{$@{cluster@}} can then be used as a selector to restrict mounting of
+replicated data.
+If this option is not given, @code{$@{cluster@}} has the same value as @code{$@{domain@}}.
+This would be used as follows:
+
+@example
+amd -C `clustername` ...
+@end example
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node -D-Option, -F Option, -C-Option, Amd Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @code{-D} @var{opts}
+@cindex Debug options
+@cindex Setting debug flags
+
+Controls the verbosity and coverage of the debugging trace; @dfn{opts}
+is a comma separated list of debugging options.  The @code{-D} option is
+only available if @i{Amd} was compiled with @samp{-DDEBUG}, or
+configured with @code{configure --enable-debug}.  The memory debugging
+facilities (@samp{mem}) are only available if @i{Amd} was compiled with
+@samp{-DDEBUG_MEM} (in addition to @samp{-DDEBUG}), or configured with
+@code{configure --enable-debug=mem}.
+
+The most common options to use are @samp{-D trace} and @samp{-D test}
+(which turns on all the useful debug options).  As usual, every option
+can be prefixed with @samp{no} to turn it off.
+
+@table @code
+@item all
+all options
+@item amq
+register for amq
+@item daemon
+enter daemon mode
+@item fork
+fork server
+@item full
+program trace
+@item info
+@cindex debugging hesiod resolver service
+@cindex Hesiod: turning on RES_DEBUG
+info service specific debugging (hesiod, nis, etc.)  In the case of
+hesiod maps, turns on the hesiod RES_DEBUG internal debugging option.
+@item mem
+trace memory allocations
+@item mtab
+use local @file{./mtab} file
+@item str
+debug string munging
+@item test
+full debug but no daemon
+@item trace
+protocol trace
+@end table
+
+You may also refer to the program source for a more detailed explanation
+of the available options.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node -F Option, -H Option, -D-Option, Amd Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @code{-F} @var{conf-file}
+@cindex Amd configuration file; specifying name
+@cindex Amd configuration file
+@cindex amd.conf file
+
+Specify an @i{Amd} configuration file @var{conf-file} to use.  For a
+description of the format and syntax, @pxref{Amd Configuration File}.
+This configuration file is used to specify any options in lieu of typing
+many of them on the command line.  The @file{amd.conf} file includes
+directives for every command line option @i{Amd} has, and many more that
+are only available via the configuration file facility.  The
+configuration file specified by this option is processed after all other
+options had been processed, regardless of the actual location of this
+option on the command line.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node -H Option, -O-Option, -F Option, Amd Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @code{-H}
+@cindex Displaying brief help
+@cindex Help; showing from Amd
+
+Print a brief help and usage string.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node -O-Option, -S Option, -H Option, Amd Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @code{-O} @var{op-sys-name}
+@cindex Operating System name
+@cindex Setting the Operating System name
+
+Override the compiled-in name of the operating system, with
+@var{op-sys-name}.  Useful when the built-in name is not desired for
+backward compatibility reasons.  For example, if the build in name is
+@samp{sunos5}, you can override it to the old name @samp{sos5}, and use
+older maps which were written with the latter in mind.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node -S Option, -T-Option, -O-Option, Amd Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @code{-S}
+@cindex plock; using
+@cindex locking executable pages in memory
+
+Do @emph{not} lock the running executable pages of @i{Amd} into memory.
+To improve @i{Amd}'s performance, systems that support the @b{plock}(3)
+call lock the @i{Amd} process into memory.  This way there is less
+chance the operating system will schedule, page out, and swap the
+@i{Amd} process as needed.  This tends to improve @i{Amd}'s performance,
+at the cost of reserving the memory used by the @i{Amd} process (making
+it unavailable for other processes).  If this behavior is not desired,
+use the @code{-S} option.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node -T-Option, , -S Option, Amd Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @code{-T} @var{tag}
+@cindex Tags for Amd configuration file
+@cindex Configuration file; tags
+ 
+Specify a tag to use with @file{amd.conf}.  All map entries tagged with
+@var{tag} will be processed.  Map entries that are not tagged are always
+processed.  Map entries that are tagged with a tag other than @var{tag}
+will not be processed.
+
+@c ################################################################
+@node Filesystem Types, Amd Configuration File, Amd Command Line Options, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter Filesystem Types
+@cindex Filesystem types
+@cindex Mount types
+@cindex Types of filesystem
+
+To mount a volume, @i{Amd} must be told the type of filesystem to be
+used.  Each filesystem type typically requires additional information
+such as the fileserver name for NFS.
+
+From the point of view of @i{Amd}, a @dfn{filesystem} is anything that
+can resolve an incoming name lookup.  An important feature is support
+for multiple filesystem types.  Some of these filesystems are
+implemented in the local kernel and some on remote fileservers, whilst
+the others are implemented internally by @i{Amd}.@refill
+
+The two common filesystem types are UFS and NFS.  Four other user
+accessible filesystems (@samp{link}, @samp{program}, @samp{auto} and
+@samp{direct}) are also implemented internally by @i{Amd} and these are
+described below.  There are two additional filesystem types internal to
+@i{Amd} which are not directly accessible to the user (@samp{inherit}
+and @samp{error}).  Their use is described since they may still have an
+effect visible to the user.@refill
+
+@menu
+* Network Filesystem::          A single NFS filesystem.
+* Network Host Filesystem::     NFS mount a host's entire export tree.
+* Network Filesystem Group::    An atomic group of NFS filesystems.
+* Unix Filesystem::             Native disk filesystem.
+* Caching Filesystem::          Caching from remote server filesystem.
+* CD-ROM Filesystem::           ISO9660 CD ROM.
+* Loopback Filesystem::         Local loopback-mount filesystem.
+* Memory/RAM Filesystem::       A memory or RAM-based filesystem.
+* Null Filesystem::             4.4BSD's loopback-mount filesystem.
+* Floppy Filesystem::           MS-DOS Floppy filesystem.
+* Translucent Filesystem::      The directory merging filesystem.
+* Shared Memory+Swap Filesystem:: Sun's tmpfs filesystem.
+* User ID Mapping Filesystem::  4.4BSD's umapfs filesystem.
+* Program Filesystem::          Generic Program mounts.
+* Symbolic Link Filesystem::    Local link.
+* Symbolic Link Filesystem II:: Local link referencing existing filesystem.
+* NFS-Link Filesystem::         Link if path exists, NFS otherwise.
+* Automount Filesystem::
+* Direct Automount Filesystem::
+* Union Filesystem::
+* Error Filesystem::
+* Top-level Filesystem::
+* Autofs Filesystem::           Sun's kernel-based automounter filesystem.
+* Root Filesystem::
+* Inheritance Filesystem::
+@end menu
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Network Filesystem, Network Host Filesystem, Filesystem Types, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Network Filesystem (@samp{nfs})
+@cindex NFS
+@cindex Mounting an NFS filesystem
+@cindex How to mount and NFS filesystem
+@cindex nfs, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; nfs
+
+The @dfn{nfs} (@samp{type:=nfs}) filesystem type provides access to Sun's NFS.
+
+@noindent
+The following options must be specified:
+
+@table @code
+@cindex rhost, mount option
+@cindex Mount option; rhost
+@item rhost
+the remote fileserver.  This must be an entry in the hosts database.  IP
+addresses are not accepted.  The default value is taken
+from the local host name (@code{$@{host@}}) if no other value is
+specified.
+
+@cindex rfs, mount option
+@cindex Mount option; rfs
+@item rfs
+the remote filesystem.
+If no value is specified for this option, an internal default of
+@code{$@{path@}} is used.
+@end table
+
+NFS mounts require a two stage process.  First, the @dfn{file handle} of
+the remote file system must be obtained from the server.  Then a mount
+system call must be done on the local system.  @i{Amd} keeps a cache
+of file handles for remote file systems.  The cache entries have a
+lifetime of a few minutes.
+
+If a required file handle is not in the cache, @i{Amd} sends a request
+to the remote server to obtain it.  @i{Amd} @dfn{does not} wait for
+a response; it notes that one of the locations needs retrying, but
+continues with any remaining locations.  When the file handle becomes
+available, and assuming none of the other locations was successfully
+mounted, @i{Amd} will retry the mount.  This mechanism allows several
+NFS filesystems to be mounted in parallel.
+@c @footnote{The mechanism
+@c is general, however NFS is the only filesystem
+@c for which the required hooks have been written.}
+The first one which responds with a valid file handle will be used.
+
+@noindent
+An NFS entry might be:
+
+@example
+jsp  host!=charm;type:=nfs;rhost:=charm;rfs:=/home/charm;sublink:=jsp
+@end example
+
+The mount system call and any unmount attempts are always done
+in a new task to avoid the possibility of blocking @i{Amd}.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Network Host Filesystem, Network Filesystem Group, Network Filesystem, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Network Host Filesystem (@samp{host})
+@cindex Network host filesystem
+@cindex Mounting entire export trees
+@cindex How to mount all NFS exported filesystems
+@cindex host, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; host
+
+@c NOTE: the current implementation of the @dfn{host} filesystem type
+@c sometimes fails to maintain a consistent view of the remote mount tree.
+@c This happens when the mount times out and only some of the remote mounts
+@c are successfully unmounted.  To prevent this from occurring, use the
+@c @samp{nounmount} mount option.
+
+The @dfn{host} (@samp{type:=host}) filesystem allows access to the entire export tree of an
+NFS server.  The implementation is layered above the @samp{nfs}
+implementation so keep-alives work in the same way.  The only option
+which needs to be specified is @samp{rhost} which is the name of the
+fileserver to mount.
+
+The @samp{host} filesystem type works by querying the mount daemon on
+the given fileserver to obtain its export list.  @i{Amd} then obtains
+filehandles for each of the exported filesystems.  Any errors at this
+stage cause that particular filesystem to be ignored.  Finally each
+filesystem is mounted.  Again, errors are logged but ignored.  One
+common reason for mounts to fail is that the mount point does not exist.
+Although @i{Amd} attempts to automatically create the mount point, it
+may be on a remote filesystem to which @i{Amd} does not have write
+permission.
+
+When an attempt to unmount a @samp{host} filesystem mount fails, @i{Amd}
+remounts any filesystems which had successfully been unmounted.  To do
+this @i{Amd} queries the mount daemon again and obtains a fresh copy of
+the export list.  @i{Amd} then tries to mount any exported filesystems
+which are not currently mounted.
+
+Sun's automounter provides a special @samp{-hosts} map.  To achieve the
+same effect with @i{Amd} requires two steps.  First a mount map must
+be created as follows:
+
+@example
+*       type:=host;rhost:=$@{key@};fs:=$@{autodir@}/$@{rhost@}/root
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+and then start @i{Amd} with the following command
+
+@example
+amd /net net.map
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+where @samp{net.map} is the name of map described above.  Note that the
+value of @code{$@{fs@}} is overridden in the map.  This is done to avoid
+a clash between the mount tree and any other filesystem already mounted
+from the same fileserver.
+
+If different mount options are needed for different hosts then
+additional entries can be added to the map, for example
+
+@example
+host2       opts:=ro,nosuid,soft
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+would soft mount @samp{host2} read-only.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Network Filesystem Group, Unix Filesystem, Network Host Filesystem, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Network Filesystem Group (@samp{nfsx})
+@cindex Network filesystem group
+@cindex Atomic NFS mounts
+@cindex Mounting an atomic group of NFS filesystems
+@cindex How to mount an atomic group of NFS filesystems
+@cindex nfsx, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; nfsx
+
+The @dfn{nfsx} (@samp{type:=nfsx}) filesystem allows a group of filesystems to be mounted
+from a single NFS server.  The implementation is layered above the
+@samp{nfs} implementation so keep-alives work in the same way.
+
+The options are the same as for the @samp{nfs} filesystem with one
+difference.
+
+@noindent
+The following options must be specified:
+
+@table @code
+@item rhost
+the remote fileserver.  This must be an entry in the hosts database.  IP
+addresses are not accepted.  The default value is taken from the local
+host name (@code{$@{host@}}) if no other value is specified.
+
+@item rfs
+as a list of filesystems to mount.  The list is in the form of a comma
+separated strings.
+@end table
+
+@noindent
+For example:
+
+@example
+pub  type:=nfsx;rhost:=gould;\
+     rfs:=/public,/,graphics,usenet;fs:=$@{autodir@}/$@{rhost@}/root
+@end example
+
+The first string defines the root of the tree, and is applied as a
+prefix to the remaining members of the list which define the individual
+filesystems.  The first string is @emph{not} used as a filesystem name.
+A parallel operation is used to determine the local mount points to
+ensure a consistent layout of a tree of mounts.
+
+Here, the @emph{three} filesystems, @samp{/public},
+@samp{/public/graphics} and @samp{/public/usenet}, would be mounted.@refill
+
+A local mount point, @code{$@{fs@}}, @emph{must} be specified.  The
+default local mount point will not work correctly in the general case.
+A suggestion is to use @samp{fs:=$@{autodir@}/$@{rhost@}/root}.@refill
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Unix Filesystem, Caching Filesystem, Network Filesystem Group, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Unix Filesystem (@samp{ufs}, @samp{xfs}, or @samp{efs})
+@cindex Unix filesystem
+@cindex UFS
+@cindex XFS
+@cindex EFS
+@cindex Mounting a UFS filesystem
+@cindex Mounting a local disk
+@cindex How to mount a UFS filesystems
+@cindex How to mount a local disk
+@cindex Disk filesystems
+@cindex ufs, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; ufs
+@cindex xfs, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; xfs
+@cindex efs, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; efs
+
+The @dfn{ufs} (@samp{type:=ufs}) filesystem type provides access to the system's standard
+disk filesystem---usually a derivative of the Berkeley Fast Filesystem.
+
+@noindent
+The following option must be specified:
+
+@table @code
+@cindex dev, mount option
+@cindex Mount option; dev
+@item dev
+the block special device to be mounted.
+@end table
+
+A UFS entry might be:
+
+@example
+jsp   host==charm;type:=ufs;dev:=/dev/sd0d;sublink:=jsp
+@end example
+
+UFS is the default Unix disk-based file system, which Am-utils picks up
+during the autoconfiguration phase.  Some systems have more than one
+type, such as IRIX, that comes with EFS (Extent File System) and XFS
+(Extended File System).  In those cases, you may explicitly set the file
+system type, by using entries such:
+
+@example
+ez1   type:=efs;dev:=/dev/xd0a
+ez2   type:=xfs;dev:=/dev/sd3c
+@end example
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Caching Filesystem, CD-ROM Filesystem, Unix Filesystem, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Caching Filesystem (@samp{cachefs})
+@cindex Caching Filesystem
+@cindex cachefs, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; cachefs
+
+The @dfn{cachefs} (@samp{type:=cachefs}) filesystem caches files from
+one location onto another, presumably providing faster access.  It is
+particularly useful to cache from a larger and remote (slower) NFS
+partition to a smaller and local (faster) UFS directory.
+
+@noindent
+The following options must be specified:
+
+@table @code
+@cindex cachedir, mount option
+@cindex Mount option; cachedir
+@item cachedir
+the directory where the cache is stored.
+@item rfs
+the path name to the ``back file system'' to be cached from.
+@item fs
+the ``front file system'' mount point to the cached files, where @i{Amd}
+will set a symbolic link pointing to.
+@end table
+
+A CacheFS entry for, say, the @file{/import} @i{Amd} mount point, might
+be:
+
+@example
+copt  type:=cachefs;cachedir:=/cache;rfs:=/import/opt;fs:=/n/import/copt
+@end example
+
+Access to the pathname @file{/import/copt} will follow a symbolic link
+to @file{/n/import/copt}.  The latter is the mount point for a caching
+file system, that caches from @file{/import/opt} to @file{/cache}.
+
+@b{Caveats}:
+@enumerate
+@item This file system is currently only implemented for Solaris 2.x!
+@item Before being used for the first time, the cache directory @i{must} be
+initialized with @samp{cfsadmin -c @var{cachedir}}.  See the manual page for
+@b{cfsadmin}(1M) for more information.
+@item The ``back file system'' mounted must be a complete file system, not
+a subdirectory thereof; otherwise you will get an error ``Invalid Argument''.
+@item If @i{Amd} aborts abnormally, the state of the cache may be
+inconsistent, requiring running the command @file{fsck -F cachefs
+@var{cachedir}}.  Otherwise you will get the error ``No Space Left on Device''.
+@end enumerate
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node CD-ROM Filesystem, Loopback Filesystem, Caching Filesystem, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section CD-ROM Filesystem (@samp{cdfs})
+@cindex CD-ROM Filesystem
+@cindex cdfs, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; cdfs
+
+The @dfn{cdfs} (@samp{type:=cdfs}) filesystem mounts a CD-ROM with an
+ISO9660 format filesystem on it.
+
+@noindent
+The following option must be specified:
+
+@table @code
+@cindex dev, mount option
+@cindex Mount option; dev
+@item dev
+the block special device to be mounted.
+@end table
+
+A cdfs entry might be:
+
+@example
+cdfs      os==sunos4;type:=cdfs;dev:=/dev/sr0 \
+          os==sunos5;type:=cdfs;dev:=/dev/dsk/c0t6d0s2
+@end example
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Loopback Filesystem, Memory/RAM Filesystem, CD-ROM Filesystem, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Loopback Filesystem (@samp{lofs})
+@cindex Loopback Filesystem
+@cindex lofs, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; lofs
+
+The @dfn{lofs} (@samp{type:=lofs}) filesystem is also called the
+loopback filesystem.  It mounts a local directory on another, thus
+providing mount-time binding to another location (unlike symbolic
+links).
+
+The loopback filesystem is particularly useful within the context of a
+chroot-ed directory (via @b{chroot}(2)), to provide access to
+directories otherwise inaccessible.
+
+@noindent
+The following option must be specified:
+
+@table @code
+@cindex rfs, mount option
+@cindex Mount option; rfs
+@item rfs
+the pathname to be mounted on top of @code{$@{fs@}}.
+@end table
+
+Usually, the FTP server runs in a chroot-ed environment, for security
+reasons.  In this example, lofs is used to provide a subdirectory within
+a user's home directory, also available for public ftp.
+
+@example
+lofs      type:=lofs;rfs:=/home/ezk/myftpdir;fs:=/usr/ftp/pub/ezk
+@end example
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Memory/RAM Filesystem, Null Filesystem, Loopback Filesystem, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Memory/RAM Filesystem (@samp{mfs})
+@cindex Memory/RAM Filesystem
+@cindex mfs, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; mfs
+
+The @dfn{mfs} (@samp{type:=mfs}) filesystem is available in 4.4BSD,
+Linux, and other systems.  It creates a filesystem in a portion of the
+system's memory, thus providing very fast file (volatile) access.
+
+XXX: THIS FILESYSTEM IS NOT IMPLEMENTED YET!
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Null Filesystem, Floppy Filesystem, Memory/RAM Filesystem, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Null Filesystem (@samp{nullfs})
+@cindex Null Filesystem
+@cindex nullfs, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; nullfs
+
+The @dfn{nullfs} (@samp{type:=nullfs}) filesystem is available from 4.4BSD,
+and is very similar to the loopback filesystem, @dfn{lofs}.
+
+XXX: THIS FILESYSTEM IS NOT IMPLEMENTED YET!
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Floppy Filesystem, Translucent Filesystem, Null Filesystem, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Floppy Filesystem (@samp{pcfs})
+@cindex Floppy Filesystem
+@cindex pcfs, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; pcfs
+
+The @dfn{pcfs} (@samp{type:=pcfs}) filesystem mounts a floppy previously
+formatted for the MS-DOS format.
+
+@noindent
+The following option must be specified:
+
+@table @code
+@cindex dev, mount option
+@cindex Mount option; dev
+@item dev
+the block special device to be mounted.
+@end table
+
+A pcfs entry might be:
+
+@example
+pcfs      os==sunos4;type:=pcfs;dev:=/dev/fd0 \
+          os==sunos5;type:=pcfs;dev:=/dev/diskette
+@end example
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Translucent Filesystem, Shared Memory+Swap Filesystem, Floppy Filesystem, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Translucent Filesystem (@samp{tfs})
+@cindex Translucent Filesystem
+@cindex tfs, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; tfs
+
+The @dfn{tfs} (@samp{type:=tfs}) filesystem is an older version of the
+4.4BSD @dfn{unionfs}.
+
+XXX: THIS FILESYSTEM IS NOT IMPLEMENTED YET!
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Shared Memory+Swap Filesystem, User ID Mapping Filesystem, Translucent Filesystem, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Shared Memory+Swap Filesystem (@samp{tmpfs})
+@cindex Shared Memory and Swap Filesystem
+@cindex tmpfs, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; tmpfs
+
+The @dfn{tmpfs} (@samp{type:=tmpfs}) filesystem shares memory between a
+the swap device and the rest of the system.  It is generally used to
+provide a fast access @file{/tmp} directory, one that uses memory that
+is otherwise unused.  This filesystem is available in SunOS 4.x and 5.x.
+
+XXX: THIS FILESYSTEM IS NOT IMPLEMENTED YET!
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node User ID Mapping Filesystem, Program Filesystem, Shared Memory+Swap Filesystem, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section User ID Mapping Filesystem (@samp{umapfs})
+@cindex User ID Mapping Filesystem
+@cindex umapfs, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; umapfs
+
+The @dfn{umapfs} (@samp{type:=umapfs}) filesystem maps User IDs of file
+ownership, and is available from 4.4BSD.
+
+XXX: THIS FILESYSTEM IS NOT IMPLEMENTED YET!
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Program Filesystem, Symbolic Link Filesystem, User ID Mapping Filesystem, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Program Filesystem (@samp{program})
+@cindex Program filesystem
+@cindex Mount a filesystem under program control
+@cindex program, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; program
+
+The @dfn{program} (@samp{type:=program}) filesystem type allows a program to be run whenever a
+mount or unmount is required.  This allows easy addition of support for
+other filesystem types, such as MIT's Remote Virtual Disk (RVD)
+which has a programmatic interface via the commands
+@samp{rvdmount} and @samp{rvdunmount}.
+
+@noindent
+The following options must be specified:
+
+@table @code
+@cindex mount, mount option
+@cindex Mount option; mount
+@item mount
+the program which will perform the mount.
+
+@cindex unmount, mount option
+@cindex Mount option; unmount
+@item unmount
+the program which will perform the unmount.
+@end table
+
+The exit code from these two programs is interpreted as a Unix error
+code.  As usual, exit code zero indicates success.  To execute the
+program @i{Amd} splits the string on whitespace to create an array of
+substrings.  Single quotes @samp{'} can be used to quote whitespace
+if that is required in an argument.  There is no way to escape or change
+the quote character.
+
+To run the program @samp{rvdmount} with a host name and filesystem as
+arguments would be specified by @samp{mount:="/etc/rvdmount rvdmount
+fserver $@{path@}"}.
+
+The first element in the array is taken as the pathname of the program
+to execute.  The other members of the array form the argument vector to
+be passed to the program, @dfn{including argument zero}.  This means
+that the split string must have at least two elements.  The program is
+directly executed by @i{Amd}, not via a shell.  This means that scripts
+must begin with a @code{#!} interpreter specification.
+
+If a filesystem type is to be heavily used, it may be worthwhile adding
+a new filesystem type into @i{Amd}, but for most uses the program
+filesystem should suffice.
+
+When the program is run, standard input and standard error are inherited
+from the current values used by @i{Amd}.  Standard output is a
+duplicate of standard error.  The value specified with the @code{-l}
+command line option has no effect on standard error.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Symbolic Link Filesystem, Symbolic Link Filesystem II, Program Filesystem, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Symbolic Link Filesystem (@samp{link})
+@cindex Symbolic link filesystem
+@cindex Referencing part of the local name space
+@cindex Mounting part of the local name space
+@cindex How to reference part of the local name space
+@cindex link, filesystem type
+@cindex symlink, link filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; link
+
+Each filesystem type creates a symbolic link to point from the volume
+name to the physical mount point.  The @samp{link} filesystem does the
+same without any other side effects.  This allows any part of the
+machines name space to be accessed via @i{Amd}.
+
+One common use for the symlink filesystem is @file{/homes} which can be
+made to contain an entry for each user which points to their
+(auto-mounted) home directory.  Although this may seem rather expensive,
+it provides a great deal of administrative flexibility.
+
+@noindent
+The following option must be defined:
+
+@table @code
+@item fs
+The value of @var{fs} option specifies the destination of the link, as
+modified by the @var{sublink} option.  If @var{sublink} is non-null, it
+is appended to @code{$@{fs@}}@code{/} and the resulting string is used
+as the target.
+@end table
+
+The @samp{link} filesystem can be thought of as identical to the
+@samp{ufs} filesystem but without actually mounting anything.
+
+An example entry might be:
+
+@example
+jsp   host==charm;type:=link;fs:=/home/charm;sublink:=jsp
+@end example
+which would return a symbolic link pointing to @file{/home/charm/jsp}.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Symbolic Link Filesystem II, NFS-Link Filesystem, Symbolic Link Filesystem, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Symbolic Link Filesystem II (@samp{linkx})
+@cindex Symbolic link filesystem II
+@cindex Referencing an existing part of the local name space
+@cindex Mounting an existing part of the local name space
+@cindex How to reference an existing part of the local name space
+@cindex linkx, filesystem type
+@cindex symlink, linkx filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; linkx
+
+The @dfn{linkx} (@samp{type:=linkx}) filesystem type is identical to @samp{link} with the
+exception that the target of the link must exist.  Existence is checked
+with the @b{lstat}(2) system call.
+
+The @samp{linkx} filesystem type is particularly useful for wildcard map
+entries.  In this case, a list of possible targets can be given and
+@i{Amd} will choose the first one which exists on the local machine.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node NFS-Link Filesystem, Automount Filesystem, Symbolic Link Filesystem II, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section NFS-Link Filesystem (@samp{nfsl})
+@cindex NFS-Link filesystem II
+@cindex Referencing an existing part of the name space if target exists
+@cindex Mounting a remote part of the name space if target is missing
+@cindex Symlink if target exists, NFS otherwise
+@cindex nfsl, filesystem type
+@cindex symlink, nfsl filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; nfsl
+
+The @dfn{nfsl} (@samp{type:=nfsl}) filesystem type is a combination of two others:
+@samp{link} and @samp{nfs}.  If the local host name is equal to the
+value of @code{$@{rhost@}}, or if the target pathname listed in
+@code{$@{fs@}} exists, @samp{nfsl} will behave exactly as
+@samp{type:=link}, and refer to the target as a symbolic link.  If the
+local host name is not equal to the value of @code{$@{rhost@}}, or if
+the target of the link does not exist, @i{Amd} will treat it as
+@samp{type:=nfs}, and will mount a remote pathname for it.
+
+The @samp{nfsl} filesystem type is particularly useful as a shorthand
+for the more cumbersome and yet one of the most popular @i{Amd}
+entries.  For example, you can simplify all map entries that look like:
+
+@example
+zing    -fs:=/n/shekel/u/zing \
+        host!=shekel;type:=nfs;rhost:=shekel;rfs:=$@{fs@} \
+        host==shekel;type:=link
+@end example
+
+or
+
+@example
+zing    -fs:=/n/shekel/u/zing \
+        exists($@{fs@});type:=link \
+        !exists($@{fs@});type:=nfs;rhost:=shekel;rfs:=$@{fs@}
+@end example
+
+into a shorter form
+
+@example
+zing    type:=nfsl;fs:=/n/shekel/u/zing;rhost:=shekel;rfs:=$@{fs@}
+@end example
+
+Not just does it make the maps smaller and simpler, but it avoids
+possible mistakes that often happen when forgetting to set up the two
+entries (one for @samp{type:=nfs} and the other for @samp{type:=link})
+necessary to perform transparent mounts of existing or remote mounts.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Automount Filesystem, Direct Automount Filesystem, NFS-Link Filesystem, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Automount Filesystem (@samp{auto})
+@cindex Automount filesystem
+@cindex Map cache types
+@cindex Setting map cache parameters
+@cindex How to set map cache parameters
+@cindex How to start an indirect automount point
+@cindex auto, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; auto
+@cindex SIGHUP signal
+@cindex Map cache synchronizing
+@cindex Synchronizing the map cache
+@cindex Map cache options
+@cindex Regular expressions in maps
+
+The @dfn{auto} (@samp{type:=auto}) filesystem type creates a new automount point below an
+existing automount point.  Top-level automount points appear as system
+mount points.  An automount mount point can also appear as a
+sub-directory of an existing automount point.  This allows some
+additional structure to be added, for example to mimic the mount tree of
+another machine.
+
+The following options may be specified:
+
+@table @code
+@cindex cache, mount option
+@cindex Mount option; cache
+@item cache
+specifies whether the data in this mount-map should be
+cached.  The default value is @samp{none}, in which case
+no caching is done in order to conserve memory.
+However, better performance and reliability can be obtained by caching
+some or all of a mount-map.
+
+If the cache option specifies @samp{all},
+the entire map is enumerated when the mount point is created.
+
+If the cache option specifies @samp{inc}, caching is done incrementally
+as and when data is required.
+Some map types do not support cache mode @samp{all}, in which case @samp{inc}
+is used whenever @samp{all} is requested.
+
+Caching can be entirely disabled by using cache mode @samp{none}.
+
+If the cache option specifies @samp{regexp} then the entire map will be
+enumerated and each key will be treated as an egrep-style regular
+expression.  The order in which a cached map is searched does not
+correspond to the ordering in the source map so the regular expressions
+should be mutually exclusive to avoid confusion.
+
+Each mount map type has a default cache type, usually @samp{inc}, which
+can be selected by specifying @samp{mapdefault}.
+
+The cache mode for a mount map can only be selected on the command line.
+Starting @i{Amd} with the command:
+
+@example
+amd /homes hesiod.homes -cache:=inc
+@end example
+
+will cause @samp{/homes} to be automounted using the @dfn{Hesiod} name
+server with local incremental caching of all successfully resolved names.
+
+All cached data is forgotten whenever @i{Amd} receives a @samp{SIGHUP}
+signal and, if cache @samp{all} mode was selected, the cache will be
+reloaded.  This can be used to inform @i{Amd} that a map has been
+updated.  In addition, whenever a cache lookup fails and @i{Amd} needs
+to examine a map, the map's modify time is examined.  If the cache is
+out of date with respect to the map then it is flushed as if a
+@samp{SIGHUP} had been received.
+
+An additional option (@samp{sync}) may be specified to force @i{Amd} to
+check the map's modify time whenever a cached entry is being used.  For
+example, an incremental, synchronized cache would be created by the
+following command:
+
+@example
+amd /homes hesiod.homes -cache:=inc,sync
+@end example
+
+@item fs
+specifies the name of the mount map to use for the new mount point.
+
+Arguably this should have been specified with the @code{$@{rfs@}} option but
+we are now stuck with it due to historical accident.
+
+@c %If the string @samp{.} is used then the same map is used;
+@c %in addition the lookup prefix is set to the name of the mount point followed
+@c %by a slash @samp{/}.
+@c %This is the same as specifying @samp{fs:=\$@{map@};pref:=\$@{key@}/}.
+@c
+
+@item pref
+alters the name that is looked up in the mount map.  If
+@code{$@{pref@}}, the @dfn{prefix}, is non-null then it is prepended to
+the name requested by the kernel @dfn{before} the map is searched.
+@end table
+
+The server @samp{dylan.doc.ic.ac.uk} has two user disks:
+@samp{/dev/dsk/2s0} and @samp{/dev/dsk/5s0}.  These are accessed as
+@samp{/home/dylan/dk2} and @samp{/home/dylan/dk5} respectively.  Since
+@samp{/home} is already an automount point, this naming is achieved with
+the following map entries:@refill
+
+@example
+dylan        type:=auto;fs:=$@{map@};pref:=$@{key@}/
+dylan/dk2    type:=ufs;dev:=/dev/dsk/2s0
+dylan/dk5    type:=ufs;dev:=/dev/dsk/5s0
+@end example
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Direct Automount Filesystem, Union Filesystem, Automount Filesystem, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Direct Automount Filesystem (@samp{direct})
+@cindex Direct automount filesystem
+@cindex How to start a direct automount point
+@cindex direct, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; direct
+
+The @dfn{direct} (@samp{type:=direct}) filesystem is almost identical to the automount
+filesystem.  Instead of appearing to be a directory of mount points, it
+appears as a symbolic link to a mounted filesystem.  The mount is done
+at the time the link is accessed.  @xref{Automount Filesystem} for a
+list of required options.
+
+Direct automount points are created by specifying the @samp{direct}
+filesystem type on the command line:
+
+@example
+amd ... /usr/man auto.direct -type:=direct
+@end example
+
+where @samp{auto.direct} would contain an entry such as:
+
+@example
+usr/man    -type:=nfs;rfs:=/usr/man \
+           rhost:=man-server1  rhost:=man-server2
+@end example
+
+In this example, @samp{man-server1} and @samp{man-server2} are file
+servers which export copies of the manual pages.  Note that the key
+which is looked up is the name of the automount point without the
+leading @samp{/}.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Union Filesystem, Error Filesystem, Direct Automount Filesystem, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Union Filesystem (@samp{union})
+@cindex Union filesystem
+@cindex union, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; union
+
+The @dfn{union} (@samp{type:=union}) filesystem type allows the contents of several
+directories to be merged and made visible in a single directory.  This
+can be used to overcome one of the major limitations of the Unix mount
+mechanism which only allows complete directories to be mounted.
+
+For example, supposing @file{/tmp} and @file{/var/tmp} were to be merged
+into a new directory called @file{/mtmp}, with files in @file{/var/tmp}
+taking precedence.  The following command could be used to achieve this
+effect:
+
+@example
+amd ... /mtmp union:/tmp:/var/tmp -type:=union
+@end example
+
+Currently, the unioned directories must @emph{not} be automounted.  That
+would cause a deadlock.  This seriously limits the current usefulness of
+this filesystem type and the problem will be addressed in a future
+release of @i{Amd}.
+
+Files created in the union directory are actually created in the last
+named directory.  This is done by creating a wildcard entry which points
+to the correct directory.  The wildcard entry is visible if the union
+directory is listed, so allowing you to see which directory has
+priority.
+
+The files visible in the union directory are computed at the time
+@i{Amd} is started, and are not kept up-to-date with respect to the
+underlying directories.  Similarly, if a link is removed, for example
+with the @samp{rm} command, it will be lost forever.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Error Filesystem, Top-level Filesystem, Union Filesystem, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Error Filesystem (@samp{error})
+@cindex Error filesystem
+@cindex error, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; error
+
+The @dfn{error} (@samp{type:=error}) filesystem type is used internally as a catch-all in the
+case where none of the other filesystems was selected, or some other
+error occurred.  Lookups and mounts always fail with ``No such file or
+directory''.  All other operations trivially succeed.
+
+The error filesystem is not directly accessible.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Top-level Filesystem, Autofs Filesystem, Error Filesystem, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Top-level Filesystem (@samp{toplvl})
+@cindex Top level filesystem
+@cindex toplvl, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; toplvl
+
+The @dfn{toplvl} (@samp{type:=toplvl}) filesystems is derived from the @samp{auto} filesystem
+and is used to mount the top-level automount nodes.  Requests of this
+type are automatically generated from the command line arguments and can
+also be passed in by using the @code{-M} option of the @dfn{Amq} command.
+That option is insecure, and is unavailable unless am-utils was
+configured with @samp{--with-amq-mount}.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Root Filesystem, Inheritance Filesystem, Autofs Filesystem, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Root Filesystem (@samp{root})
+@cindex Root filesystem
+@cindex root, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; root
+
+The @dfn{root} (@samp{type:=root}) filesystem type acts as an internal
+placeholder onto which @i{Amd} can pin @samp{toplvl} mounts.  Only one
+node of this type need ever exist and one is created automatically
+during startup.  The effect of having more than one root node is
+undefined.
+
+The root filesystem is not directly accessible.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Autofs Filesystem, Root Filesystem, Top-level Filesystem, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Autofs Filesystem (@samp{autofs})
+@cindex Autofs filesystem
+@cindex autofs, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; autofs
+
+The @dfn{autofs} (@samp{type:=autofs}) filesystem uses Sun's kernel-based automounter
+supporting filesystem for @i{Amd}'s mount points.  Hence it is another
+type of top level filesystem.
+
+The autofs filesystem is not directly accessible from @i{Amd} maps, but
+only from the @file{amd.conf} file (@pxref{mount_type Parameter}).
+
+Note that Autofs support is still very early.  See the distribution file
+@file{README.autofs} for detail of what works and what does not.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Inheritance Filesystem, , Root Filesystem, Filesystem Types
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Inheritance Filesystem (@samp{inherit})
+@cindex Inheritance filesystem
+@cindex Nodes generated on a restart
+@cindex inherit, filesystem type
+@cindex Filesystem type; inherit
+
+The @dfn{inheritance} (@samp{type:=inherit}) filesystem is not directly
+accessible.  Instead, internal mount nodes of this type are
+automatically generated when @i{Amd} is started with the @code{-r} option.
+At this time the system mount table is scanned to locate any filesystems
+which are already mounted.  If any reference to these filesystems is
+made through @i{Amd} then instead of attempting to mount it, @i{Amd}
+simulates the mount and @dfn{inherits} the filesystem.  This allows a
+new version of @i{Amd} to be installed on a live system simply by
+killing the old daemon with @samp{SIGTERM} and starting the new one.@refill
+
+This filesystem type is not generally visible externally, but it is
+possible that the output from @samp{amq -m} may list @samp{inherit} as
+the filesystem type.  This happens when an inherit operation cannot
+be completed for some reason, usually because a fileserver is down.
+
+@c ################################################################
+@node Amd Configuration File, Run-time Administration, Filesystem Types, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter Amd Configuration File
+@cindex  Amd Configuration File
+@cindex amd.conf
+
+The @samp{amd.conf} file is the configuration file for @i{Amd}, as part
+of the am-utils suite.  This file contains runtime configuration
+information for the @i{Amd} automounter program.
+
+@menu
+* File Format::
+* The Global Section::
+* Regular Map Sections::
+* Common Parameters::
+* Global Parameters::
+* Regular Map Parameters::
+* amd.conf Examples::
+@end menu
+
+@c ================================================================
+@node File Format, The Global Section, Amd Configuration File, Amd Configuration File
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section File Format
+@cindex amd.conf file format
+
+The @samp{amd.conf} file consists of sections and parameters.  A section
+begins with the name of the section in square brackets @samp{[]} and
+continues until the next section begins or the end of the file is reached.
+Sections contain parameters of the form @samp{name = value}.
+
+The file is line-based --- that is, each newline-terminated line
+represents either a comment, a section name or a parameter.  No
+line-continuation syntax is available.
+
+Section names, parameter names and their values are case sensitive.
+
+Only the first equals sign in a parameter is significant.  Whitespace
+before or after the first equals sign is discarded.  Leading, trailing
+and internal whitespace in section and parameter names is irrelevant.
+Leading and trailing whitespace in a parameter value is discarded.
+Internal whitespace within a parameter value is not allowed, unless the
+whole parameter value is quoted with double quotes as in @samp{name =
+"some value"}.
+
+Any line beginning with a pound sign @samp{#} is ignored, as are lines
+containing only whitespace.
+
+The values following the equals sign in parameters are all either a
+string (no quotes needed if string does not include spaces) or a
+boolean, which may be given as @samp{yes}/@samp{no}.  Case is significant in all
+values.  Some items such as cache timeouts are numeric.
+
+@c ================================================================
+@node The Global Section, Regular Map Sections, File Format, Amd Configuration File
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section The Global Section
+@cindex amd.conf global section
+
+The global section must be specified as @samp{[global]}.  Parameters in
+this section either apply to @i{Amd} as a whole, or to all other regular map
+sections which follow.  There should be only one global section defined
+in one configuration file.
+
+It is highly recommended that this section be specified first in the
+configuration file.  If it is not, then regular map sections which
+precede it will not use global values defined later.
+
+@c ================================================================
+@node Regular Map Sections, Common Parameters, The Global Section, Amd Configuration File
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Regular Map Sections
+@cindex amd.conf regular map sections
+
+Parameters in regular (non-global) sections apply to a single map entry.
+For example, if the map section @samp{[/homes]} is defined, then all
+parameters following it will be applied to the @file{/homes}
+@i{Amd}-managed mount point.
+
+@c ================================================================
+@node Common Parameters, Global Parameters, Regular Map Sections, Amd Configuration File
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Common Parameters
+@cindex amd.conf common parameters
+
+These parameters can be specified either in the global or a map-specific
+section.  Entries specified in a map-specific section override the default
+value or one defined in the global section.   If such a common parameter is
+specified only in the global section, it is applicable to all regular map
+sections that follow.
+
+@menu
+* browsable_dirs Parameter::
+* map_options Parameter::
+* map_type Parameter::
+* mount_type Parameter::
+* search_path Parameter::
+@end menu
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node browsable_dirs Parameter, map_options Parameter, Common Parameters, Common Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{browsable_dirs} Parameter
+@cindex browsable_dirs Parameter
+
+(type=string, default=@samp{no}).  If @samp{yes}, then @i{Amd}'s top-level
+mount points will be browsable to @b{readdir}(3) calls.  This means you
+could run for example @b{ls}(1) and see what keys are available to mount
+in that directory.  Not all entries are made visible to @b{readdir}(3):
+the @samp{/defaults} entry, wildcard entries, and those with a @file{/}
+in them are not included.  If you specify @samp{full} to this option,
+all but the @samp{/defaults} entry will be visible.  Note that if you run
+a command which will attempt to @b{stat}(2) the entries, such as often
+done by @samp{ls -l} or @samp{ls -F}, @i{Amd} will attempt to mount
+@i{every} entry in that map.  This is often called a ``mount storm''.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node map_options Parameter, map_type Parameter, browsable_dirs Parameter, Common Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{map_options} Parameter
+@cindex map_options Parameter
+
+(type=string, default no options).  This option is the same as
+specifying map options on the command line to @i{Amd}, such as
+@samp{cache:=all}.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node map_type Parameter, mount_type Parameter, map_options Parameter, Common Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{map_type} Parameter
+@cindex map_type Parameter
+
+(type=string, default search all map types).  If specified, @i{Amd} will
+initialize the map only for the type given.  This is useful to avoid the
+default map search type used by @i{Amd} which takes longer and can have
+undesired side-effects such as initializing NIS even if not used.
+Possible values are
+
+@table @samp
+@item file
+plain files
+@item hesiod
+Hesiod name service from MIT
+@item ldap
+Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
+@item ndbm
+(New) dbm style hash files
+@item nis
+Network Information Services (version 2)
+@item nisplus
+Network Information Services Plus (version 3)
+@item passwd
+local password files
+@item union
+union maps
+@end table
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node mount_type Parameter, search_path Parameter, map_type Parameter, Common Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{mount_type} Parameter
+@cindex mount_type Parameter
+
+(type=string, default=@samp{nfs}).  All @i{Amd} mount types default to NFS.
+That is, @i{Amd} is an NFS server on the map mount points, for the local
+host it is running on.  If @samp{autofs} is specified, @i{Amd} will be
+an autofs server for those mount points.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node search_path Parameter, , mount_type Parameter, Common Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{search_path} Parameter
+@cindex search_path Parameter
+
+(type=string, default no search path).  This provides a
+(colon-delimited) search path for file maps.  Using a search path,
+sites can allow for local map customizations and overrides, and can
+distributed maps in several locations as needed.
+
+@c ================================================================
+@node Global Parameters, Regular Map Parameters, Common Parameters, Amd Configuration File
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Global Parameters
+@cindex amd.conf global parameters
+
+The following parameters are applicable to the @samp{[global]} section only.
+
+@menu
+* arch Parameter::    
+* auto_dir Parameter::
+* cache_duration Parameter::
+* cluster Parameter:: 
+* debug_options Parameter::
+* dismount_interval Parameter::
+* fully_qualified_hosts Parameter::
+* hesiod_base Parameter::   
+* karch Parameter::   
+* ldap_base Parameter::
+* ldap_cache_maxmem Parameter::
+* ldap_cache_seconds Parameter::
+* ldap_hostports Parameter::
+* local_domain Parameter::
+* log_file Parameter::
+* log_options Parameter::
+* nfs_retransmit_counter Parameter::
+* nfs_retry_interval Parameter::
+* nis_domain Parameter::
+* normalize_hostnames Parameter::
+* os Parameter::      
+* osver Parameter::   
+* pid_file Parameter::
+* plock Parameter::   
+* portmap_program Parameter::
+* print_pid Parameter::
+* print_version Parameter::
+* restart_mounts Parameter::
+* selectors_on_default Parameter::
+* show_statfs_entries Parameter::
+* unmount_on_exit Parameter::
+@end menu
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node arch Parameter, auto_dir Parameter, Global Parameters, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{arch} Parameter
+@cindex arch Parameter
+
+(type=string, default to compiled in value).  Allows you to override the
+value of the @i{arch} @i{Amd} variable.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node auto_dir Parameter, cache_duration Parameter, arch Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{auto_dir} Parameter
+@cindex auto_dir Parameter
+
+(type=string, default=@samp{/a}).  Same as the @code{-a} option to @i{Amd}.
+This sets the private directory where @i{Amd} will create
+sub-directories for its real mount points.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node cache_duration Parameter, cluster Parameter, auto_dir Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{cache_duration} Parameter
+@cindex cache_duration Parameter
+
+(type=numeric, default=300).  Same as the @code{-c} option to
+@i{Amd}.  Sets the duration in seconds that looked up map entries remain
+in the cache.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node cluster Parameter, debug_options Parameter, cache_duration Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{cluster} Parameter
+@cindex cluster Parameter
+
+(type=string, default no cluster).  Same as the @code{-C} option to
+@i{Amd}.  Specifies the alternate HP-UX cluster to use.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node debug_options Parameter, dismount_interval Parameter, cluster Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{debug_options} Parameter
+@cindex debug_options Parameter
+
+(type=string, default no debug options).  Same as the @code{-D}
+option to @i{Amd}.  Specify any debugging options for @i{Amd}.  Works
+only if am-utils was configured for debugging using the
+@code{--enable-debug} option.  The @samp{mem} option alone can be turned
+on via @code{--enable-debug=mem}.  Otherwise debugging options are
+ignored.  Options are comma delimited, and can be preceded by the string
+@samp{no} to negate their meaning.  You can get the list of supported
+debugging options by running @code{amd -v}.  Possible values are:
+
+@table @samp
+@item all
+all options
+@item amq
+register for amq
+@item daemon
+enter daemon mode
+@item fork
+fork server
+@item full
+program trace
+@item mem
+trace memory allocations
+@item mtab
+use local @file{./mtab} file
+@item str
+debug string munging
+@item test
+full debug but no daemon
+@item trace
+protocol trace
+@end table
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node dismount_interval Parameter, fully_qualified_hosts Parameter, debug_options Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{dismount_interval} Parameter
+@cindex dismount_interval Parameter
+
+(type=numeric, default=120).  Same as the @code{-w} option to
+@i{Amd}.  Specify in seconds, the time between attempts to dismount file
+systems that have exceeded their cached times.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node fully_qualified_hosts Parameter, hesiod_base Parameter, dismount_interval Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{fully_qualified_hosts} Parameter
+@cindex fully_qualified_hosts Parameter
+
+(type=string, default=@samp{no}).  If @samp{yes}, @i{Amd} will perform RPC
+authentication using fully-qualified host names.  This is necessary for
+some systems, and especially when performing cross-domain mounting.  For
+this function to work, the @i{Amd} variable @samp{$@{hostd@}} is used,
+requiring that @samp{$@{domain@}} not be null.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node hesiod_base Parameter, karch Parameter, fully_qualified_hosts Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{hesiod_base} Parameter
+@cindex hesiod_base Parameter
+
+(type=string, default=@samp{automount}).  Specify the base name for
+hesiod maps.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node karch Parameter, ldap_base Parameter, hesiod_base Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{karch} Parameter
+@cindex karch Parameter
+
+(type=string, default to karch of the system).  Same as the @code{-k}
+option to @i{Amd}.  Allows you to override the kernel-architecture of
+your system.  Useful for example on Sun (Sparc) machines, where you can
+build one @i{Amd} binary, and run it on multiple machines, yet you want
+each one to get the correct @i{karch} variable set (for example, sun4c,
+sun4m, sun4u, etc.)  Note that if not specified, @i{Amd} will use
+@b{uname}(2) to figure out the kernel architecture of the machine.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node ldap_base Parameter, ldap_cache_maxmem Parameter, karch Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{ldap_base} Parameter
+@cindex ldap_base Parameter
+
+(type=string, default not set).  Specify the base name for
+LDAP.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node ldap_cache_maxmem Parameter, ldap_cache_seconds Parameter, ldap_base Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{ldap_cache_maxmem} Parameter
+@cindex ldap_cache_maxmem Parameter
+
+(type=numeric, default=131072).  Specify the maximum memory @i{Amd}
+should use to cache LDAP entries.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node ldap_cache_seconds Parameter, ldap_hostports Parameter, ldap_cache_maxmem Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{ldap_cache_seconds} Parameter
+@cindex ldap_cache_seconds Parameter
+
+(type=numeric, default=0).  Specify the number of seconds to keep
+entries in the cache.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node ldap_hostports Parameter, local_domain Parameter, ldap_cache_seconds Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{ldap_hostports} Parameter
+@cindex ldap_hostports Parameter
+
+(type=string, default not set).  Specify
+LDAP-specific values such as country and organization.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node local_domain Parameter, log_file Parameter, ldap_hostports Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{local_domain} Parameter
+@cindex local_domain Parameter
+
+(type=string, default no sub-domain).  Same as the @code{-d} option
+to @i{Amd}.  Specify the local domain name.  If this option is not given
+the domain name is determined from the hostname, by removing the first
+component of the fully-qualified host name.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node log_file Parameter, log_options Parameter, local_domain Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{log_file} Parameter
+@cindex log_file Parameter
+
+(type=string, default=@samp{stderr}).  Same as the @code{-l} option to
+@i{Amd}.  Specify a file name to log @i{Amd} events to.
+If the string @samp{/dev/stderr} is specified,
+@i{Amd} will send its events to the standard error file descriptor.
+
+If the string @samp{syslog} is given, @i{Amd} will record its events
+with the system logger @b{syslogd}(8).  If your system supports syslog
+facilities, then the default facility used is @samp{LOG_DAEMON}.
+
+When using syslog, if you wish to change the facility, append its name
+to the option name, delimited by a single colon.  For example, if it is
+the string @samp{syslog:local7} then @i{Amd} will log messages via
+@b{syslog}(3) using the @samp{LOG_LOCAL7} facility.  If the facility
+name specified is not recognized, @i{Amd} will default to @samp{LOG_DAEMON}.
+Note: while you can use any syslog facility available on your system, it
+is generally a bad idea to use those reserved for other services such as
+@samp{kern}, @samp{lpr}, @samp{cron}, etc.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node log_options Parameter, nfs_retransmit_counter Parameter, log_file Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{log_options} Parameter
+@cindex log_options Parameter
+
+(type=string, default no logging options).  Same as the @code{-x}
+option to @i{Amd}.  Specify any logging options for @i{Amd}.  Options
+are comma delimited, and can be preceded by the string @samp{no} to
+negate their meaning.  The @samp{debug} logging option is only available
+if am-utils was configured with @code{--enable-debug}.  You can get the
+list of supported debugging options by running @code{amd -v}.  Possible
+values are:
+
+@table @samp
+@item all
+all messages
+@item debug
+debug messages
+@item error
+non-fatal system errors
+@item fatal
+fatal errors
+@item info
+information
+@item map
+map errors
+@item stats
+additional statistical information
+@item user
+non-fatal user errors
+@item warn
+warnings
+@item warning
+warnings
+@end table
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node nfs_retransmit_counter Parameter, nfs_retry_interval Parameter, log_options Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{nfs_retransmit_counter} Parameter
+@cindex nfs_retransmit_counter Parameter
+
+(type=numeric, default=110).  Same as the @i{counter} part of the
+@code{-t} @i{interval.counter} option to @i{Amd}.  Specifies the
+retransmit counter's value in @emph{tenths} of seconds.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node nfs_retry_interval Parameter, nis_domain Parameter, nfs_retransmit_counter Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{nfs_retry_interval} Parameter
+@cindex nfs_retry_interval Parameter
+
+(type=numeric, default=8).  Same as the @i{interval} part of the
+@code{-t} @i{interval.counter} option to @i{Amd}.  Specifies the
+interval in @emph{tenths} of seconds, between NFS/RPC/UDP retries.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node nis_domain Parameter, normalize_hostnames Parameter, nfs_retry_interval Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{nis_domain} Parameter
+@cindex nis_domain Parameter
+
+(type=string, default to local NIS domain name).  Same as the
+@code{-y} option to @i{Amd}.  Specify an alternative NIS domain from
+which to fetch the NIS maps.  The default is the system domain name.
+This option is ignored if NIS support is not available.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node normalize_hostnames Parameter, os Parameter, nis_domain Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{normalize_hostnames} Parameter
+@cindex normalize_hostnames Parameter
+
+(type=boolean, default=@samp{no}).  Same as the @code{-n} option to @i{Amd}.
+If @samp{yes}, then the name referred to by @code{$@{rhost@}} is normalized
+relative to the host database before being used.  The effect is to
+translate aliases into ``official'' names.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node os Parameter, osver Parameter, normalize_hostnames Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{os} Parameter
+@cindex os Parameter
+
+(type=string, default to compiled in value).  Same as the @code{-O}
+option to @i{Amd}.  Allows you to override the compiled-in name of the
+operating system.  Useful when the built-in name is not desired for
+backward compatibility reasons.  For example, if the built-in name is
+@samp{sunos5}, you can override it to @samp{sos5}, and use older maps
+which were written with the latter in mind.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node osver Parameter, pid_file Parameter, os Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{osver} Parameter
+@cindex osver Parameter
+
+(type=string, default to compiled in value).  Same as the @code{-o}
+option to @i{Amd}.  Allows you to override the compiled-in version
+number of the operating system.  Useful when the built-in version is not
+desired for backward compatibility reasons.  For example, if the build
+in version is @samp{2.5.1}, you can override it to @samp{5.5.1}, and use
+older maps that were written with the latter in mind.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node pid_file Parameter, plock Parameter, osver Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{pid_file} Parameter
+@cindex pid_file Parameter
+
+(type=string, default=@samp{/dev/stdout}).  Specify a file to store the process
+ID of the running daemon into.  If not specified, @i{Amd} will print its
+process id onto the standard output.  Useful for killing @i{Amd} after
+it had run.  Note that the PID of a running @i{Amd} can also be
+retrieved via @i{Amq} (@pxref{Amq -p option}).
+
+This file is used only if the @samp{print_pid} option is on
+(@pxref{print_pid Parameter}).
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node plock Parameter, portmap_program Parameter, pid_file Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{plock} Parameter
+@cindex plock Parameter
+
+(type=boolean, default=@samp{yes}).  Same as the @code{-S} option to @i{Amd}.
+If @samp{yes}, lock the running executable pages of @i{Amd} into memory.
+To improve @i{Amd}'s performance, systems that support the @b{plock}(3)
+call can lock the @i{Amd} process into memory.  This way there is less
+chance the operating system will schedule, page out, and swap the
+@i{Amd} process as needed.  This improves @i{Amd}'s performance, at the
+cost of reserving the memory used by the @i{Amd} process (making it
+unavailable for other processes).
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node portmap_program Parameter, print_pid Parameter, plock Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{portmap_program} Parameter
+@cindex portmap_program Parameter
+
+(type=numeric, default=300019).  Specify an alternate Port-mapper RPC
+program number, other than the official number.  This is useful when
+running multiple @i{Amd} processes.  For example, you can run another
+@i{Amd} in ``test'' mode, without affecting the primary @i{Amd} process
+in any way.  For safety reasons, the alternate program numbers that can
+be specified must be in the range 300019-300029, inclusive.  @i{Amq} has
+an option @code{-P} which can be used to specify an alternate program
+number of an @i{Amd} to contact.  In this way, amq can fully control any
+number of @i{Amd} processes running on the same host.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node print_pid Parameter, print_version Parameter, portmap_program Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{print_pid} Parameter
+@cindex print_pid Parameter
+
+(type=boolean, default=@samp{no}).  Same as the @code{-p} option to @i{Amd}.
+If @samp{yes}, @i{Amd} will print its process ID upon starting.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node print_version Parameter, restart_mounts Parameter, print_pid Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{print_version} Parameter
+@cindex print_version Parameter
+
+(type=boolean, default=@samp{no}).  Same as the @code{-v} option to @i{Amd},
+but the version prints and @i{Amd} continues to run.  If @samp{yes}, @i{Amd}
+will print its version information string, which includes some
+configuration and compilation values.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node restart_mounts Parameter, selectors_on_default Parameter, print_version Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{restart_mounts} Parameter
+@cindex restart_mounts Parameter
+
+(type=boolean, default=@samp{no}).  Same as the @code{-r} option to @i{Amd}.
+If @samp{yes} @i{Amd} will scan the mount table to determine which file
+systems are currently mounted.  Whenever one of these would have been
+auto-mounted, @i{Amd} inherits it.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node selectors_on_default Parameter, show_statfs_entries Parameter, restart_mounts Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{selectors_on_default} Parameter
+@cindex selectors_on_default Parameter
+
+(type=boolean, default=@samp{no}).  If @samp{yes}, then the @samp{/defaults} entry of
+maps will be looked for and any selectors processed before setting defaults
+for all other keys in that map.  Useful when you want to set different
+options for a complete map based on some parameters.  For example, you
+may want to better the NFS performance over slow slip-based networks as
+follows:
+
+@example
+/defaults \
+    wire==slip-net;opts:=intr,rsize=1024,wsize=1024 \
+    wire!=slip-net;opts:=intr,rsize=8192,wsize=8192
+@end example
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node show_statfs_entries Parameter, unmount_on_exit Parameter , selectors_on_default Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{show_statfs_entries} Parameter
+@cindex show_statfs_entries Parameter
+
+(type=boolean), default=@samp{no}).  If @samp{yes}, then all maps which are
+browsable will also show the number of entries (keys) they have when
+@b{df}(1) runs. (This is accomplished by returning non-zero values to
+the @b{statfs}(2) system call).
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node unmount_on_exit Parameter, , show_statfs_entries Parameter, Global Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @t{unmount_on_exit} Parameter
+@cindex unmount_on_exit Parameter
+
+(type=boolean), default=@samp{no}).  If @samp{yes}, then @i{Amd} will attempt
+to unmount all file systems which it knows about.  Normally it leaves
+all (esp. NFS) mounted file systems intact.  Note that @i{Amd} does not
+know about file systems mounted before it starts up, unless the
+@samp{restart_mounts} option is used (@pxref{restart_mounts Parameter}).
+
+@c ================================================================
+@node Regular Map Parameters, amd.conf Examples, Global Parameters, Amd Configuration File
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Regular Map Parameters
+@cindex amd.conf regular map parameters
+
+The following parameters are applicable only to regular map sections.
+
+@menu
+* map_name Parameter::
+* tag Parameter::     
+@end menu
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node map_name Parameter, tag Parameter, Regular Map Parameters, Regular Map Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection map_name Parameter
+@cindex map_name Parameter
+
+(type=string, must be specified).  Name of the map where the keys are
+located.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node tag Parameter, , map_name Parameter, Regular Map Parameters
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection tag Parameter
+@cindex tag Parameter
+
+(type=string, default no tag).  Each map entry in the configuration file
+can be tagged.  If no tag is specified, that map section will always be
+processed by @i{Amd}.  If it is specified, then @i{Amd} will process the map
+if the @code{-T} option was given to @i{Amd}, and the value given to that
+command-line option matches that in the map section.
+
+@c ================================================================
+@node amd.conf Examples, , Regular Map Parameters, Amd Configuration File
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section amd.conf Examples
+@cindex amd.conf examples
+
+The following is the actual @code{amd.conf} file I use at the
+Computer Science Department of Columbia University.
+
+@example
+# GLOBAL OPTIONS SECTION
+[ global ]
+normalize_hostnames =    no
+print_pid =              no
+#pid_file =              /var/run/amd.pid
+restart_mounts =         yes
+#unmount_on_exit =       yes
+auto_dir =               /n
+log_file =               /var/log/amd
+log_options =            all
+#debug_options =         all
+plock =                  no
+selectors_on_default =   yes
+# config.guess picks up "sunos5" and I don't want to edit my maps yet
+os =                     sos5
+# if you print_version after setting up "os", it will show it.
+print_version =          no
+map_type =               file
+search_path =            /etc/amdmaps:/usr/lib/amd:/usr/local/AMD/lib
+browsable_dirs =         yes
+fully_qualified_hosts =  no
+
+# DEFINE AN AMD MOUNT POINT
+[ /u ]
+map_name =               amd.u
+                         
+[ /proj ]                
+map_name =               amd.proj
+                         
+[ /src ]                 
+map_name =               amd.src
+                         
+[ /misc ]                
+map_name =               amd.misc
+                         
+[ /import ]              
+map_name =               amd.import
+                         
+[ /tftpboot/.amd ]       
+tag =                    tftpboot
+map_name =               amd.tftpboot
+@end example
+
+@c ################################################################
+@node Run-time Administration, FSinfo, Amd Configuration File, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter Run-time Administration
+@cindex Run-time administration
+@cindex Amq command
+
+@menu
+* Starting Amd::
+* Stopping Amd::
+* Restarting Amd::
+* Controlling Amd::
+@end menu
+
+@node Starting Amd, Stopping Amd, Run-time Administration, Run-time Administration
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Starting @i{Amd}
+@cindex Starting Amd
+@cindex Additions to /etc/rc.local
+@cindex /etc/rc.local additions
+@cindex ctl-amd
+
+@i{Amd} is best started from @samp{/etc/rc.local} on BSD systems, or
+from the appropriate start-level script in @samp{/etc/init.d} on System V
+systems.
+
+@example
+if [ -f /usr/local/sbin/ctl-amd ]; then
+    /usr/local/sbin/ctl-amd start; (echo -n ' amd') > /dev/console
+fi
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The shell script, @samp{ctl-amd} is used to start, stop, or restart
+@i{Amd}.  It is a relatively generic script.  All options you want to
+set should not be made in this script, but rather updated in the
+@file{amd.conf} file. @xref{Amd Configuration File}.
+
+If you do not wish to use an @i{Amd} configuration file, you may start
+@i{Amd} manually.  For example, getting the map entries via NIS:
+
+@example
+amd -r -l /var/log/amd `ypcat -k auto.master`
+@end example
+
+@node Stopping Amd, Restarting Amd, Starting Amd, Run-time Administration
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Stopping @i{Amd}
+@cindex Stopping Amd
+@cindex SIGTERM signal
+@cindex SIGINT signal
+
+@i{Amd} stops in response to two signals.
+
+@table @samp
+@item SIGTERM
+causes the top-level automount points to be unmounted and then @i{Amd}
+to exit.  Any automounted filesystems are left mounted.  They can be
+recovered by restarting @i{Amd} with the @code{-r} command line option.@refill
+
+@item SIGINT
+causes @i{Amd} to attempt to unmount any filesystems which it has
+automounted, in addition to the actions of @samp{SIGTERM}.  This signal
+is primarily used for debugging.@refill
+@end table
+
+Actions taken for other signals are undefined.
+
+The easiest and safest way to stop @i{Amd}, without having to find its
+process ID by hand, is to use the @file{ctl-amd} script, as with:
+
+@example
+ctl-amd stop
+@end example
+
+@node Restarting Amd, Controlling Amd, Stopping Amd, Run-time Administration
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Restarting @i{Amd}
+@cindex Restarting Amd
+@cindex Killing and starting Amd
+
+Before @i{Amd} can be started, it is vital to ensure that no other
+@i{Amd} processes are managing any of the mount points, and that the
+previous process(es) have terminated cleanly.  When a terminating signal
+is set to @i{Amd}, the automounter does @emph{not} terminate right then.
+Rather, it starts by unmounting all of its managed mount mounts in the
+background, and then terminates.  It usually takes a few seconds for
+this process to happen, but it can take an arbitrarily longer time.  If
+two or more @i{Amd} processes attempt to manage the same mount point, it
+usually will result in a system lockup.
+
+The easiest and safest way to restart @i{Amd}, without having to find
+its process ID by hand, sending it the @samp{SIGTERM} signal, waiting for @i{Amd}
+to die cleanly, and verifying so, is to use the @file{ctl-amd} script,
+as with:
+
+@example
+ctl-amd restart
+@end example
+
+The script will locate the process ID of @i{Amd}, kill it, and wait for
+it to die cleanly before starting a new instance of the automounter.
+@file{ctl-amd} will wait for a total of 30 seconds for @i{Amd} to die,
+and will check once every 5 seconds if it had.
+
+@node Controlling Amd, , Restarting Amd, Run-time Administration
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Controlling @i{Amd}
+@cindex Controlling Amd
+@cindex Discovering what is going on at run-time
+@cindex Listing currently mounted filesystems
+
+It is sometimes desirable or necessary to exercise external control
+over some of @i{Amd}'s internal state.  To support this requirement,
+@i{Amd} implements an RPC interface which is used by the @dfn{Amq} program.
+A variety of information is available.
+
+@i{Amq} generally applies an operation, specified by a single letter option,
+to a list of mount points.  The default operation is to obtain statistics
+about each mount point.  This is similar to the output shown above
+but includes information about the number and type of accesses to each
+mount point.
+
+@menu
+* Amq default::       Default command behavior.
+* Amq -f option::     Flushing the map cache.
+* Amq -h option::     Controlling a non-local host.
+* Amq -l option::     Controlling the log file.
+* Amq -m option::     Obtaining mount statistics.
+* Amq -M-option::     Mounting a volume.
+* Amq -p option::     Getting Amd's process ID.
+* Amq -P-option::     Contacting alternate Amd processes.
+* Amq -s option::     Obtaining global statistics.
+* Amq -T option::     Use TCP transport.
+* Amq -U-option::     Use UDP transport.
+* Amq -u option::     Forcing volumes to time out.
+* Amq -v option::     Version information.
+* Other Amq options:: Three other special options.
+@end menu
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Amq default, Amq -f option, Controlling Amd, Controlling Amd
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @i{Amq} default information
+
+With no arguments, @dfn{Amq} obtains a brief list of all existing
+mounts created by @i{Amd}.  This is different from the list displayed by
+@b{df}(1) since the latter only includes system mount points.
+
+@noindent
+The output from this option includes the following information:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+the automount point,
+@item
+the filesystem type,
+@item
+the mount map or mount information,
+@item
+the internal, or system mount point.
+@end itemize
+
+@noindent
+For example:
+
+@example
+/            root   "root"                    sky:(pid75)
+/homes       toplvl /usr/local/etc/amd.homes  /homes
+/home        toplvl /usr/local/etc/amd.home   /home
+/homes/jsp   nfs    charm:/home/charm         /a/charm/home/charm/jsp
+/homes/phjk  nfs    toytown:/home/toytown     /a/toytown/home/toytown/ai/phjk
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+If an argument is given then statistics for that volume name will
+be output.  For example:
+
+@example
+What         Uid   Getattr Lookup RdDir   RdLnk   Statfs Mounted@@
+/homes       0     1196    512    22      0       30     90/09/14 12:32:55
+/homes/jsp   0     0       0      0       1180    0      90/10/13 12:56:58
+@end example
+
+@table @code
+@item What
+the volume name.
+
+@item Uid
+ignored.
+
+@item Getattr
+the count of NFS @dfn{getattr} requests on this node.  This should only be
+non-zero for directory nodes.
+
+@item Lookup
+the count of NFS @dfn{lookup} requests on this node.  This should only be
+non-zero for directory nodes.
+
+@item RdDir
+the count of NFS @dfn{readdir} requests on this node.  This should only
+be non-zero for directory nodes.
+
+@item RdLnk
+the count of NFS @dfn{readlink} requests on this node.  This should be
+zero for directory nodes.
+
+@item Statfs
+the count of NFS @dfn{statfs} requests on this node.  This should only
+be non-zero for top-level automount points.
+
+@item Mounted@@
+the date and time the volume name was first referenced.
+@end table
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Amq -f option, Amq -h option, Amq default, Controlling Amd
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @i{Amq} @code{-f} option
+@cindex Flushing the map cache
+@cindex Map cache, flushing
+
+The @code{-f} option causes @i{Amd} to flush the internal mount map cache.
+This is useful for example in Hesiod maps since @i{Amd} will not
+automatically notice when they have been updated.  The map cache can
+also be synchronized with the map source by using the @samp{sync} option
+(@pxref{Automount Filesystem}).@refill
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Amq -l option, Amq -m option, Amq -h option, Controlling Amd
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @i{Amq} @code{-l} option
+@cindex Resetting the Amd log file
+@cindex Setting the Amd log file via Amq
+@cindex Log file, resetting
+
+Tell @i{Amd} to use @i{log_file} as the log file name.  For security
+reasons, this @emph{must} be the same log file which @i{Amd} used when
+started.  This option is therefore only useful to refresh @i{Amd}'s open
+file handle on the log file, so that it can be rotated and compressed
+via daily cron jobs.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Amq -h option, Amq -l option, Amq -f option, Controlling Amd
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @i{Amq} @code{-h} option
+@cindex Querying an alternate host
+
+By default the local host is used.  In an HP-UX cluster the root server
+is used since that is the only place in the cluster where @i{Amd} will
+be running.  To query @i{Amd} on another host the @code{-h} option should
+be used.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Amq -m option, Amq -M-option, Amq -l option, Controlling Amd
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @i{Amq} @code{-m} option
+
+The @code{-m} option displays similar information about mounted
+filesystems, rather than automount points.  The output includes the
+following information:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+the mount information,
+@item
+the mount point,
+@item
+the filesystem type,
+@item
+the number of references to this filesystem,
+@item
+the server hostname,
+@item
+the state of the file server,
+@item
+any error which has occurred.
+@end itemize
+
+For example:
+
+@example
+"root"           truth:(pid602)     root   1 localhost is up
+hesiod.home      /home              toplvl 1 localhost is up
+hesiod.vol       /vol               toplvl 1 localhost is up
+hesiod.homes     /homes             toplvl 1 localhost is up
+amy:/home/amy    /a/amy/home/amy    nfs    5 amy is up
+swan:/home/swan  /a/swan/home/swan  nfs    0 swan is up (Permission denied)
+ex:/home/ex      /a/ex/home/ex      nfs    0 ex is down
+@end example
+
+When the reference count is zero the filesystem is not mounted but
+the mount point and server information is still being maintained
+by @i{Amd}.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Amq -M-option, Amq -p option, Amq -m option, Controlling Amd
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @i{Amq} @code{-M} option
+
+The @code{-M} option passes a new map entry to @i{Amd} and waits for it to
+be evaluated, possibly causing a mount.  For example, the following
+command would cause @samp{/home/toytown} on host @samp{toytown} to be
+mounted locally on @samp{/mnt/toytown}.
+
+@example
+amq -M '/mnt/toytown type:=nfs;rfs:=/home/toytown;rhost:=toytown;fs:=$@{key@}'
+@end example
+
+@i{Amd} applies some simple security checks before allowing this
+operation.  The check tests whether the incoming request is from a
+privileged UDP port on the local machine.  ``Permission denied'' is
+returned if the check fails.
+
+This option is very insecure as it is vulnerable to attacks such as IP
+Spoofing.  In other words, it is relatively easy for an attacker who
+really wants to, to make your @i{Amd} process mount any filesystem from
+the Internet!  Therefore, the @emph{complete} code which supports the
+@code{-M} option in @i{Amd} and @i{Amq} is turned off by default.  To turn
+it on, you have to reconfigure am-utils with @code{configure
+--enable-amq-mount}.  Think twice before doing so, and use this option
+only if you absolutely need to.
+
+A future release of @i{Amd} will include code to allow the @b{mount}(8)
+command to mount automount points:
+
+@example
+mount -t amd /vol hesiod.vol
+@end example
+
+This will then allow @i{Amd} to be controlled from the standard system
+filesystem mount list.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Amq -p option, Amq -P-option, Amq -M-option, Controlling Amd
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @i{Amq} @code{-p} option
+@cindex Process ID; Amd
+@cindex Amd's process ID
+@cindex Amd's PID
+@cindex PID; Amd
+
+Return the process ID of the remote or locally running @i{Amd}.  Useful
+when you need to send a signal to the local @i{Amd} process, and would
+rather not have to search through the process table.  This option is
+used in the @file{ctl-amd} script.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Amq -P-option, Amq -s option, Amq -p option, Controlling Amd
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @i{Amq} @code{-P} option
+@cindex Multiple Amd processes
+@cindex Running multiple Amd
+@cindex Debugging a new Amd configuration
+@cindex RPC Program numbers; Amd
+
+Contact an alternate running @i{Amd} that had registered itself on a
+different RPC @var{program_number} and apply all other operations to
+that instance of the automounter.  This is useful when you run multiple
+copies of @i{Amd}, and need to manage each one separately.  If not
+specified, @i{Amq} will use the default program number for @i{Amd}, 300019.
+For security reasons, the only alternate program numbers @i{Amd} can use
+range from 300019 to 300029, inclusive.
+
+For example, to kill an alternate running @i{Amd}:
+
+@example
+kill `amq -p -P 300020`
+@end example
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Amq -s option, Amq -T option, Amq -P-option, Controlling Amd
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @i{Amq} @code{-s} option
+@cindex Global statistics
+@cindex Statistics
+
+The @code{-s} option displays global statistics.  If any other options are specified
+or any filesystems named then this option is ignored.  For example:
+
+@example
+requests  stale     mount     mount     unmount
+deferred  fhandles  ok        failed    failed
+1054      1         487       290       7017
+@end example
+
+@table @samp
+@item Deferred requests
+are those for which an immediate reply could not be constructed.  For
+example, this would happen if a background mount was required.
+
+@item Stale filehandles
+counts the number of times the kernel passes a stale filehandle to @i{Amd}.
+Large numbers indicate problems.
+
+@item Mount ok
+counts the number of automounts which were successful.
+
+@item Mount failed
+counts the number of automounts which failed.
+
+@item Unmount failed
+counts the number of times a filesystem could not be unmounted.  Very
+large numbers here indicate that the time between unmount attempts
+should be increased.
+@end table
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Amq -T option, Amq -U-option, Amq -s option, Controlling Amd
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @i{Amq} @code{-T} option
+@cindex Forcing Amq to use a TCP transport
+@cindex TCP; using with Amq
+
+The @code{-T} option causes the @i{Amq} to contact @i{Amd} using the TCP
+transport only (connection oriented).  Normally, @i{Amq} will use TCP
+first, and if that failed, will try UDP.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Amq -U-option, Amq -u option, Amq -T option, Controlling Amd
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @i{Amq} @code{-U} option
+@cindex Forcing Amq to use a UDP transport
+@cindex UDP; using with Amq
+
+The @code{-U} option causes the @i{Amq} to contact @i{Amd} using the UDP
+transport only (connectionless).  Normally, @i{Amq} will use TCP first,
+and if that failed, will try UDP.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Amq -u option, Amq -v option, Amq -U-option, Controlling Amd
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @i{Amq} @code{-u} option
+@cindex Forcing filesystem to time out
+@cindex Unmounting a filesystem
+
+The @code{-u} option causes the time-to-live interval of the named mount
+points to be expired, thus causing an unmount attempt.  This is the only
+safe way to unmount an automounted filesystem.  It is not possible to
+unmount a filesystem which has been mounted with the @samp{nounmount}
+flag.
+
+@c The @code{-H} option informs @i{Amd} that the specified mount point has hung -
+@c as if its keepalive timer had expired.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Amq -v option, Other Amq options, Amq -u option, Controlling Amd
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @i{Amq} @code{-v} option
+@cindex Version information at run-time
+
+The @code{-v} option displays the version of @i{Amd} in a similar way to
+@i{Amd}'s @code{-v} option.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Other Amq options, , Amq -v option, Controlling Amd
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Other @i{Amq} options
+@cindex Logging options via Amq
+@cindex Debugging options via Amq
+
+Two other operations are implemented.  These modify the state of @i{Amd}
+as a whole, rather than any particular filesystem.  The @code{-x} and
+@code{-D} options have exactly the same effect as @i{Amd}'s corresponding
+command line options.
+
+When @i{Amd} receives a @code{-x} flag it limits the log options being
+modified to those which were not enabled at startup.  This prevents a
+user turning @emph{off} any logging option which was specified at
+startup, though any which have been turned on since then can still be
+turned off.  The @code{-D} option has a similar behavior.
+
+@c ################################################################
+@node FSinfo, Hlfsd, Run-time Administration, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter FSinfo
+@cindex FSinfo
+@cindex Filesystem info package
+
+XXX: this chapter should be reviewed by someone knowledgeable with
+fsinfo.
+
+@menu
+* FSinfo Overview::                 Introduction to FSinfo.
+* Using FSinfo::                    Basic concepts.
+* FSinfo Grammar::                  Language syntax, semantics and examples.
+* FSinfo host definitions::         Defining a new host.
+* FSinfo host attributes::          Definable host attributes. 
+* FSinfo filesystems::              Defining locally attached filesystems.
+* FSinfo static mounts::            Defining additional static mounts.
+* FSinfo automount definitions::
+* FSinfo Command Line Options::
+* FSinfo errors::
+@end menu
+
+@node FSinfo Overview, Using FSinfo, FSinfo, FSinfo
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @i{FSinfo} overview
+@cindex FSinfo overview
+
+@i{FSinfo} is a filesystem management tool.  It has been designed to
+work with @i{Amd} to help system administrators keep track of the ever
+increasing filesystem namespace under their control.
+
+The purpose of @i{FSinfo} is to generate all the important standard
+filesystem data files from a single set of input data.  Starting with a
+single data source guarantees that all the generated files are
+self-consistent.  One of the possible output data formats is a set of
+@i{Amd} maps which can be used amongst the set of hosts described in the
+input data.
+
+@i{FSinfo} implements a declarative language.  This language is
+specifically designed for describing filesystem namespace and physical
+layouts.  The basic declaration defines a mounted filesystem including
+its device name, mount point, and all the volumes and access
+permissions.  @i{FSinfo} reads this information and builds an internal
+map of the entire network of hosts.  Using this map, many different data
+formats can be produced including @file{/etc/fstab},
+@file{/etc/exports}, @i{Amd} mount maps and
+@file{/etc/bootparams}.@refill
+
+@node Using FSinfo, FSinfo Grammar, FSinfo Overview, FSinfo
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Using @i{FSinfo}
+@cindex Using FSinfo
+
+The basic strategy when using @i{FSinfo} is to gather all the
+information about all disks on all machines into one set of
+declarations.  For each machine being managed, the following data is
+required:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+Hostname
+@item
+List of all filesystems and, optionally, their mount points.
+@item
+Names of volumes stored on each filesystem.
+@item
+NFS export information for each volume.
+@item
+The list of static filesystem mounts.
+@end itemize
+
+The following information can also be entered into the same
+configuration files so that all data can be kept in one place.
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+List of network interfaces
+@item
+IP address of each interface
+@item
+Hardware address of each interface
+@item
+Dumpset to which each filesystem belongs
+@item
+and more @dots{}
+@end itemize
+
+To generate @i{Amd} mount maps, the automount tree must also be defined
+(@pxref{FSinfo automount definitions}).  This will have been designed at
+the time the volume names were allocated.  Some volume names will not be
+automounted, so @i{FSinfo} needs an explicit list of which volumes
+should be automounted.@refill
+
+Hostnames are required at several places in the @i{FSinfo} language.  It
+is important to stick to either fully qualified names or unqualified
+names.  Using a mixture of the two will inevitably result in confusion.
+
+Sometimes volumes need to be referenced which are not defined in the set
+of hosts being managed with @i{FSinfo}.  The required action is to add a
+dummy set of definitions for the host and volume names required.  Since
+the files generated for those particular hosts will not be used on them,
+the exact values used is not critical.
+
+@node FSinfo Grammar, FSinfo host definitions, Using FSinfo, FSinfo
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @i{FSinfo} grammar
+@cindex FSinfo grammar
+@cindex Grammar, FSinfo
+
+@i{FSinfo} has a relatively simple grammar.  Distinct syntactic
+constructs exist for each of the different types of data, though they
+share a common flavor.  Several conventions are used in the grammar
+fragments below.
+
+The notation, @i{list(}@t{xxx}@i{)}, indicates a list of zero or more
+@t{xxx}'s.  The notation, @i{opt(}@t{xxx}@i{)}, indicates zero or one
+@t{xxx}.  Items in double quotes, @i{eg} @t{"host"}, represent input
+tokens.  Items in angle brackets, @i{eg} @var{<hostname>}, represent
+strings in the input.  Strings need not be in double quotes, except to
+differentiate them from reserved words.  Quoted strings may include the
+usual set of C ``@t{\}'' escape sequences with one exception: a
+backslash-newline-whitespace sequence is squashed into a single space
+character.  To defeat this feature, put a further backslash at the start
+of the second line.
+
+At the outermost level of the grammar, the input consists of a
+sequence of host and automount declarations.  These declarations are
+all parsed before they are analyzed.  This means they can appear in
+any order and cyclic host references are possible.
+
+@example
+fsinfo      : @i{list(}fsinfo_attr@i{)} ;
+
+fsinfo_attr : host | automount ;
+@end example
+
+@menu
+* FSinfo host definitions::
+* FSinfo automount definitions::
+@end menu
+
+@node FSinfo host definitions, FSinfo host attributes, FSinfo Grammar, FSinfo
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @i{FSinfo} host definitions
+@cindex FSinfo host definitions
+@cindex Defining a host, FSinfo
+
+A host declaration consists of three parts: a set of machine attribute
+data, a list of filesystems physically attached to the machine, and a
+list of additional statically mounted filesystems.
+
+@example
+host        : "host" host_data @i{list(}filesystem@i{@i{)}} @i{list(}mount@i{@i{)}} ;
+@end example
+
+Each host must be declared in this way exactly once.  Such things as the
+hardware address, the architecture and operating system types and the
+cluster name are all specified within the @dfn{host data}.
+
+All the disks the machine has should then be described in the @dfn{list
+of filesystems}.  When describing disks, you can specify what
+@dfn{volname} the disk/partition should have and all such entries are
+built up into a dictionary which can then be used for building the
+automounter maps.
+
+The @dfn{list of mounts} specifies all the filesystems that should be
+statically mounted on the machine.
+
+@menu
+* FSinfo host attributes::
+* FSinfo filesystems::
+* FSinfo static mounts::
+@end menu
+
+@node FSinfo host attributes, FSinfo filesystems, FSinfo host definitions , FSinfo host definitions
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @i{FSinfo} host attributes
+@cindex FSinfo host attributes
+@cindex Defining host attributes, FSinfo
+
+The host data, @dfn{host_data}, always includes the @dfn{hostname}.  In
+addition, several other host attributes can be given.
+
+@example
+host_data   : @var{<hostname>}
+            | "@{" @i{list(}host_attrs@i{)} "@}" @var{<hostname>}
+            ;
+
+host_attrs  : host_attr "=" @var{<string>}
+            | netif
+            ;
+
+host_attr   : "config"
+            | "arch"
+            | "os"
+            | "cluster"
+            ;
+@end example
+
+The @dfn{hostname} is, typically, the fully qualified hostname of the
+machine.
+
+Examples:
+
+@example
+host dylan.doc.ic.ac.uk
+
+host @{
+    os = hpux
+    arch = hp300
+@} dougal.doc.ic.ac.uk
+@end example
+
+The options that can be given as host attributes are shown below.
+
+@menu
+* netif Option:         FSinfo host netif:
+* config Option:        FSinfo host config:
+* arch Option:          FSinfo host arch:
+* os Option:            FSinfo host os:
+* cluster Option:       FSinfo host cluster:
+@end menu
+
+@node FSinfo host netif, FSinfo host config, , FSinfo host attributes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection netif Option
+
+This defines the set of network interfaces configured on the machine.
+The interface attributes collected by @i{FSinfo} are the IP address,
+subnet mask and hardware address.  Multiple interfaces may be defined
+for hosts with several interfaces by an entry for each interface.  The
+values given are sanity checked, but are currently unused for anything
+else.
+
+@example
+netif       : "netif" @var{<string>} "@{" @i{list(}netif_attrs@i{)} "@}" ;
+
+netif_attrs : netif_attr "=" @var{<string>} ;
+
+netif_attr  : "inaddr" | "netmask" | "hwaddr" ;
+@end example
+
+Examples:
+
+@example
+netif ie0 @{
+    inaddr  = 129.31.81.37
+    netmask = 0xfffffe00
+    hwaddr  = "08:00:20:01:a6:a5"
+@}
+
+netif ec0 @{ @}
+@end example
+
+@node FSinfo host config, FSinfo host arch, FSinfo host netif, FSinfo host attributes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection config Option
+@cindex FSinfo config host attribute
+@cindex config, FSinfo host attribute
+
+This option allows you to specify configuration variables for the
+startup scripts (@file{rc} scripts).  A simple string should immediately
+follow the keyword.
+
+Example:
+
+@example
+config "NFS_SERVER=true"
+config "ZEPHYR=true"
+@end example
+
+This option is currently unsupported.
+
+@node FSinfo host arch, FSinfo host os, FSinfo host config, FSinfo host attributes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection arch Option
+@cindex FSinfo arch host attribute
+@cindex arch, FSinfo host attribute
+
+This defines the architecture of the machine.  For example:
+
+@example
+arch = hp300
+@end example
+
+This is intended to be of use when building architecture specific
+mountmaps, however, the option is currently unsupported.
+
+@node FSinfo host os, FSinfo host cluster, FSinfo host arch, FSinfo host attributes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection os Option
+@cindex FSinfo os host attribute
+@cindex os, FSinfo host attribute
+
+This defines the operating system type of the host.  For example:
+
+@example
+os = hpux
+@end example
+
+This information is used when creating the @file{fstab} files, for
+example in choosing which format to use for the @file{fstab} entries
+within the file.
+
+@node FSinfo host cluster, , FSinfo host os, FSinfo host attributes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection cluster Option
+@cindex FSinfo cluster host attribute
+@cindex cluster, FSinfo host attribute
+
+This is used for specifying in which cluster the machine belongs.  For
+example:
+
+@example
+cluster = "theory"
+@end example
+
+The cluster is intended to be used when generating the automount maps,
+although it is currently unsupported.
+
+@node FSinfo filesystems, FSinfo static mounts, FSinfo host attributes, FSinfo host definitions
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @i{FSinfo} filesystems
+@cindex FSinfo filesystems
+
+The list of physically attached filesystems follows the machine
+attributes.  These should define all the filesystems available from this
+machine, whether exported or not.  In addition to the device name,
+filesystems have several attributes, such as filesystem type, mount
+options, and @samp{fsck} pass number which are needed to generate
+@file{fstab} entries.
+
+@example
+filesystem  : "fs" @var{<device>} "@{" @i{list(}fs_data@i{)} "@}" ;
+
+fs_data     : fs_data_attr "=" @var{<string>}
+            | mount
+            ;
+
+fs_data_attr
+            : "fstype" | "opts" | "passno"
+            | "freq" | "dumpset" | "log"
+            ;
+@end example
+
+Here, @var{<device>} is the device name of the disk (for example,
+@file{/dev/dsk/2s0}).  The device name is used for building the mount
+maps and for the @file{fstab} file.  The attributes that can be
+specified are shown in the following section.
+
+The @i{FSinfo} configuration file for @code{dylan.doc.ic.ac.uk} is listed below.
+
+@example
+host dylan.doc.ic.ac.uk
+
+fs /dev/dsk/0s0 @{
+        fstype = swap
+@}
+
+fs /dev/dsk/0s0 @{
+        fstype = hfs
+        opts = rw,noquota,grpid
+        passno = 0;
+        freq = 1;
+        mount / @{ @}
+@}
+
+fs /dev/dsk/1s0 @{
+        fstype = hfs
+        opts = defaults
+        passno = 1;
+        freq = 1;
+        mount /usr @{
+                local @{
+                        exportfs "dougal eden dylan zebedee brian"
+                        volname /nfs/hp300/local
+                @}
+        @}
+@}
+
+fs /dev/dsk/2s0 @{
+        fstype = hfs
+        opts = defaults
+        passno = 1;
+        freq = 1;
+        mount default @{
+                exportfs "toytown_clients hangers_on"
+                volname /home/dylan/dk2
+        @}
+@}
+
+fs /dev/dsk/3s0 @{
+        fstype = hfs
+        opts = defaults
+        passno = 1;
+        freq = 1;
+        mount default @{
+                exportfs "toytown_clients hangers_on"
+                volname /home/dylan/dk3
+        @}
+@}
+
+fs /dev/dsk/5s0 @{
+        fstype = hfs
+        opts = defaults
+        passno = 1;
+        freq = 1;
+        mount default @{
+                exportfs "toytown_clients hangers_on"
+                volname /home/dylan/dk5
+        @}
+@}
+@end example
+
+@menu
+* fstype Option:        FSinfo filesystems fstype:
+* opts Option:          FSinfo filesystems opts:
+* passno Option:        FSinfo filesystems passno:
+* freq Option:          FSinfo filesystems freq:
+* mount Option:         FSinfo filesystems mount:
+* dumpset Option:       FSinfo filesystems dumpset:
+* log Option:           FSinfo filesystems log:
+@end menu
+
+@node FSinfo filesystems fstype, FSinfo filesystems opts, , FSinfo filesystems
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection fstype Option
+@cindex FSinfo fstype filesystems option
+@cindex fstype, FSinfo filesystems option
+@cindex export, FSinfo special fstype
+
+This specifies the type of filesystem being declared and will be placed
+into the @file{fstab} file as is.  The value of this option will be
+handed to @code{mount} as the filesystem type---it should have such
+values as @code{4.2}, @code{nfs} or @code{swap}.  The value is not
+examined for correctness.
+
+There is one special case.  If the filesystem type is specified as
+@samp{export} then the filesystem information will not be added to the
+host's @file{fstab} information, but it will still be visible on the
+network.  This is useful for defining hosts which contain referenced
+volumes but which are not under full control of @i{FSinfo}.
+
+Example:
+
+@example
+fstype = swap
+@end example
+
+@node FSinfo filesystems opts, FSinfo filesystems passno, FSinfo filesystems fstype, FSinfo filesystems
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection opts Option
+@cindex FSinfo opts filesystems option
+@cindex opts, FSinfo filesystems option
+
+This defines any options that should be given to @b{mount}(8) in the
+@file{fstab} file.  For example:
+
+@example
+opts = rw,nosuid,grpid
+@end example
+
+@node FSinfo filesystems passno, FSinfo filesystems freq, FSinfo filesystems opts, FSinfo filesystems
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection passno Option
+@cindex FSinfo passno filesystems option
+@cindex passno, FSinfo filesystems option
+
+This defines the @b{fsck}(8) pass number in which to check the
+filesystem.  This value will be placed into the @file{fstab} file.
+
+Example:
+
+@example
+passno = 1
+@end example
+
+@node FSinfo filesystems freq, FSinfo filesystems mount, FSinfo filesystems passno, FSinfo filesystems
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection freq Option
+@cindex FSinfo freq filesystems option
+@cindex freq, FSinfo filesystems option
+
+This defines the interval (in days) between dumps.  The value is placed
+as is into the @file{fstab} file.
+
+Example:
+
+@example
+freq = 3
+@end example
+
+@node FSinfo filesystems mount, FSinfo filesystems dumpset, FSinfo filesystems freq, FSinfo filesystems
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection mount Option
+@cindex FSinfo mount filesystems option
+@cindex mount, FSinfo filesystems option
+@cindex exportfs, FSinfo mount option
+@cindex volname, FSinfo mount option
+@cindex sel, FSinfo mount option
+
+This defines the mountpoint at which to place the filesystem.  If the
+mountpoint of the filesystem is specified as @code{default}, then the
+filesystem will be mounted in the automounter's tree under its volume
+name and the mount will automatically be inherited by the automounter.
+
+Following the mountpoint, namespace information for the filesystem may
+be described.  The options that can be given here are @code{exportfs},
+@code{volname} and @code{sel}.
+
+The format is:
+
+@example
+mount       : "mount" vol_tree ;
+
+vol_tree    : @i{list(}vol_tree_attr@i{)} ;
+
+vol_tree_attr
+            :  @var{<string>} "@{" @i{list(}vol_tree_info@i{)} vol_tree "@}" ;
+
+vol_tree_info
+            : "exportfs" @var{<export-data>}
+            | "volname" @var{<volname>}
+            | "sel" @var{<selector-list>}
+            ;
+@end example
+
+Example:
+
+@example
+mount default @{
+    exportfs "dylan dougal florence zebedee"
+    volname /vol/andrew
+@}
+@end example
+
+In the above example, the filesystem currently being declared will have
+an entry placed into the @file{exports} file allowing the filesystem to
+be exported to the machines @code{dylan}, @code{dougal}, @code{florence}
+and @code{zebedee}.  The volume name by which the filesystem will be
+referred to remotely, is @file{/vol/andrew}.  By declaring the
+mountpoint to be @code{default}, the filesystem will be mounted on the
+local machine in the automounter tree, where @i{Amd} will automatically
+inherit the mount as @file{/vol/andrew}.@refill
+
+@table @samp
+@item exportfs
+a string defining which machines the filesystem may be exported to.
+This is copied, as is, into the @file{exports} file---no sanity checking
+is performed on this string.@refill
+
+@item volname
+a string which declares the remote name by which to reference the
+filesystem.  The string is entered into a dictionary and allows you to
+refer to this filesystem in other places by this volume name.@refill
+
+@item sel
+a string which is placed into the automounter maps as a selector for the
+filesystem.@refill
+
+@end table
+
+@node FSinfo filesystems dumpset, FSinfo filesystems log, FSinfo filesystems mount, FSinfo filesystems
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection dumpset Option
+@cindex FSinfo dumpset filesystems option
+@cindex dumpset, FSinfo filesystems option
+
+This provides support for Imperial College's local file backup tools and
+is not documented further here.
+
+@node FSinfo filesystems log, , FSinfo filesystems dumpset, FSinfo filesystems    
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection log Option
+@cindex FSinfo log filesystems option
+@cindex log, FSinfo filesystems option
+
+Specifies the log device for the current filesystem. This is ignored if
+not required by the particular filesystem type.
+
+@node FSinfo static mounts, FSinfo automount definitions , FSinfo filesystems, FSinfo host definitions
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @i{FSinfo} static mounts
+@cindex FSinfo static mounts
+@cindex Statically mounts filesystems, FSinfo
+
+Each host may also have a number of statically mounted filesystems.  For
+example, the host may be a diskless workstation in which case it will
+have no @code{fs} declarations.  In this case the @code{mount}
+declaration is used to determine from where its filesystems will be
+mounted.  In addition to being added to the @file{fstab} file, this
+information can also be used to generate a suitable @file{bootparams}
+file.@refill
+
+@example
+mount       : "mount" @var{<volname>} @i{list(}localinfo@i{)} ;
+
+localinfo   : localinfo_attr @var{<string>} ;
+
+localinfo_attr
+            : "as"
+            | "from"
+            | "fstype"
+            | "opts"
+            ;
+@end example
+
+The filesystem specified to be mounted will be searched for in the
+dictionary of volume names built when scanning the list of hosts'
+definitions.
+
+The attributes have the following semantics:
+@table @samp
+@item from @var{machine}
+mount the filesystem from the machine with the hostname of
+@dfn{machine}.@refill
+
+@item as @var{mountpoint}
+mount the filesystem locally as the name given, in case this is
+different from the advertised volume name of the filesystem.
+
+@item opts @var{options}
+native @b{mount}(8) options.
+
+@item fstype @var{type}
+type of filesystem to be mounted.
+@end table
+
+An example:
+
+@example
+mount /export/exec/hp300/local as /usr/local
+@end example
+
+If the mountpoint specified is either @file{/} or @file{swap}, the
+machine will be considered to be booting off the net and this will be
+noted for use in generating a @file{bootparams} file for the host which
+owns the filesystems.
+
+@node FSinfo automount definitions, FSinfo Command Line Options, FSinfo static mounts, FSinfo
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Defining an @i{Amd} Mount Map in @i{FSinfo}
+@cindex FSinfo automount definitions
+@cindex Defining an Amd mount map, FSinfo
+
+The maps used by @i{Amd} can be constructed from @i{FSinfo} by defining
+all the automount trees.  @i{FSinfo} takes all the definitions found and
+builds one map for each top level tree.
+
+The automount tree is usually defined last.  A single automount
+configuration will usually apply to an entire management domain.  One
+@code{automount} declaration is needed for each @i{Amd} automount point.
+@i{FSinfo} determines whether the automount point is @dfn{direct}
+(@pxref{Direct Automount Filesystem}) or @dfn{indirect}
+(@pxref{Top-level Filesystem}).  Direct automount points are
+distinguished by the fact that there is no underlying
+@dfn{automount_tree}.@refill
+
+@example
+automount   : "automount" @i{opt(}auto_opts@i{)} automount_tree ;
+
+auto_opts   : "opts" @var{<mount-options>} ;
+
+automount_tree
+            : @i{list(}automount_attr@i{)}
+            ;
+
+automount_attr
+            : @var{<string>} "=" @var{<volname>}
+            | @var{<string>} "->" @var{<symlink>}
+            | @var{<string>} "@{" automount_tree "@}"
+            ;
+@end example
+
+If @var{<mount-options>} is given, then it is the string to be placed in
+the maps for @i{Amd} for the @code{opts} option.
+
+A @dfn{map} is typically a tree of filesystems, for example @file{home}
+normally contains a tree of filesystems representing other machines in
+the network.
+
+A map can either be given as a name representing an already defined
+volume name, or it can be a tree.  A tree is represented by placing
+braces after the name.  For example, to define a tree @file{/vol}, the
+following map would be defined:
+
+@example
+automount /vol @{ @}
+@end example
+
+Within a tree, the only items that can appear are more maps.
+For example:
+
+@example
+automount /vol @{
+    andrew @{ @}
+    X11 @{ @}
+@}
+@end example
+
+In this case, @i{FSinfo} will look for volumes named @file{/vol/andrew}
+and @file{/vol/X11} and a map entry will be generated for each.  If the
+volumes are defined more than once, then @i{FSinfo} will generate
+a series of alternate entries for them in the maps.@refill
+
+Instead of a tree, either a link (@var{name} @code{->}
+@var{destination}) or a reference can be specified (@var{name} @code{=}
+@var{destination}).  A link creates a symbolic link to the string
+specified, without further processing the entry.  A reference will
+examine the destination filesystem and optimize the reference.  For
+example, to create an entry for @code{njw} in the @file{/homes} map,
+either of the two forms can be used:@refill
+
+@example
+automount /homes @{
+    njw -> /home/dylan/njw
+@}
+@end example
+
+or
+
+@example
+automount /homes @{
+    njw = /home/dylan/njw
+@}
+@end example
+
+In the first example, when @file{/homes/njw} is referenced from @i{Amd},
+a link will be created leading to @file{/home/dylan/njw} and the
+automounter will be referenced a second time to resolve this filename.
+The map entry would be:
+
+@example
+njw type:=link;fs:=/home/dylan/njw
+@end example
+
+In the second example, the destination directory is analyzed and found
+to be in the filesystem @file{/home/dylan} which has previously been
+defined in the maps. Hence the map entry will look like:
+
+@example
+njw rhost:=dylan;rfs:=/home/dylan;sublink:=njw
+@end example
+
+Creating only one symbolic link, and one access to @i{Amd}.
+
+@node FSinfo Command Line Options, FSinfo errors, FSinfo automount definitions, FSinfo
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @i{FSinfo} Command Line Options
+@cindex FSinfo command line options
+@cindex Command line options, FSinfo
+
+@i{FSinfo} is started from the command line by using the command:
+
+@example
+fsinfo [@i{options}] @i{files} ...
+@end example
+
+The input to @i{FSinfo} is a single set of definitions of machines and
+automount maps.  If multiple files are given on the command-line, then
+the files are concatenated together to form the input source.  The files
+are passed individually through the C pre-processor before being parsed.
+
+Several options define a prefix for the name of an output file.  If the
+prefix is not specified no output of that type is produced.  The suffix
+used will correspond either to the hostname to which a file belongs, or
+to the type of output if only one file is produced.  Dumpsets and the
+@file{bootparams} file are in the latter class.  To put the output into
+a subdirectory simply put a @file{/} at the end of the prefix, making
+sure that the directory has already been made before running
+@i{Fsinfo}.
+
+@menu
+* -a FSinfo Option::    Amd automount directory:
+* -b FSinfo Option::    Prefix for bootparams files.
+* -d FSinfo Option::    Prefix for dumpset data files.
+* -e FSinfo Option::    Prefix for exports files.
+* -f FSinfo Option::    Prefix for fstab files.
+* -h FSinfo Option::    Local hostname.
+* -m FSinfo Option::    Prefix for automount maps.
+* -q FSinfo Option::    Ultra quiet mode.
+* -v FSinfo Option::    Verbose mode.
+* -I FSinfo Option::    Define new #include directory.
+* -D-FSinfo Option::    Define macro.
+* -U FSinfo Option::    Undefine macro.
+@end menu
+
+@node -a FSinfo Option, -b FSinfo Option, FSinfo Command Line Options, FSinfo Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @code{-a} @var{autodir}
+
+Specifies the directory name in which to place the automounter's
+mountpoints.  This defaults to @file{/a}.  Some sites have the autodir set
+to be @file{/amd}, and this would be achieved by:
+
+@example
+fsinfo -a /amd ...
+@end example
+
+@node -b FSinfo Option, -d FSinfo Option, -a FSinfo Option, FSinfo Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @code{-b} @var{bootparams}
+@cindex bootparams, FSinfo prefix
+
+This specifies the prefix for the @file{bootparams} filename.  If it is
+not given, then the file will not be generated.  The @file{bootparams}
+file will be constructed for the destination machine and will be placed
+into a file named @file{bootparams} and prefixed by this string.  The
+file generated contains a list of entries describing each diskless
+client that can boot from the destination machine.
+
+As an example, to create a @file{bootparams} file in the directory
+@file{generic}, the following would be used:
+
+@example
+fsinfo -b generic/ ...
+@end example
+
+@node -d FSinfo Option, -e FSinfo Option, -b FSinfo Option, FSinfo Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @code{-d} @var{dumpsets}
+@cindex dumpset, FSinfo prefix
+
+This specifies the prefix for the @file{dumpsets} file.  If it is not
+specified, then the file will not be generated.  The file will be for
+the destination machine and will be placed into a filename
+@file{dumpsets}, prefixed by this string.  The @file{dumpsets} file is
+for use by Imperial College's local backup system.
+
+For example, to create a @file{dumpsets} file in the directory @file{generic},
+then you would use the following:
+
+@example
+fsinfo -d generic/ ...
+@end example
+
+@node -e FSinfo Option, -f FSinfo Option, -d FSinfo Option, FSinfo Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @code{-e} @var{exportfs}
+@cindex exports, FSinfo prefix
+
+Defines the prefix for the @file{exports} files.  If it is not given,
+then the file will not be generated.  For each machine defined in the
+configuration files as having disks, an @file{exports} file is
+constructed and given a filename determined by the name of the machine,
+prefixed with this string.  If a machine is defined as diskless, then no
+@file{exports} file will be created for it.  The files contain entries
+for directories on the machine that may be exported to clients.
+
+Example: To create the @file{exports} files for each diskfull machine
+and place them into the directory @file{exports}:
+
+@example
+fsinfo -e exports/ ...
+@end example
+
+@node -f FSinfo Option, -h FSinfo Option, -e FSinfo Option, FSinfo Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @code{-f} @var{fstab}
+@cindex fstab, FSinfo prefix
+
+This defines the prefix for the @file{fstab} files.  The files will only
+be created if this prefix is defined.  For each machine defined in the
+configuration files, a @file{fstab} file is created with the filename
+determined by prefixing this string with the name of the machine.  These
+files contain entries for filesystems and partitions to mount at boot
+time.
+
+Example, to create the files in the directory @file{fstabs}:
+
+@example
+fsinfo -f fstabs/ ...
+@end example
+
+@node -h FSinfo Option, -m FSinfo Option, -f FSinfo Option, FSinfo Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @code{-h} @var{hostname}
+@cindex hostname, FSinfo command line option
+
+Defines the hostname of the destination machine to process for.  If this
+is not specified, it defaults to the local machine name, as returned by
+@b{gethostname}(2).
+
+Example:
+
+@example
+fsinfo -h dylan.doc.ic.ac.uk ...
+@end example
+
+@node -m FSinfo Option, -q FSinfo Option, -h FSinfo Option, FSinfo Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @code{-m} @var{mount-maps}
+@cindex maps, FSinfo command line option
+
+Defines the prefix for the automounter files.  The maps will only be
+produced if this prefix is defined.  The mount maps suitable for the
+network defined by the configuration files will be placed into files
+with names calculated by prefixing this string to the name of each map.
+
+For example, to create the automounter maps and place them in the
+directory @file{automaps}:
+
+@example
+fsinfo -m automaps/ ...
+@end example
+
+@node -q FSinfo Option, -v FSinfo Option, -m FSinfo Option, FSinfo Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @code{-q}
+@cindex quiet, FSinfo command line option
+
+Selects quiet mode.  @i{FSinfo} suppress the ``running commentary'' and
+only outputs any error messages which are generated.
+
+@node -v FSinfo Option, -D-FSinfo Option, -q FSinfo Option, FSinfo Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @code{-v}
+@cindex verbose, FSinfo command line option
+
+Selects verbose mode.  When this is activated, the program will display
+more messages, and display all the information discovered when
+performing the semantic analysis phase.  Each verbose message is output
+to @file{stdout} on a line starting with a @samp{#} character.
+
+@node -D-FSinfo Option, -I FSinfo Option, -v FSinfo Option, FSinfo Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @code{-D} @var{name[=defn]}
+
+Defines a symbol @dfn{name} for the preprocessor when reading the
+configuration files.  Equivalent to @code{#define} directive.
+
+@node -I FSinfo Option, -U FSinfo Option, -D-FSinfo Option, FSinfo Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @code{-I} @var{directory}
+
+This option is passed into the preprocessor for the configuration files.
+It specifies directories in which to find include files
+
+@node -U FSinfo Option, , -I FSinfo Option, FSinfo Command Line Options
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection @code{-U} @var{name}
+
+Removes any initial definition of the symbol @dfn{name}.  Inverse of the
+@code{-D} option.
+
+@node FSinfo errors, , FSinfo Command Line Options, FSinfo
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Errors produced by @i{FSinfo}
+@cindex FSinfo error messages
+
+The following table documents the errors and warnings which @i{FSinfo} may produce.
+
+@table @t
+
+@item " expected
+Occurs if an unescaped newline is found in a quoted string.
+
+@item ambiguous mount: @var{volume} is a replicated filesystem
+If several filesystems are declared as having the same volume name, they
+will be considered replicated filesystems.  To mount a replicated
+filesystem statically, a specific host will need to be named, to say
+which particular copy to try and mount, else this error will
+result.
+
+@item can't open @var{filename} for writing
+Occurs if any errors are encountered when opening an output file.
+
+@item cannot determine localname since volname @var{volume} is not uniquely defined
+If a volume is replicated and an attempt is made to mount the filesystem
+statically without specifying a local mountpoint, @i{FSinfo} cannot
+calculate a mountpoint, as the desired pathname would be
+ambiguous.
+
+@item @var{device} has duplicate exportfs data
+Produced if the @samp{exportfs} option is used multiple times within the
+same branch of a filesystem definition. For example, if you attempt to
+set the @samp{exportfs} data at different levels of the mountpoint
+directory tree.
+
+@item dump frequency for @var{host}:@var{device} is non-zero
+Occurs if @var{device} has its @samp{fstype} declared to be @samp{swap}
+or @samp{export} and the @samp{dump} option is set to a value greater
+than zero.  Swap devices should not be dumped.
+
+@item duplicate host @var{hostname}!
+If a host has more than one definition.
+
+@item end of file within comment
+A comment was unterminated before the end of one of the configuration
+files.
+
+@item @var{filename}: cannot open for reading
+If a file specified on the command line as containing configuration data
+could not be opened.
+
+@item @var{filesystem} has a volname but no exportfs data
+Occurs when a volume name is declared for a file system, but the string
+specifying what machines the filesystem can be exported to is
+missing.
+
+@item fs field "@var{field-name}" already set
+Occurs when multiple definitions are given for one of the attributes of a
+host's filesystem.
+
+@item host field "@var{field-name}" already set
+If duplicate definitions are given for any of the fields with a host
+definition.
+
+@item @var{host}:@var{device} has more than one mount point
+Occurs if the mount option for a host's filesystem specifies multiple
+trees at which to place the mountpoint.
+
+@item @var{host}:@var{device} has no mount point
+Occurs if the @samp{mount} option is not specified for a host's
+filesystem.
+
+@item @var{host}:@var{device} needs field "@var{field-name}"
+Occurs when a filesystem is missing a required field. @var{field-name} could
+be one of @samp{fstype}, @samp{opts}, @samp{passno} or
+@samp{mount}.
+
+@item @var{host}:mount field specified for swap partition
+Occurs if a mountpoint is given for a filesystem whose type is declared
+to be @samp{swap}.
+
+@item malformed IP dotted quad: @var{address}
+If the Internet address of an interface is incorrectly specified.  An
+Internet address definition is handled to @b{inet_addr}(3N) to see if it
+can cope.  If not, then this message will be displayed.
+
+@item malformed netmask: @var{netmask}
+If the netmask cannot be decoded as though it were a hexadecimal number,
+then this message will be displayed.  It will typically be caused by
+incorrect characters in the @var{netmask} value.
+
+@item mount field "@var{field-name}" already set
+Occurs when a static mount has multiple definitions of the same field.
+
+@item mount tree field "@var{field-name}" already set
+Occurs when the @var{field-name} is defined more than once during the
+definition of a filesystems mountpoint.
+
+@item netif field @var{field-name} already set
+Occurs if you attempt to define an attribute of an interface more than
+once.
+
+@item network booting requires both root and swap areas
+Occurs if a machine has mount declarations for either the root partition
+or the swap area, but not both.  You cannot define a machine to only
+partially boot via the network.
+
+@item no disk mounts on @var{hostname}
+If there are no static mounts, nor local disk mounts specified for a
+machine, this message will be displayed.
+
+@item no volname given for @var{host}:@var{device}
+Occurs when a filesystem is defined to be mounted on @file{default}, but
+no volume name is given for the file system, then the mountpoint cannot
+be determined.
+
+@item not allowed '/' in a directory name
+Occurs when a pathname with multiple directory elements is specified as
+the name for an automounter tree.  A tree should only have one name at
+each level.
+
+@item pass number for @var{host}:@var{device} is non-zero
+Occurs if @var{device} has its @samp{fstype} declared to be @samp{swap}
+or @samp{export} and the @b{fsck}(8) pass number is set. Swap devices should not be
+fsck'd.  @xref{FSinfo filesystems fstype}.
+
+@item sub-directory @var{directory} of @var{directory-tree} starts with '/'
+Within the filesystem specification for a host, if an element
+@var{directory} of the mountpoint begins with a @samp{/} and it is not
+the start of the tree.
+
+@item sub-directory of @var{directory-tree} is named "default"
+@samp{default} is a keyword used to specify if a mountpoint should be
+automatically calculated by @i{FSinfo}.  If you attempt to specify a
+directory name as this, it will use the filename of @file{default} but
+will produce this warning.
+
+@item unknown \ sequence
+Occurs if an unknown escape sequence is found inside a string.  Within a
+string, you can give the standard C escape sequences for strings, such
+as newlines and tab characters.
+
+@item unknown directory attribute
+If an unknown keyword is found while reading the definition of a host's
+filesystem mount option.
+
+@item unknown filesystem attribute
+Occurs if an unrecognized keyword is used when defining a host's
+filesystems.
+
+@item unknown host attribute
+Occurs if an unrecognized keyword is used when defining a host.
+
+@item unknown mount attribute
+Occurs if an unrecognized keyword is found while parsing the list of
+static mounts.
+
+@item unknown volname @var{volume} automounted @i{[} on @i{name} @i{]}
+Occurs if @var{volume} is used in a definition of an automount map but the volume
+name has not been declared during the host filesystem definitions.
+
+@item volname @var{volume} is unknown
+Occurs if an attempt is made to mount or reference a volume name which
+has not been declared during the host filesystem definitions.
+
+@item volname @var{volume} not exported from @var{machine}
+Occurs if you attempt to mount the volume @var{volume} from a machine
+which has not declared itself to have such a filesystem
+available.
+
+@end table
+
+@c ################################################################
+@node Hlfsd, Assorted Tools, FSinfo, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter Hlfsd
+@pindex Hlfsd
+@cindex Home-Link Filesystem
+
+@i{Hlfsd} is a daemon which implements a filesystem containing a
+symbolic link to subdirectory within a user's home directory, depending
+on the user which accessed that link.  It was primarily designed to
+redirect incoming mail to users' home directories, so that it can be read
+from anywhere.  It was designed and implemented by
+@email{ezk@@cs.columbia.edu,Erez Zadok} and
+@email{dupuy@@cs.columbia.edu,Alexander Dupuy}, at the
+@uref{http://www.cs.columbia.edu/,Computer Science Department} of
+@uref{http://www.columbia.edu/,Columbia University}.  A
+@uref{http://www.cs.columbia.edu/~ezk/research/hlfsd/hlfsd.html,paper}
+on @i{Hlfsd} was presented at the Usenix LISA VII conference in 1993.
+
+@i{Hlfsd} operates by mounting itself as an NFS server for the directory
+containing @i{linkname}, which defaults to @file{/hlfs/home}.  Lookups
+within that directory are handled by @i{Hlfsd}, which uses the
+password map to determine how to resolve the lookup.  The directory will
+be created if it doesn't already exist.  The symbolic link will be to
+the accessing user's home directory, with @i{subdir} appended to it.  If
+not specified, @i{subdir} defaults to @file{.hlfsdir}.  This directory
+will also be created if it does not already exist.
+
+A @samp{SIGTERM} sent to @i{Hlfsd} will cause it to shutdown.  A @samp{SIGHUP} will
+flush the internal caches, and reload the password map.  It will also
+close and reopen the log file, to enable the original log file to be
+removed or rotated.  A @samp{SIGUSR1} will cause it to dump its internal table
+of user IDs and home directories to the file @file{/tmp/hlfsddump}.
+
+@menu
+* Introduction to Hlfsd::
+* Background to Mail Delivery::        
+* Using Hlfsd::       
+@end menu
+
+@c ================================================================
+@node Introduction to Hlfsd, Background to Mail Delivery, Hlfsd, Hlfsd
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Introduction to Hlfsd
+@cindex Introduction to Hlfsd
+@cindex Hlfsd; introduction
+
+Electronic mail has become one of the major applications for many
+computer networks, and use of this service is expected to increase over
+time, as networks proliferate and become faster.  Providing a convenient
+environment for users to read, compose, and send electronic mail has
+become a requirement for systems administrators (SAs).
+
+Widely used methods for handling mail usually require users to be logged
+into a designated ``home'' machine, where their mailbox files reside.
+Only on that one machine can they read newly arrived mail.  Since users
+have to be logged into that system to read their mail, they often find
+it convenient to run all of their other processes on that system as
+well, including memory and CPU-intensive jobs.  For example, in our
+department, we have allocated and configured several multi-processor
+servers to handle such demanding CPU/memory applications, but these were
+underutilized, in large part due to the inconvenience of not being able
+to read mail on those machines.  (No home directories were located on
+these designated CPU-servers, since we did not want NFS service for
+users' home directories to have to compete with CPU-intensive jobs.  At the
+same time, we discouraged users from running demanding applications on
+their home machines.)
+
+Many different solutions have been proposed to allow users to read their
+mail on any host.  However, all of these solutions fail in one or more
+of several ways:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item
+they introduce new single points of failure
+
+@item
+they require using different mail transfer agents (MTAs) or user agents
+(UAs)
+
+@item
+they do not solve the problem for all cases, i.e.  the solution is only
+partially successful for a particular environment.
+
+@end itemize
+
+We have designed a simple filesystem, called the @dfn{Home-Link File
+System}, to provide the ability to deliver mail to users' home
+directories, without modification to mail-related applications. We have
+endeavored to make it as stable as possible.  Of great importance to us
+was to make sure the HLFS daemon, @file{hlfsd} , would not hang under
+any circumstances, and would take the next-best action when faced with
+problems.  Compared to alternative methods, @i{Hlfsd} is a stable, more
+general solution, and easier to install/use.  In fact, in some ways, we
+have even managed to improve the reliability and security of mail
+service.
+
+Our server implements a small filesystem containing a symbolic link
+to a subdirectory of the invoking user's home directory, and named symbolic
+links to users' mailbox files.
+
+The @i{Hlfsd} server finds out the @var{uid} of the process that is
+accessing its mount point, and resolves the pathname component @samp{home} as a
+symbolic link to a subdirectory within the home directory given by the
+@var{uid}'s entry in the password file.  If the @var{gid} of the process
+that attempts to access a mailbox file is a special one (called
+HLFS_GID), then the server maps the name of the @emph{next} pathname
+component directly to the user's mailbox.  This is necessary so that
+access to a mailbox file by users other than the owner can succeed.  The
+server has safety features in case of failures such as hung filesystems
+or home directory filesystems that are inaccessible or full.
+
+On most of our machines, mail gets delivered to the directory
+@file{/var/spool/mail}. Many programs, including UAs, depend on that
+path.  @i{Hlfsd} creates a directory @file{/mail}, and mounts itself on
+top of that directory.  @i{Hlfsd} implements the path name component
+called @samp{home}, pointing to a subdirectory of the user's home directory.
+We have made @file{/var/spool/mail} a symbolic link to
+@file{/mail/home}, so that accessing @file{/var/spool/mail} actually
+causes access to a subdirectory within a user's home directory.
+
+The following table shows an example of how resolving the pathname
+@file{/var/mail/@i{NAME}} to @file{/users/ezk/.mailspool/@i{NAME}} proceeds.
+
+@multitable {Resolving Component} {Pathname left to resolve} {Value if symbolic link}
+
+@item @b{Resolving Component}
+@tab @b{Pathname left to resolve}
+@tab @b{Value if symbolic link}
+
+@item @t{/}
+@tab @t{var/mail/}@i{NAME}
+
+@item @t{var/}
+@tab @t{mail/}@i{NAME}
+
+@item @t{mail}@@
+@tab @t{/mail/home/}@i{NAME}
+@tab @t{mail}@@ -> @t{/mail/home}
+
+@item @t{/}
+@tab @t{mail/home/}@i{NAME}
+
+@item @t{mail/}
+@tab @t{home/}@i{NAME}
+
+@item @t{home}@@
+@tab @i{NAME}
+@tab @t{home}@@ -> @t{/users/ezk/.mailspool}
+
+@item @t{/}
+@tab @t{users/ezk/.mailspool/}@i{NAME}
+
+@item @t{users/}
+@tab @t{ezk/.mailspool/}@i{NAME}
+
+@item @t{ezk/}
+@tab @t{.mailspool/}@i{NAME}
+
+@item @t{.mailspool/}
+@tab @i{NAME}
+
+@item @i{NAME}
+
+@end multitable
+
+@c ================================================================
+@node Background to Mail Delivery, Using Hlfsd, Introduction to Hlfsd, Hlfsd
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Background to Mail Delivery
+@cindex Background to Mail Delivery
+@cindex Hlfsd; background
+
+This section provides an in-depth discussion of why available methods
+for delivering mail to home directories are not as good as the one used
+by @i{Hlfsd}.
+
+@menu
+* Single-Host Mail Spool Directory::
+* Centralized Mail Spool Directory::
+* Distributed Mail Spool Service::
+* Why Deliver Into the Home Directory?::
+@end menu
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Single-Host Mail Spool Directory, Centralized Mail Spool Directory, Background to Mail Delivery, Background to Mail Delivery
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Single-Host Mail Spool Directory
+@cindex Single-Host Mail Spool Directory
+
+The most common method for mail delivery is for mail to be appended to a
+mailbox file in a standard spool directory on the designated ``mail
+home'' machine of the user. The greatest advantage of this method is
+that it is the default method most vendors provide with their systems,
+thus very little (if any) configuration is required on the SA's part.
+All they need to set up are mail aliases directing mail to the host on
+which the user's mailbox file is assigned.  (Otherwise, mail is
+delivered locally, and users find mailboxes on many machines.)
+
+As users become more sophisticated, and aided by windowing systems, they
+find themselves logging in on multiple hosts at once, performing several
+tasks concurrently.  They ask to be able to read their mail on any host
+on the network, not just the one designated as their ``mail home''.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Centralized Mail Spool Directory, Distributed Mail Spool Service, Single-Host Mail Spool Directory, Background to Mail Delivery
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Centralized Mail Spool Directory
+@cindex Centralized Mail Spool Directory
+
+A popular method for providing mail readability from any host is to have
+all mail delivered to a mail spool directory on a designated
+``mail-server'' which is exported via NFS to all of the hosts on the
+network.  Configuring such a system is relatively easy.  On most
+systems, the bulk of the work is a one-time addition to one or two
+configuration files in @file{/etc}.  The file-server's spool directory
+is then hard-mounted across every machine on the local network.  In
+small environments with only a handful of hosts this can be an
+acceptable solution.  In our department, with a couple of hundred active
+hosts and thousands of mail messages processed daily, this was deemed
+completely unacceptable, as it introduced several types of problems:
+
+@table @b
+
+@item Scalability and Performance
+
+As more and more machines get added to the network, more mail traffic
+has to go over NFS to and from the mail-server. Users like to run
+mail-watchers, and read their mail often. The stress on the shared
+infrastructure increases with every user and host added; loads on the
+mail server would most certainly be high since all mail delivery goes
+through that one machine.@footnote{ Delivery via NFS-mounted filesystems
+may require usage of @samp{rpc.lockd} and @samp{rpc.statd} to provide
+distributed file-locking, both of which are widely regarded as unstable
+and unreliable.  Furthermore, this will degrade performance, as local
+processes as well as remote @samp{nfsd} processes are kept busy.}  This
+leads to lower reliability and performance.  To reduce the number of
+concurrent connections between clients and the server host, some SAs
+have resorted to automounting the mail-spool directory.  But this
+solution only makes things worse: since users often run mail watchers,
+and many popular applications such as @samp{trn}, @samp{emacs},
+@samp{csh} or @samp{ksh} check periodically for new mail, the
+automounted directory would be effectively permanently mounted.  If it
+gets unmounted automatically by the automounter program, it is most
+likely to get mounted shortly afterwards, consuming more I/O resources
+by the constant cycle of mount and umount calls.
+
+@item Reliability
+
+The mail-server host and its network connectivity must be very reliable.
+Worse, since the spool directory has to be hard-mounted,@footnote{No SA
+in their right minds would soft-mount read/write partitions --- the
+chances for data loss are too great.} many processes which access the
+spool directory (various shells, @samp{login}, @samp{emacs}, etc.)
+would be hung as long as connectivity to the mail-server is severed. To
+improve reliability, SAs may choose to backup the mail-server's spool
+partition several times a day.  This may make things worse since reading
+or delivering mail while backups are in progress may cause backups to be
+inconsistent; more backups consume more backup-media resources, and
+increase the load on the mail-server host.
+
+@end table
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Distributed Mail Spool Service, Why Deliver Into the Home Directory?, Centralized Mail Spool Directory, Background to Mail Delivery
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Distributed Mail Spool Service
+@cindex Distributed Mail Spool Service
+
+Despite the existence of a few systems that support delivery to users'
+home directories, mail delivery to home directories hasn't caught on.
+We believe the main reason is that there are too many programs that
+``know'' where mailbox files reside.  Besides the obvious (the delivery
+program @file{/bin/mail} and mail readers like @file{/usr/ucb/Mail},
+@samp{mush}, @samp{mm}, etc.), other programs that know mailbox location
+are login, from, almost every shell, @samp{xbiff}, @samp{xmailbox}, and
+even some programs not directly related to mail, such as @samp{emacs}
+and @samp{trn}.  Although some of these programs can be configured to
+look in different directories with the use of environment variables and
+other resources, many of them cannot.  The overall porting work is
+significant.
+
+Other methods that have yet to catch on require the use of a special
+mail-reading server, such as IMAP or POP.  The main disadvantage of
+these systems is that UAs need to be modified to use these services ---
+a long and involved task.  That is why they are not popular at this
+time.
+
+Several other ideas have been proposed and even used in various
+environments.  None of them is robust.  They are mostly very
+specialized, inflexible, and do not extend to the general case.  Some of
+the ideas are plain bad, potentially leading to lost or corrupt mail:
+
+@table @b
+
+@item automounters
+
+Using an automounter such as @i{Amd} to provide a set of symbolic links
+from the normal spool directory to user home directories is not
+sufficient.  UAs rename, unlink, and recreate the mailbox as a regular
+file, therefore it must be a real file, not a symbolic link.
+Furthermore, it must reside in a real directory which is writable by the
+UAs and MTAs.  This method may also require populating
+@file{/var/spool/mail} with symbolic links and making sure they are
+updated.  Making @i{Amd} manage that directory directly fails, since
+many various lock files need to be managed as well.  Also, @i{Amd} does
+not provide all of the NFS operations which are required to write mail
+such as write, create, remove, and unlink.
+
+@item @code{$MAIL}
+
+Setting this variable to an automounted directory pointing to the user's
+mail spool host only solves the problem for those programs which know
+and use @code{$MAIL}.  Many programs don't, therefore this solution is partial
+and of limited flexibility.  Also, it requires the SAs or the users to
+set it themselves --- an added level of inconvenience and possible
+failures.
+
+@item @t{/bin/mail}
+
+Using a different mail delivery agent could be the solution.  One such
+example is @samp{hdmail}.  However, @samp{hdmail} still requires
+modifying all UAs, the MTA's configuration, installing new daemons, and
+changing login scripts.  This makes the system less upgradable or
+compatible with others, and adds one more complicated system for SAs to
+deal with.  It is not a complete solution because it still requires each
+user have their @code{$MAIL} variable setup correctly, and that every program
+use this variable.
+
+@end table
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Why Deliver Into the Home Directory?, , Distributed Mail Spool Service, Background to Mail Delivery
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Why Deliver Into the Home Directory?
+@cindex Why Deliver Into the Home Directory?
+@cindex Hlfsd; Why Deliver Into the Home Directory?
+
+There are several major reasons why SAs might want to deliver mail
+directly into the users' home directories:
+
+@table @b
+
+@item Location
+
+Many mail readers need to move mail from the spool directory to the
+user's home directory.  It speeds up this operation if the two are on
+the same filesystem.  If for some reason the user's home directory is
+inaccessible, it isn't that useful to be able to read mail, since there
+is no place to move it to.  In some cases, trying to move mail to a
+non-existent or hung filesystem may result in mail loss.
+
+@item Distribution
+
+Having all mail spool directories spread among the many more filesystems
+minimizes the chances that complete environments will grind to a halt
+when a single server is down.  It does increase the chance that there
+will be someone who is not able to read their mail when a machine is
+down, but that is usually preferred to having no one be able to read
+their mail because a centralized mail server is down.  The problem of
+losing some mail due to the (presumably) higher chances that a user's
+machine is down is minimized in HLFS.
+
+@item Security
+
+Delivering mail to users' home directories has another advantage ---
+enhanced security and privacy.  Since a shared system mail spool
+directory has to be world-readable and searchable, any user can see
+whether other users have mail, when they last received new mail, or when
+they last read their mail.  Programs such as @samp{finger} display this
+information, which some consider an infringement of privacy.  While it
+is possible to disable this feature of @samp{finger} so that remote
+users cannot see a mailbox file's status, this doesn't prevent local
+users from getting the information.  Furthermore, there are more
+programs which make use of this information.  In shared environments,
+disabling such programs has to be done on a system-wide basis, but with
+mail delivered to users' home directories, users less concerned with
+privacy who do want to let others know when they last received or read
+mail can easily do so using file protection bits.
+
+@c Lastly, on systems that do not export their NFS filesystem with
+@c @t{anon=0}, superusers are less likely to snoop around others' mail, as
+@c they become ``nobodies'' across NFS.
+
+@end table
+
+In summary, delivering mail to home directories provides users the
+functionality sought, and also avoids most of the problems just
+discussed.
+
+@c ================================================================
+@node Using Hlfsd, , Background to Mail Delivery, Hlfsd
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Using Hlfsd
+@cindex Using Hlfsd
+@cindex Hlfsd; using
+
+@menu
+* Controlling Hlfsd:: 
+* Hlfsd Options::     
+* Hlfsd Files::       
+@end menu
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Controlling Hlfsd, Hlfsd Options, Using Hlfsd, Using Hlfsd
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Controlling Hlfsd
+@cindex Controlling Hlfsd
+@cindex Hlfsd; controlling
+@pindex ctl-hlfsd
+
+Much the same way @i{Amd} is controlled by @file{ctl-amd}, so does
+@i{Hlfsd} get controlled by the @file{ctl-hlfsd} script:
+
+@table @t
+
+@item ctl-hlfsd start
+Start a new @i{Hlfsd}.
+
+@item ctl-hlfsd stop
+Stop a running @i{Hlfsd}.
+
+@item ctl-hlfsd restart
+Stop a running @i{Hlfsd}, wait for 10 seconds, and then start a new
+one.  It is hoped that within 10 seconds, the previously running
+@i{Hlfsd} terminate properly; otherwise, starting a second one could
+cause system lockup.
+
+@end table
+
+For example, on our systems, we start @i{Hlfsd} within @file{ctl-hlfsd}
+as follows on Solaris 2 systems:
+
+@example
+hlfsd -a /var/alt_mail -x all -l /var/log/hlfsd /mail/home .mailspool
+@end example
+
+The directory @file{/var/alt_mail} is a directory in the root partition
+where alternate mail will be delivered into, when it cannot be delivered
+into the user's home directory.
+
+Normal mail gets delivered into @file{/var/mail}, but on our systems,
+that is a symbolic link to @file{/mail/home}.  @file{/mail} is managed
+by @i{Hlfsd}, which creates a dynamic symlink named @samp{home},
+pointing to the subdirectory @file{.mailspool} @emph{within} the
+accessing user's home directory.  This results in mail which normally
+should go to @file{/var/mail/@code{$USER}}, to go to
+@file{@code{$HOME}/.mailspool/@code{$USER}}.
+
+@i{Hlfsd} does not create the @file{/var/mail} symlink.  This needs to
+be created (manually) once on each host, by the system administrators,
+as follows:
+
+@example
+mv /var/mail /var/alt_mail
+ln -s /mail/home /var/mail
+@end example
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Hlfsd Options, Hlfsd Files, Controlling Hlfsd, Using Hlfsd
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Hlfsd Options
+@cindex Hlfsd Options
+@cindex Hlfsd; Options
+
+@table @t
+
+@item -a @var{alt_dir}
+Alternate directory.  The name of the directory to which the symbolic
+link returned by @i{Hlfsd} will point, if it cannot access the home
+directory of the user.  This defaults to @file{/var/hlfs}.  This
+directory will be created if it doesn't exist.  It is expected that
+either users will read these files, or the system administrators will
+run a script to resend this ``lost mail'' to its owner.
+
+@item -c @var{cache-interval}
+Caching interval.  @i{Hlfsd} will cache the validity of home directories
+for this interval, in seconds.  Entries which have been verified within
+the last @var{cache-interval} seconds will not be verified again, since
+the operation could be expensive, and the entries are most likely still
+valid.  After the interval has expired, @i{Hlfsd} will re-verify the
+validity of the user's home directory, and reset the cache time-counter.
+The default value for @var{cache-interval} is 300 seconds (5 minutes).
+
+@item -f
+Force fast startup.  This option tells @i{Hlfsd} to skip startup-time
+consistency checks such as existence of mount directory, alternate spool
+directory, symlink to be hidden under the mount directory, their
+permissions and validity.
+
+@item -g @var{group}
+Set the special group HLFS_GID to @var{group}.  Programs such as
+@file{/usr/ucb/from} or @file{/usr/sbin/in.comsat}, which access the
+mailboxes of other users, must be setgid @samp{HLFS_GID} to work properly.  The
+default group is @samp{hlfs}.  If no group is provided, and there is no
+group @samp{hlfs}, this feature is disabled.
+
+@item -h
+Help.  Print a brief help message, and exit.
+
+@item -i @var{reload-interval}
+Map-reloading interval.  Each @var{reload-interval} seconds, @i{Hlfsd}
+will reload the password map.  @i{Hlfsd} needs the password map for the
+UIDs and home directory pathnames.  @i{Hlfsd} schedules a @samp{SIGALRM} to
+reload the password maps.  A @samp{SIGHUP} sent to @i{Hlfsd} will force it to
+reload the maps immediately.  The default value for
+@var{reload-interval} is 900 seconds (15 minutes.)
+
+@item -l @var{logfile}
+Specify a log file to which @i{Hlfsd} will record events.  If
+@var{logfile} is the string @samp{syslog} then the log messages will be
+sent to the system log daemon by @b{syslog}(3), using the @samp{LOG_DAEMON}
+facility.  This is also the default.
+
+@item -n
+No verify.  @i{Hlfsd} will not verify the validity of the symbolic link
+it will be returning, or that the user's home directory contains
+sufficient disk-space for spooling.  This can speed up @i{Hlfsd} at the
+cost of possibly returning symbolic links to home directories which are
+not currently accessible or are full.  By default, @i{Hlfsd} validates
+the symbolic-link in the background.  The @code{-n} option overrides the
+meaning of the @code{-c} option, since no caching is necessary.
+
+@item -o @var{mount-options}
+Mount options which @i{Hlfsd} will use to mount itself on top of
+@var{dirname}.  By default, @var{mount-options} is set to @samp{ro}.  If
+the system supports symbolic-link caching, default options are set
+to @samp{ro,nocache}.
+
+@item -p
+Print PID.  Outputs the process-id of @i{Hlfsd} to standard output where
+it can be saved into a file.
+
+@item -v
+Version.  Displays version information to standard error.
+
+@item -x @var{log-options}
+Specify run-time logging options.  The options are a comma separated
+list chosen from: @samp{fatal}, @samp{error}, @samp{user}, @samp{warn}, @samp{info}, @samp{map}, @samp{stats}, @samp{all}.
+
+@item -C
+Force @i{Hlfsd} to run on systems that cannot turn off the NFS
+attribute-cache.  Use of this option on those systems is discouraged, as
+it may result in loss or misdelivery of mail.  The option is ignored on
+systems that can turn off the attribute-cache.
+
+@item -D @var{log-options}
+Select from a variety of debugging options.  Prefixing an option with
+the string @samp{no} reverses the effect of that option.  Options are
+cumulative.  The most useful option is @samp{all}.  Since this option is
+only used for debugging other options are not documented here.  A fuller
+description is available in the program source.  A @samp{SIGUSR1} sent
+to @i{Hlfsd} will cause it to dump its internal password map to the file
+@file{/usr/tmp/hlfsd.dump.XXXXXX}, where @samp{XXXXXX} will be replaced
+by a random string generated by @b{mktemp}(3) or (the more secure)
+@b{mkstemp}(3).
+
+@item -P @var{password-file}
+Read the user-name, user-id, and home directory information from the
+file @var{password-file}.  Normally, @i{Hlfsd} will use @b{getpwent}(3)
+to read the password database.  This option allows you to override the
+default database, and is useful if you want to map users' mail files to
+a directory other than their home directory.  Only the username, uid,
+and home-directory fields of the file @var{password-file} are read and
+checked.  All other fields are ignored.  The file @var{password-file}
+must otherwise be compliant with Unix Version 7 colon-delimited format
+@b{passwd}(4).
+
+@end table
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Hlfsd Files, , Hlfsd Options, Using Hlfsd
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Hlfsd Files
+@cindex Hlfsd Files
+@cindex Hlfsd; Files
+
+The following files are used by @i{Hlfsd}:
+
+@table @file
+
+@item /hlfs
+directory under which @i{Hlfsd} mounts itself and manages the symbolic
+link @file{home}.
+
+@item .hlfsdir
+default sub-directory in the user's home directory, to which the
+@file{home} symbolic link returned by @i{Hlfsd} points.
+
+@item /var/hlfs
+directory to which @file{home} symbolic link returned by @i{Hlfsd}
+points if it is unable to verify the that user's home directory is
+accessible.
+
+@end table
+
+For discussion on other files used by @i{Hlfsd}, see @ref{lostaltmail} and
+@ref{lostaltmail.conf-sample}.
+
+@c ################################################################
+@node Assorted Tools, Examples, Hlfsd, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter Assorted Tools
+@cindex  Assorted Tools
+
+The following are additional utilities and scripts included with
+am-utils, and get installed.
+
+@menu
+* am-eject::          
+* amd.conf-sample::   
+* amd2ldif::          
+* amd2sun::           
+* ctl-amd::           
+* ctl-hlfsd::         
+* expn::              
+* fix-amd-map::       
+* fixmount::          
+* fixrmtab::          
+* lostaltmail::       
+* lostaltmail.conf-sample::
+* mk-amd-map::        
+* pawd::              
+* wait4amd::          
+* wait4amd2die::      
+* wire-test::         
+@end menu
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node am-eject, amd.conf-sample, Assorted Tools, Assorted Tools
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section am-eject
+@pindex am-eject
+
+A shell script unmounts a floppy or CD-ROM that is automounted, and
+then attempts to eject the removable device.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node amd.conf-sample, amd2ldif, am-eject, Assorted Tools
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section amd.conf-sample
+@pindex amd.conf-sample
+
+A sample @i{Amd} configuration file. @xref{Amd Configuration File}. 
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node amd2ldif, amd2sun, amd.conf-sample, Assorted Tools
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section amd2ldif
+@pindex amd2ldif
+
+A script to convert @i{Amd} maps to LDAP input files.  Use it as follows:
+
+@example
+amd2ldif @i{mapname} @i{base} < @i{amd.mapfile} > @i{mapfile.ldif}
+@end example
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node amd2sun, ctl-amd, amd2ldif, Assorted Tools
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section amd2sun
+@pindex amd2sun
+
+A script to convert @i{Amd} maps to Sun Automounter maps.  Use it as
+follows
+
+@example
+amd2sun < @i{amd.mapfile} > @i{auto_mapfile}
+@end example
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node ctl-amd, ctl-hlfsd, amd2sun, Assorted Tools
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section ctl-amd
+@pindex ctl-amd
+
+A script to start, stop, or restart @i{Amd}.  Use it as follows:
+
+@table @t
+@item ctl-amd start
+Start a new @i{Amd} process.
+@item ctl-amd stop
+Stop the running @i{Amd}.
+@item ctl-amd restart
+Stop the running @i{Amd} (if any), safely wait for it to terminate, and
+then start a new process --- only if the previous one died cleanly.
+@end table
+
+@xref{Run-time Administration} for more details.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node ctl-hlfsd, expn, ctl-amd, Assorted Tools
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section ctl-hlfsd
+@pindex ctl-hlfsd
+
+A script for controlling @i{Hlfsd}, much the same way @file{ctl-amd}
+controls @i{Amd}.  Use it as follows:
+
+@table @t
+@item ctl-hlfsd start
+Start a new @i{Hlfsd} process.
+@item ctl-hlfsd stop
+Stop the running @i{Hlfsd}.
+@item ctl-hlfsd restart
+Stop the running @i{Hlfsd} (if any), wait for 10 seconds for it to
+terminate, and then start a new process --- only if the previous one
+died cleanly.
+@end table
+
+@xref{Hlfsd} for more details.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node expn, fix-amd-map, ctl-hlfsd, Assorted Tools
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section expn
+@pindex expn
+
+A script to expand email addresses into their full name.  It is
+generally useful when using with the @file{lostaltmail} script, but is a
+useful tools otherwise.
+
+@example
+$ expn -v ezk@@cs.columbia.edu
+ezk@@cs.columbia.edu ->
+        ezk@@shekel.mcl.cs.columbia.edu
+ezk@@shekel.mcl.cs.columbia.edu ->
+        Erez Zadok <"| /usr/local/mh/lib/slocal -user ezk || exit 75>
+        Erez Zadok <\ezk>
+        Erez Zadok </u/zing/ezk/.mailspool/backup>
+@end example
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node fix-amd-map, fixmount, expn, Assorted Tools
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section fix-amd-map
+@pindex fix-amd-map
+
+Am-utils changed some of the syntax and default values of some
+variables.  For example, the default value for @samp{$@{os@}} for
+Solaris 2.x (aka SunOS 5.x) systems used to be @samp{sos5}, it is now
+more automatically generated from @file{config.guess} and its value is
+@samp{sunos5}.
+
+This script converts older @i{Amd} maps to new ones.  Use it as follows:
+
+@example
+fix-amd-map < @i{old.map} > @i{new.map}
+@end example
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node fixmount, fixrmtab, fix-amd-map, Assorted Tools
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section fixmount
+@pindex fixmount
+
+@samp{fixmount} is a variant of @b{showmount}(8) that can delete bogus
+mount entries in remote @b{mountd}(8) daemons.  This is useful to
+cleanup otherwise ever-accumulating ``junk''.  Use it for example:
+
+@example
+fixmount -r @i{host}
+@end example
+
+See the online manual page for @samp{fixmount} for more details of its
+usage.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node fixrmtab, lostaltmail, fixmount, Assorted Tools
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section fixrmtab
+@pindex fixrmtab
+
+A script to invalidate @file{/etc/rmtab} entries for hosts named.  Also
+restart mountd for changes to take effect.  Use it for example:
+
+@example
+fixrmtab @i{host1} @i{host2} @i{...}
+@end example
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node lostaltmail, lostaltmail.conf-sample, fixrmtab, Assorted Tools
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section lostaltmail
+@pindex lostaltmail
+
+A script used with @i{Hlfsd} to resend any ``lost'' mail.  @i{Hlfsd}
+redirects mail which cannot be written into the user's home directory to
+an alternate directory.  This is useful to continue delivering mail,
+even if the user's file system was unavailable, full, or over quota.
+But, the mail which gets delivered to  the alternate directory needs to
+be resent to its respective users.  This is what the @samp{lostaltmail}
+script does. 
+
+Use it as follows:
+
+@example
+lostaltmail
+@end example
+
+This script needs a configuration file @samp{lostaltmail.conf} set up
+with the right parameters to properly work.  @xref{Hlfsd} for more
+details.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node lostaltmail.conf-sample, mk-amd-map, lostaltmail, Assorted Tools
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section lostaltmail.conf-sample
+@pindex lostaltmail.conf-sample
+@cindex lostaltmail; configuration file
+
+This is a text file with configuration parameters needed for the
+@samp{lostaltmail} script.  The script includes comments explaining each
+of the configuration variables.  See it for more information.  Also
+@pxref{Hlfsd} for general information.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node mk-amd-map, pawd, lostaltmail.conf-sample, Assorted Tools
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section mk-amd-map
+@pindex mk-amd-map
+
+This program converts a normal @i{Amd} map file into an ndbm database
+with the same prefix as the named file.  Use it as follows:
+
+@example
+mk-amd-map @i{mapname}
+@end example
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node pawd, wait4amd, mk-amd-map, Assorted Tools
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section pawd
+@pindex pawd
+
+@i{Pawd} is used to print the current working directory, adjusted to
+reflect proper paths that can be reused to go through the automounter
+for the shortest possible path.  In particular, the path printed back
+does not include any of @i{Amd}'s local mount points.  Using them is
+unsafe, because @i{Amd} may unmount managed file systems from the mount
+points, and thus including them in paths may not always find the files
+within.
+
+Without any arguments, @i{Pawd} will print the automounter adjusted
+current working directory.  With any number of arguments, it will print
+the adjusted path of each one of the arguments.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node wait4amd, wait4amd2die, pawd, Assorted Tools
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section wait4amd
+@pindex wait4amd
+
+A script to wait for @i{Amd} to start on a particular host before
+performing an arbitrary command.  The command is executed repeatedly,
+with 1 second intervals in between.  You may interrupt the script using
+@samp{^C} (or whatever keyboard sequence your terminal's @samp{intr} function
+is bound to).
+
+Examples:
+
+@table @t
+@item wait4amd saturn amq -p -h saturn
+When @i{Amd} is up on host @samp{saturn}, get the process ID of that
+running @i{Amd}.
+@item wait4amd pluto rlogin pluto
+Remote login to host @samp{pluto} when @i{Amd} is up on that host.  It
+is generally necessary to wait for @i{Amd} to properly start and
+initialize on a remote host before logging in to it, because otherwise
+user home directories may not be accessible across the network.
+@item wait4amd pluto
+A short-hand version of the previous command, since the most useful
+reason for this script is to login to a remote host.  I use it very
+often when testing out new versions of @i{Amd}, and need to reboot hung
+hosts.
+@end table
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node wait4amd2die, wire-test, wait4amd, Assorted Tools
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section wait4amd2die
+@pindex wait4amd2die
+
+This script is used internally by @samp{ctl-amd} when used to restart
+@i{Amd}.  It waits for @i{Amd} to terminate.  If it detected that
+@i{Amd} terminated cleanly, this script will return an exist status of
+zero.  Otherwise, it will return a non-zero exit status.
+
+The script tests for @i{Amd}'s existence once every 5 seconds, six
+times, for a total of 30 seconds.  It will return a zero exist status as
+soon as it detects that @i{Amd} dies.
+
+@c ----------------------------------------------------------------
+@node wire-test, , wait4amd2die, Assorted Tools
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section wire-test
+@pindex wire-test
+
+A simple program to test if some of the most basic networking functions
+in am-util's library @file{libamu} work.  It also tests the combination
+of NFS protocol and version number that are supported from the current
+host, to a remote one.
+
+For example, in this test a machine which only supports NFS Version 2 is
+contacting a remote host that can support the same version, but using
+both UDP and TCP.  If no host name is specified, @samp{wire-test} will
+try @file{localhost}.
+
+@example
+$ wire-test moisil
+Network name is "mcl-lab-net.cs.columbia.edu"
+Network number is "128.59.13"
+Network name is "old-net.cs.columbia.edu"
+Network number is "128.59.16"
+My IP address is 0x7f000001.
+NFS Version and protocol tests to host "moisil"...
+        testing vers=2, proto="udp" -> found version 2.
+        testing vers=3, proto="udp" -> failed!
+        testing vers=2, proto="tcp" -> found version 2.
+        testing vers=3, proto="tcp" -> failed!
+@end example
+
+@c ################################################################
+@node Examples, Internals, Assorted Tools, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter Examples
+
+@menu
+* User Filesystems::
+* Home Directories::
+* Architecture Sharing::
+* Wildcard Names::
+* rwho servers::
+* /vol::
+* /defaults with selectors::
+* /tftpboot in a chroot-ed environment::
+
+@end menu
+
+@node User Filesystems, Home Directories, Examples, Examples
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section User Filesystems
+@cindex User filesystems
+@cindex Mounting user filesystems
+
+With more than one fileserver, the directories most frequently
+cross-mounted are those containing user home directories.  A common
+convention used at Imperial College is to mount the user disks under
+@t{/home/}@i{machine}.
+
+Typically, the @samp{/etc/fstab} file contained a long list of entries
+such as:
+
+@example
+@i{machine}:/home/@i{machine} /home/@i{machine} nfs ...
+@end example
+
+for each fileserver on the network.
+
+There are numerous problems with this system.  The mount list can become
+quite large and some of the machines may be down when a system is
+booted.  When a new fileserver is installed, @samp{/etc/fstab} must be
+updated on every machine, the mount directory created and the filesystem
+mounted.
+
+In many environments most people use the same few workstations, but
+it is convenient to go to a colleague's machine and access your own
+files.  When a server goes down, it can cause a process on a client
+machine to hang.  By minimizing the mounted filesystems to only include
+those actively being used, there is less chance that a filesystem will
+be mounted when a server goes down.
+
+The following is a short extract from a map taken from a research fileserver
+at Imperial College.
+
+Note the entry for @samp{localhost} which is used for users such as
+the operator (@samp{opr}) who have a home directory on most machine as
+@samp{/home/localhost/opr}.
+
+@example
+/defaults       opts:=rw,intr,grpid,nosuid
+charm           host!=$@{key@};type:=nfs;rhost:=$@{key@};rfs:=/home/$@{key@} \
+                host==$@{key@};type:=ufs;dev:=/dev/xd0g
+#
+...
+
+#
+localhost       type:=link;fs:=$@{host@}
+...
+#
+# dylan has two user disks so have a
+# top directory in which to mount them.
+#
+dylan           type:=auto;fs:=$@{map@};pref:=$@{key@}/
+#
+dylan/dk2       host!=dylan;type:=nfs;rhost:=dylan;rfs:=/home/$@{key@} \
+                host==dylan;type:=ufs;dev:=/dev/dsk/2s0
+#
+dylan/dk5       host!=dylan;type:=nfs;rhost:=dylan;rfs:=/home/$@{key@} \
+                host==dylan;type:=ufs;dev:=/dev/dsk/5s0
+...
+#
+toytown         host!=$@{key@};type:=nfs;rhost:=$@{key@};rfs:=/home/$@{key@} \
+                host==$@{key@};type:=ufs;dev:=/dev/xy1g
+...
+#
+zebedee         host!=$@{key@};type:=nfs;rhost:=$@{key@};rfs:=/home/$@{key@} \
+                host==$@{key@};type:=ufs;dev:=/dev/dsk/1s0
+#
+# Just for access...
+#
+gould           type:=auto;fs:=$@{map@};pref:=$@{key@}/
+gould/staff     host!=gould;type:=nfs;rhost:=gould;rfs:=/home/$@{key@}
+#
+gummo           host!=$@{key@};type:=nfs;rhost:=$@{key@};rfs:=/home/$@{key@}
+...
+@end example
+
+This map is shared by most of the machines listed so on those
+systems any of the user disks is accessible via a consistent name.
+@i{Amd} is started with the following command
+
+@example
+amd /home amd.home
+@end example
+
+Note that when mounting a remote filesystem, the @dfn{automounted}
+mount point is referenced, so that the filesystem will be mounted if
+it is not yet (at the time the remote @samp{mountd} obtains the file handle).
+
+@node Home Directories, Architecture Sharing, User Filesystems, Examples
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Home Directories
+@cindex Home directories
+@cindex Example of mounting home directories
+@cindex Mount home directories
+
+One convention for home directories is to locate them in @samp{/homes}
+so user @samp{jsp}'s home directory is @samp{/homes/jsp}.  With more
+than a single fileserver it is convenient to spread user files across
+several machines.  All that is required is a mount-map which converts
+login names to an automounted directory.
+
+Such a map might be started by the command:
+
+@example
+amd /homes amd.homes
+@end example
+
+where the map @samp{amd.homes} contained the entries:
+
+@example
+/defaults   type:=link   # All the entries are of type:=link
+jsp         fs:=/home/charm/jsp
+njw         fs:=/home/dylan/dk5/njw
+...
+phjk        fs:=/home/toytown/ai/phjk
+sjv         fs:=/home/ganymede/sjv
+@end example
+
+Whenever a login name is accessed in @samp{/homes} a symbolic link
+appears pointing to the real location of that user's home directory.  In
+this example, @samp{/homes/jsp} would appear to be a symbolic link
+pointing to @samp{/home/charm/jsp}.  Of course, @samp{/home} would also
+be an automount point.
+
+This system causes an extra level of symbolic links to be used.
+Although that turns out to be relatively inexpensive, an alternative is
+to directly mount the required filesystems in the @samp{/homes}
+map.  The required map is simple, but long, and its creation is best automated.
+The entry for @samp{jsp} could be:
+
+@example
+jsp   -sublink:=$@{key@};rfs:=/home/charm \
+               host==charm;type:=ufs;dev:=/dev/xd0g \
+               host!=charm;type:=nfs;rhost:=charm
+@end example
+
+This map can become quite big if it contains a large number of entries.
+By combining two other features of @i{Amd} it can be greatly simplified.
+
+First the UFS partitions should be mounted under the control of
+@samp{/etc/fstab}, taking care that they are mounted in the same place
+that @i{Amd} would have automounted them.  In most cases this would be
+something like @samp{/a/@dfn{host}/home/@dfn{host}} and
+@samp{/etc/fstab} on host @samp{charm} would have a line:@refill
+
+@example
+/dev/xy0g /a/charm/home/charm 4.2 rw,nosuid,grpid 1 5
+@end example
+
+The map can then be changed to:
+
+@example
+/defaults    type:=nfs;sublink:=$@{key@};opts:=rw,intr,nosuid,grpid
+jsp          rhost:=charm;rfs:=/home/charm
+njw          rhost:=dylan;rfs:=/home/dylan/dk5
+...
+phjk         rhost:=toytown;rfs:=/home/toytown;sublink:=ai/$@{key@}
+sjv          rhost:=ganymede;rfs:=/home/ganymede
+@end example
+
+This map operates as usual on a remote machine (@i{ie} @code{$@{host@}}
+not equal to @code{$@{rhost@}}).  On the machine where the filesystem is
+stored (@i{ie} @code{$@{host@}} equal to @code{$@{rhost@}}), @i{Amd}
+will construct a local filesystem mount point which corresponds to the
+name of the locally mounted UFS partition.  If @i{Amd} is started with
+the @code{-r} option then instead of attempting an NFS mount, @i{Amd} will
+simply inherit the UFS mount (@pxref{Inheritance Filesystem}).  If
+@code{-r} is not used then a loopback NFS mount will be made.  This type of
+mount is known to cause a deadlock on many systems.
+
+@node Architecture Sharing, Wildcard Names, Home Directories, Examples
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Architecture Sharing
+@cindex Architecture sharing
+@cindex Sharing a fileserver between architectures
+@cindex Architecture dependent volumes
+
+@c %At the moment some of the research machines have sets of software
+@c %mounted in @samp{/vol}.  This contains subdirectories for \TeX,
+@c %system sources, local sources, prolog libraries and so on.
+Often a filesystem will be shared by machines of different architectures.
+Separate trees can be maintained for the executable images for each
+architecture, but it may be more convenient to have a shared tree,
+with distinct subdirectories.
+
+A shared tree might have the following structure on the fileserver (called
+@samp{fserver} in the example):
+
+@example
+local/tex
+local/tex/fonts
+local/tex/lib
+local/tex/bin
+local/tex/bin/sun3
+local/tex/bin/sun4
+local/tex/bin/hp9000
+...
+@end example
+
+In this example, the subdirectories of @samp{local/tex/bin} should be
+hidden when accessed via the automount point (conventionally @samp{/vol}).
+A mount-map for @samp{/vol} to achieve this would look like:
+
+@example
+/defaults   sublink:=$@{/key@};rhost:=fserver;type:=link
+tex         type:=auto;fs:=$@{map@};pref:=$@{key@}/
+tex/fonts   host!=fserver;type:=nfs;rfs:=/vol/tex \
+            host==fserver;fs:=/usr/local/tex
+tex/lib     host!=fserver;type:=nfs;rfs:=/vol/tex \
+            host==fserver;fs:=/usr/local/tex
+tex/bin     -sublink:=$@{/key@}/$@{arch@} \
+            host!=fserver;type:=nfs;rfs:=/vol/tex \
+            host:=fserver;fs:=/usr/local/tex
+@end example
+
+When @samp{/vol/tex/bin} is referenced, the current machine architecture
+is automatically appended to the path by the @code{$@{sublink@}}
+variable.  This means that users can have @samp{/vol/tex/bin} in their
+@samp{PATH} without concern for architecture dependencies.
+
+@node Wildcard Names, rwho servers, Architecture Sharing, Examples
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Wildcard Names & Replicated Servers
+
+By using the wildcard facility, @i{Amd} can @dfn{overlay} an existing
+directory with additional entries.
+The system files are usually mounted under @samp{/usr}.  If instead,
+@i{Amd} is mounted on @samp{/usr}, additional
+names can be overlayed to augment or replace names in the ``master'' @samp{/usr}.
+A map to do this would have the form:
+
+@example
+local  type:=auto;fs:=local-map
+share  type:=auto;fs:=share-map
+*      -type:=nfs;rfs:=/export/exec/$@{arch@};sublink:="$@{key@}" \
+        rhost:=fserv1  rhost:=fserv2  rhost:=fserv3
+@end example
+
+Note that the assignment to @code{$@{sublink@}} is surrounded by double
+quotes to prevent the incoming key from causing the map to be
+misinterpreted.  This map has the effect of directing any access to
+@samp{/usr/local} or @samp{/usr/share} to another automount point.
+
+In this example, it is assumed that the @samp{/usr} files are replicated
+on three fileservers: @samp{fserv1}, @samp{fserv2} and @samp{fserv3}.
+For any references other than to @samp{local} and @samp{share} one of
+the servers is used and a symbolic link to
+@t{$@{autodir@}/$@{rhost@}/export/exec/$@{arch@}/@i{whatever}} is
+returned once an appropriate filesystem has been mounted.@refill
+
+@node rwho servers, /vol, Wildcard Names, Examples
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @samp{rwho} servers
+@cindex rwho servers
+@cindex Architecture specific mounts
+@cindex Example of architecture specific mounts
+
+The @samp{/usr/spool/rwho} directory is a good candidate for automounting.
+For efficiency reasons it is best to capture the rwho data on a small
+number of machines and then mount that information onto a large number
+of clients.  The data written into the rwho files is byte order dependent
+so only servers with the correct byte ordering can be used by a client:
+
+@example
+/defaults         type:=nfs
+usr/spool/rwho    -byte==little;rfs:=/usr/spool/rwho \
+                      rhost:=vaxA  rhost:=vaxB \
+                  || -rfs:=/usr/spool/rwho \
+                      rhost:=sun4  rhost:=hp300
+@end example
+
+@node /vol, /defaults with selectors, rwho servers, Examples
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @samp{/vol}
+@cindex /vol
+@cindex Catch-all mount point
+@cindex Generic volume name
+
+@samp{/vol} is used as a catch-all for volumes which do not have other
+conventional names.
+
+Below is part of the @samp{/vol} map for the domain @samp{doc.ic.ac.uk}.
+The @samp{r+d} tree is used for new or experimental software that needs
+to be available everywhere without installing it on all the fileservers.
+Users wishing to try out the new software then simply include
+@samp{/vol/r+d/@{bin,ucb@}} in their path.@refill
+
+The main tree resides on one host @samp{gould.doc.ic.ac.uk}, which has
+different @samp{bin}, @samp{etc}, @samp{lib} and @samp{ucb}
+sub-directories for each machine architecture.  For example,
+@samp{/vol/r+d/bin} for a Sun-4 would be stored in the sub-directory
+@samp{bin/sun4} of the filesystem @samp{/usr/r+d}.  When it was accessed
+a symbolic link pointing to @samp{/a/gould/usr/r+d/bin/sun4} would be
+returned.@refill
+
+@example
+/defaults    type:=nfs;opts:=rw,grpid,nosuid,intr,soft
+wp           -opts:=rw,grpid,nosuid;rhost:=charm \
+             host==charm;type:=link;fs:=/usr/local/wp \
+             host!=charm;type:=nfs;rfs:=/vol/wp
+...
+#
+src          -opts:=rw,grpid,nosuid;rhost:=charm \
+             host==charm;type:=link;fs:=/usr/src \
+             host!=charm;type:=nfs;rfs:=/vol/src
+#
+r+d          type:=auto;fs:=$@{map@};pref:=r+d/
+# per architecture bin,etc,lib&ucb...
+r+d/bin      rhost:=gould.doc.ic.ac.uk;rfs:=/usr/r+d;sublink:=$@{/key@}/$@{arch@}
+r+d/etc      rhost:=gould.doc.ic.ac.uk;rfs:=/usr/r+d;sublink:=$@{/key@}/$@{arch@}
+r+d/include  rhost:=gould.doc.ic.ac.uk;rfs:=/usr/r+d;sublink:=$@{/key@}
+r+d/lib      rhost:=gould.doc.ic.ac.uk;rfs:=/usr/r+d;sublink:=$@{/key@}/$@{arch@}
+r+d/man      rhost:=gould.doc.ic.ac.uk;rfs:=/usr/r+d;sublink:=$@{/key@}
+r+d/src      rhost:=gould.doc.ic.ac.uk;rfs:=/usr/r+d;sublink:=$@{/key@}
+r+d/ucb      rhost:=gould.doc.ic.ac.uk;rfs:=/usr/r+d;sublink:=$@{/key@}/$@{arch@}
+# hades pictures
+pictures     -opts:=rw,grpid,nosuid;rhost:=thpfs \
+             host==thpfs;type:=link;fs:=/nbsd/pictures \
+             host!=thpfs;type:=nfs;rfs:=/nbsd;sublink:=pictures
+# hades tools
+hades        -opts:=rw,grpid,nosuid;rhost:=thpfs \
+             host==thpfs;type:=link;fs:=/nbsd/hades \
+             host!=thpfs;type:=nfs;rfs:=/nbsd;sublink:=hades
+# bsd tools for hp.
+bsd          -opts:=rw,grpid,nosuid;arch==hp9000;rhost:=thpfs \
+             host==thpfs;type:=link;fs:=/nbsd/bsd \
+             host!=thpfs;type:=nfs;rfs:=/nbsd;sublink:=bsd
+@end example
+
+@node /defaults with selectors, /tftpboot in a chroot-ed environment, /vol, Examples
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @samp{/defaults} with selectors
+@cindex /defaults with selectors
+@cindex selectors on default
+
+It is sometimes useful to have different defaults for a given map.  To
+achieve this, the @samp{/defaults} entry must be able to process normal
+selectors.  This feature is turned on by setting
+@samp{selectors_on_default = yes} in the @file{amd.conf} file.
+@xref{selectors_on_default Parameter}.
+
+In this example, I set different default NFS mount options for hosts
+which are running over a slower network link.  By setting a smaller size
+for the NFS read and write buffer sizes, you can greatly improve remote
+file service performance.
+
+@example
+/defaults \
+  wire==slip-net;opts:=rw,intr,rsize=1024,wsize=1024,timeo=20,retrans=10 \
+  wire!=slip-net;opts:=rw,intr
+@end example
+
+@node /tftpboot in a chroot-ed environment, , /defaults with selectors, Examples
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section @samp{/tftpboot} in a chroot-ed environment
+@cindex /tftpboot in a chroot-ed environment
+@cindex chroot: /tftpboot example
+
+In this complex example, we attempt to run an @i{Amd} process
+@emph{inside} a chroot-ed environment.  @samp{tftpd} (Trivial FTP) is
+used to trivially retrieve files used to boot X-Terminals, Network
+Printers, Network routers, diskless workstations, and other such
+devices.  For security reasons, @samp{tftpd} (and also @samp{ftpd})
+processes are run using the @b{chroot}(2) system call.  This provides an
+environment for these processes, where access to any files outside the
+directory where the chroot-ed process runs is denied.
+
+For example, if you start @samp{tftpd} on your system with
+
+@example
+chroot /tftpboot /usr/sbin/tftpd
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+then the @samp{tftpd} process will not be able to access any files
+outside @file{/tftpboot}.  This ensures that no one can retrieve files
+such as @file{/etc/passwd} and run password crackers on it.
+
+Since the TFTP service works by broadcast, it is necessary to have at
+least one TFTP server running on each subnet.  If you have lots of files
+that you need to make available for @samp{tftp}, and many subnets, it
+could take significant amounts of disk space on each host serving them.
+
+A solution we implemented at Columbia University was to have every host
+run @samp{tftpd}, but have those servers retrieve the boot files from
+two replicated servers.  Those replicated servers have special
+partitions dedicated to the many network boot files.
+
+We start @i{Amd} as follows:
+
+@example
+amd /tftpboot/.amd amd.tftpboot
+@end example
+
+That is, @i{Amd} is serving the directory @file{/tftpboot/.amd}.  The
+@samp{tftp} server runs inside @file{/tftpboot} and is chroot-ed in that
+directory too.  The @file{amd.tftpboot} map looks like:
+
+@example
+#
+# Amd /tftpboot directory -> host map
+#
+
+/defaults  opts:=nosuid,ro,intr,soft;fs:=/tftpboot/import;type:=nfs
+
+tp         host==lol;rfs:=/n/lol/import/tftpboot;type:=lofs \
+           host==ober;rfs:=/n/ober/misc/win/tftpboot;type:=lofs \
+           rhost:=ober;rfs:=/n/ober/misc/win/tftpboot \
+           rhost:=lol;rfs:=/n/lol/import/tftpboot
+@end example
+
+To help understand this example, I list a few of the file entries that
+are created inside @file{/tftpboot}:
+
+@example
+$ ls -la /tftpboot
+dr-xr-xr-x   2 root   512 Aug 30 23:11 .amd
+drwxrwsr-x  12 root   512 Aug 30 08:00 import
+lrwxrwxrwx   1 root    33 Feb 27  1997 adminpr.cfg -> ./.amd/tp/hplj/adminpr.cfg
+lrwxrwxrwx   1 root    22 Dec  5  1996 tekxp -> ./.amd/tp/xterms/tekxp
+lrwxrwxrwx   1 root     1 Dec  5  1996 tftpboot -> .
+@end example
+
+Here is an explanation of each of the entries listed above:
+
+@table @code
+
+@item .amd
+This is the @i{Amd} mount point.  Note that you do not need to run a
+separate @i{Amd} process for the TFTP service.  The @b{chroot}(2) system
+call only protects against file access, but the same process can still
+serve files and directories inside and outside the chroot-ed
+environment, because @i{Amd} itself was not run in chroot-ed mode.
+
+@item import
+This is the mount point where @i{Amd} will mount the directories
+containing the boot files.  The map is designed so that remote
+directories will be NFS mounted (even if they are already mounted
+elsewhere), and local directories are loopback mounted (since they are
+not accessible outside the chroot-ed @file{/tftpboot} directory).
+
+@item adminpr.cfg
+@itemx tekxp
+Two manually created symbolic links to directories @emph{inside} the
+@i{Amd}-managed directory.  The crossing of the component @file{tp} will
+cause @i{Amd} to automount one of the remote replicas.  Once crossed,
+access to files inside proceeds as usual.  The @samp{adminpr.cfg} is a
+configuration file for an HP Laser-Jet 4si printer, and the @samp{tekxp}
+is a directory for Tektronix X-Terminal boot files.
+
+@item tftpboot
+This innocent looking symlink is important.  Usually, when devices boot
+via the TFTP service, they perform the @samp{get file} command to
+retrieve @var{file}.  However, some devices assume that @samp{tftpd}
+does not run in a chroot-ed environment, but rather ``unprotected'', and
+thus use a full pathname for files to retrieve, as in @samp{get
+/tftpboot/file}.  This symlink effectively strips out the leading
+@file{/tftpboot/}.
+
+@end table
+
+@c ################################################################
+@node Internals, Acknowledgments & Trademarks, Examples, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter Internals
+
+Note that there are more error and logging messages possible than are
+listed here.  Most of them are self-explanatory.  Refer to the program
+sources for more details on the rest.
+
+@menu
+* Log Messages::
+@end menu
+
+@node Log Messages, , Internals, Internals
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Log Messages
+
+In the following sections a brief explanation is given of some of the
+log messages made by @i{Amd}.  Where the message is in @samp{typewriter}
+font, it corresponds exactly to the message produced by @i{Amd}.  Words
+in @dfn{italic} are replaced by an appropriate string.  Variables,
+@code{$@{@i{var}@}}, indicate that the value of the appropriate variable is
+output.
+
+Log messages are either sent directly to a file,
+or logged via the @b{syslog}(3) mechanism.  @xref{log_file Parameter}
+In either case, entries in the file are of the form:
+@example
+@i{date-string}  @i{hostname} @t{amd[}@i{pid}@t{]}  @i{message}
+@end example
+
+@menu
+* Fatal errors::
+* Info messages::
+@end menu
+
+@node Fatal errors, Info messages, Log Messages, Log Messages
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Fatal errors
+
+@i{Amd} attempts to deal with unusual events.  Whenever it is not
+possible to deal with such an error, @i{Amd} will log an appropriate
+message and, if it cannot possibly continue, will either exit or abort.
+These messages are selected by @samp{-x fatal} on the command line.
+When @b{syslog}(3) is being used, they are logged with level
+@samp{LOG_FATAL}.  Even if @i{Amd} continues to operate it is likely to
+remain in a precarious state and should be restarted at the earliest
+opportunity.
+
+@table @t
+
+@item Attempting to inherit not-a-filesystem
+The prototype mount point created during a filesystem restart did not
+contain a reference to the restarted filesystem.  This error ``should
+never happen''.
+
+@item Can't bind to domain "@i{NIS-domain}"
+A specific NIS domain was requested on the command line, but no server
+for that domain is available on the local net.
+
+@item Can't determine IP address of this host (@i{hostname})
+When @i{Amd} starts it determines its own IP address.  If this lookup
+fails then @i{Amd} cannot continue.  The hostname it looks up is that
+obtained returned by @b{gethostname}(2) system call.
+
+@item Can't find root file handle for @i{automount point}
+@i{Amd} creates its own file handles for the automount points.  When it
+mounts itself as a server, it must pass these file handles to the local
+kernel.  If the filehandle is not obtainable the mount point is ignored.
+This error ``should never happen''.
+
+@item Must be root to mount filesystems (euid = @i{euid})
+To prevent embarrassment, @i{Amd} makes sure it has appropriate system
+privileges.  This amounts to having an euid of 0.  The check is made
+after argument processing complete to give non-root users a chance to
+access the @code{-v} option.
+
+@item No work to do - quitting
+No automount points were given on the command line and so there is no
+work to do.
+
+@item Out of memory
+While attempting to malloc some memory, the memory space available to
+@i{Amd} was exhausted.  This is an unrecoverable error.
+
+@item Out of memory in realloc
+While attempting to realloc some memory, the memory space available to
+@i{Amd} was exhausted.  This is an unrecoverable error.
+
+@item cannot create rpc/udp service
+Either the NFS or AMQ endpoint could not be created.
+
+@item gethostname: @i{description}
+The @b{gethostname}(2) system call failed during startup.
+
+@item host name is not set
+The @b{gethostname}(2) system call returned a zero length host name.
+This can happen if @i{Amd} is started in single user mode just after
+booting the system.
+
+@item ifs_match called!
+An internal error occurred while restarting a pre-mounted filesystem.
+This error ``should never happen''.
+
+@item mount_afs: @i{description}
+An error occurred while @i{Amd} was mounting itself.
+
+@item run_rpc failed
+Somehow the main NFS server loop failed.  This error ``should never
+happen''.
+
+@item unable to free rpc arguments in amqprog_1
+The incoming arguments to the AMQ server could not be free'ed.
+
+@item unable to free rpc arguments in nfs_program_1
+The incoming arguments to the NFS server could not be free'ed.
+
+@item unable to register (AMQ_PROGRAM, AMQ_VERSION, udp)
+The AMQ server could not be registered with the local portmapper or the
+internal RPC dispatcher.
+
+@item unable to register (NFS_PROGRAM, NFS_VERSION, 0)
+The NFS server could not be registered with the internal RPC dispatcher.
+
+@end table
+
+XXX: This section needs to be updated
+
+@node Info messages, , Fatal errors, Log Messages
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Info messages
+
+@i{Amd} generates information messages to record state changes.  These
+messages are selected by @samp{-x info} on the command line.  When
+@b{syslog}(3) is being used, they are logged with level @samp{LOG_INFO}.
+
+The messages listed below can be generated and are in a format suitable
+for simple statistical analysis.  @dfn{mount-info} is the string
+that is displayed by @dfn{Amq} in its mount information column and
+placed in the system mount table.
+
+@table @t
+
+@item "@t{$@{@i{path}@}}" forcibly timed out
+An automount point has been timed out by the @i{Amq} command.
+
+@item "@t{$@{@i{path}@}}" has timed out
+No access to the automount point has been made within the timeout
+period.
+
+@item Filehandle denied for "$@{@i{rhost}@}:$@{@i{rfs}@}"
+The mount daemon refused to return a file handle for the requested filesystem.
+
+@item Filehandle error for "$@{@i{rhost}@}:$@{@i{rfs}@}": @i{description}
+The mount daemon gave some other error for the requested filesystem.
+
+@item Finishing with status @i{exit-status}
+@i{Amd} is about to exit with the given exit status. 
+
+@item Re-synchronizing cache for map @t{$@{@i{map}@}}
+The named map has been modified and the internal cache is being re-synchronized.
+
+@item file server @t{$@{@i{rhost}@}} is down - timeout of "@t{$@{@i{path}@}}" ignored
+An automount point has timed out, but the corresponding file server is
+known to be down.  This message is only produced once for each mount
+point for which the server is down.
+
+@item file server @t{$@{@i{rhost}@}} type nfs is down
+An NFS file server that was previously up is now down.
+
+@item file server @t{$@{@i{rhost}@}} type nfs is up
+An NFS file server that was previously down is now up.
+
+@item file server @t{$@{@i{rhost}@}} type nfs starts down
+A new NFS file server has been referenced and is known to be down.
+
+@item file server @t{$@{@i{rhost}@}} type nfs starts up
+A new NFS file server has been referenced and is known to be up.
+
+@item mount of "@t{$@{@i{path}@}}" on @t{$@{@i{fs}@}} timed out
+Attempts to mount a filesystem for the given automount point have failed
+to complete within 30 seconds.
+
+@item @i{mount-info} mounted fstype @t{$@{@i{type}@}} on @t{$@{@i{fs}@}}
+A new file system has been mounted.
+
+@item @i{mount-info} restarted fstype @t{$@{@i{type}@}} on @t{$@{@i{fs}@}}
+@i{Amd} is using a pre-mounted filesystem to satisfy a mount request.
+
+@item @i{mount-info} unmounted fstype @t{$@{@i{type}@}} from @t{$@{@i{fs}@}}
+A file system has been unmounted.
+
+@item @i{mount-info} unmounted fstype @t{$@{@i{type}@}} from @t{$@{@i{fs}@}} link @t{$@{@i{fs}@}}/@t{$@{@i{sublink}@}}
+A file system of which only a sub-directory was in use has been unmounted.
+
+@item restarting @i{mount-info} on @t{$@{@i{fs}@}}
+A pre-mounted file system has been noted.
+
+@end table
+
+XXX: This section needs to be updated
+
+@c ################################################################
+@node Acknowledgments & Trademarks, Index, Internals, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@unnumbered Acknowledgments & Trademarks
+
+Many thanks to the @email{amd-dev@@majordomo.cs.columbia.edu,Amd
+Developers} mailing list through the months developing am-utils.  These
+members have contributed to the discussions, ideas, code and
+documentation, and subjected their systems to alpha quality code.
+Special thanks go to those
+@uref{http://www.cs.columbia.edu/~ezk/am-utils/AUTHORS.txt,authors} who
+have submitted patches.
+
+Thanks to the Formal Methods Group at Imperial College for suffering
+patiently while @i{Amd} was being developed on their machines.
+
+Thanks to the many people who have helped with the development of
+@i{Amd}, especially Piete Brooks at the Cambridge University Computing
+Lab for many hours of testing, experimentation and discussion.
+
+Thanks to the @email{amd-workers@@majordomo.glue.umd.edu,Amd Workers}
+mailing list members for many suggestions and bug reports to @i{Amd}.
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+@b{DEC}, @b{VAX} and @b{Ultrix} are registered trademarks of Digital
+Equipment Corporation.
+@item
+@b{AIX} and @b{IBM} are registered trademarks of International Business
+Machines Corporation.
+@item
+@b{Sun}, @b{NFS} and @b{SunOS} are registered trademarks of Sun
+Microsystems, Inc.
+@item
+@b{UNIX} is a registered trademark in the USA and other countries,
+exclusively licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.
+@item
+All other registered trademarks are owned by their respective owners.
+@end itemize
+
+@c ################################################################
+@node Index, , Acknowledgments & Trademarks, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@unnumbered Index
+
+@printindex cp
+
+@contents
+@bye
+
+@c ====================================================================
+@c ISPELL LOCAL WORDS:
+@c LocalWords:  setfilename amdref overfullrule settitle titlepage titlefont nz
+@c LocalWords:  authorfont vskip ifinfo iftex cindex unnumberedsec dfn xref vol
+@c LocalWords:  locationN pxref jpo nott concentrix Sjoerd sjoerd cwi Eitan vuw
+@c LocalWords:  Mizrotsky eitan shumuji dgux fpx scp hcx metcalf masala hlh OTS
+@c LocalWords:  Presnell srp cgl Trost trost ogi pyrOSx OSx tubsibr riscix iX
+@c LocalWords:  Piete pb Lindblad cjl ai umax utek xinu Mitchum D'Souza dsouza
+@c LocalWords:  mrc apu alliant aviion AViiON fps macII multimax tahoe vax emph
+@c LocalWords:  mapdefault valA valB valC YPTSDIR ETCDIR substr MAKEDBM YPDBDIR
+@c LocalWords:  NOPUSH njw dylan dk dylan njw anydir domN achilles mjh pref sel
+@c LocalWords:  gdef loc loc loc ldots autodir remopts rwho rwho styx styx yoyo
+@c LocalWords:  noindent gould rvdmount rvdunmount fserver mtmp unioned logfile
+@c LocalWords:  dmn esac phjk toytown toytown toytown toytown phjk RdDir RdLnk
+@c LocalWords:  volname attrs netif dougal inaddr hwaddr ec mountmaps passno xy
+@c LocalWords:  freq dumpset hfs brian florence localinfo fstabs automaps defn
+@c LocalWords:  localname fsck'd opr gummo sjv ganymede sjv fserv fserv fserv
+@c LocalWords:  vaxA vaxB wp thpfs nbsd asis ifs amqprog free'ed printindex gov
+@c LocalWords:  LocalWords syncodeindex Distrib bsdnet lanl AutoMounter acis ic
+@c LocalWords:  ac uk aix bsd Mullender nl il DG lcs hpux irix ucsf NeXT cse cl
+@c LocalWords:  mt FX hp ibm mips utils def def Domainname eg hostd getwd tmp
+@c LocalWords:  subsubsection rw grpid intr noconn nocto nodevs nosuid retrans
+@c LocalWords:  rsize tcp timeo nounmount utimeout DDEBUG nodaemon fd hostnames
+@c LocalWords:  pid Amd's pendry vangogh nfsx backoff stats nomap nostats CRIT
+@c LocalWords:  noinfo clustername RVD dsk dsk amq hostports osver statfs str
+@c LocalWords:  ou counter's amdmaps proj src tftpboot sh mv cd sbin ypcat inet
+@c LocalWords:  Getattr getattr localhost fhandles netmask fstype noquota addr
+@c LocalWords:  exportfs Dumpsets dumpsets pindex ldif fixmount fixrmtab euid
+@c LocalWords:  lostaltmail realloc netnumber itemx primnetnum primnetname ARG
+@c LocalWords:  subsnetname subsnetnum netgrp netgroup multitable Shlib dec osf
+@c LocalWords:  hppa pc bsdi freebsd netbsd openbsd ncr sysv rs acdirmax fsid
+@c LocalWords:  acdirmin acregmax acregmin actimeo dumbtimr nfsv noac noauto sd
+@c LocalWords:  nocache nodev noint nosub pgthresh posix rdonly suid symttl mfs
+@c LocalWords:  AMFS umapfs myftpdir unionfs es mapname mapfile mapfile slocal
+@c LocalWords:  mailspool saturn saturn notknown lol ober dr xr xr drwxrwsr cfg
+@c LocalWords:  lrwxrwxrwx adminpr hplj adminpr cfg tekxp xterms tekxp Dupuy tp
+@c LocalWords:  linkname hlfsddump dirname rmtab pluto rlogin direntry pg vr dn
+@c LocalWords:  maxmem hlfsdir xmailbox showmount cn amdmap amdmapName resvport
+@c LocalWords:  objectClass amdmapKey amdmapValue ln powerpc amdmapTimestamp ez
+@c LocalWords:  moisil FSinfo Libtool Unmounting sublink fileservers NullProc
+@c LocalWords:  gethostname mount's unmounts linkx remounts unmounting UAs SA's
+@c LocalWords:  mountpoint mountpoints unescaped UIDs util's overlayed uref EFS
+@c LocalWords:  serv maxgroups nfsl cachedir copt cfsadmin efs addopts fg
+@c LocalWords:  nointr
diff --git a/contrib/amd/doc/stamp-vti b/contrib/amd/doc/stamp-vti
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..225ecdbacb37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/amd/doc/stamp-vti
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+@set UPDATED 22 April 1998
+@set EDITION 6.0a16
+@set VERSION 6.0a16
diff --git a/contrib/amd/doc/texinfo.tex b/contrib/amd/doc/texinfo.tex
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2ce38f94db16
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/amd/doc/texinfo.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,4935 @@
+%% TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
+%% $Id: texinfo.tex,v 2.218 1997/07/26 19:12:35 karl Exp $
+
+%  Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93,
+%                94, 95, 96, 97 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+%This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
+%published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
+%your option) any later version.
+
+%This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
+%useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
+%of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+%General Public License for more details.
+
+%You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+%along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, write
+%to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+%Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+
+%In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
+%You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
+%what you give them.   Help stamp out software-hoarding!
+
+
+% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@prep.ai.mit.edu.
+% Please include a *precise* test case in each bug report.
+
+
+% Make it possible to create a .fmt file just by loading this file:
+% if the underlying format is not loaded, start by loading it now.
+% Added by gildea November 1993.
+\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
+
+% This automatically updates the version number based on RCS.
+\def\deftexinfoversion$#1: #2 ${\def\texinfoversion{#2}}
+\deftexinfoversion$Revision: 2.218 $
+\message{Loading texinfo package [Version \texinfoversion]:}
+
+% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
+% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
+% they might have appeared in the input file name.
+\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}\message{}
+  \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
+
+% Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
+
+\let\ptexb=\b
+\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
+\let\ptexc=\c
+\let\ptexcomma=\,
+\let\ptexdot=\.
+\let\ptexdots=\dots
+\let\ptexend=\end
+\let\ptexequiv = \equiv
+\let\ptexi=\i
+\let\ptexlbrace=\{
+\let\ptexrbrace=\}
+\let\ptexstar=\*
+\let\ptext=\t
+
+% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
+% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
+% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
+% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
+% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
+{\catcode`@ = 11
+ % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
+ % if the definition is written into an index file.
+ \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
+ \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
+}
+
+
+\message{Basics,}
+\chardef\other=12
+
+% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
+% starts a new line in the output.
+\newlinechar = `^^J
+
+% Set up fixed words for English.
+\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined{\gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}}\fi%
+\def\putwordInfo{Info}%
+\ifx\putwordSee\undefined{\gdef\putwordSee{See}}\fi%
+\ifx\putwordsee\undefined{\gdef\putwordsee{see}}\fi%
+\ifx\putwordfile\undefined{\gdef\putwordfile{file}}\fi%
+\ifx\putwordpage\undefined{\gdef\putwordpage{page}}\fi%
+\ifx\putwordsection\undefined{\gdef\putwordsection{section}}\fi%
+\ifx\putwordSection\undefined{\gdef\putwordSection{Section}}\fi%
+\ifx\putwordTableofContents\undefined{\gdef\putwordTableofContents{Table of Contents}}\fi%
+\ifx\putwordShortContents\undefined{\gdef\putwordShortContents{Short Contents}}\fi%
+\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined{\gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}}\fi%
+
+% Ignore a token.
+%
+\def\gobble#1{}
+
+\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
+\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
+\hyphenation{eshell}
+\hyphenation{white-space}
+
+% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
+\newdimen \bindingoffset
+\newdimen \normaloffset
+\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
+
+% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
+% and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
+% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.
+%
+\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
+\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2
+   \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
+   \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
+   \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
+}%
+
+% For @cropmarks command.
+% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
+% 
+\newif\ifcropmarks
+\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
+%
+% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
+% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
+%
+\newdimen\cornerlong \newdimen\cornerthick
+\newdimen\topandbottommargin
+\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize
+\cornerlong=1pc\cornerthick=.3pt        % These set size of cropmarks
+\outerhsize=7in
+%\outervsize=9.5in
+% Alternative @smallbook page size is 9.25in
+\outervsize=9.25in
+\topandbottommargin=.75in
+
+% Main output routine.
+\chardef\PAGE = 255
+\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
+
+\newbox\headlinebox
+\newbox\footlinebox
+
+% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
+% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
+\def\onepageout#1{%
+  \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
+  %
+  \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
+  \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
+  %
+  % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
+  % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
+  \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
+  \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
+  %
+  {%
+    % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
+    % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
+    % before the \shipout runs.
+    %
+    \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
+    \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
+    \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
+                   % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
+    \shipout\vbox{%
+      \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
+        \hsize = \outerhsize
+        \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
+        \nointerlineskip
+        \line{%
+          \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
+          \hfill
+          \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
+        }%
+        \vskip\topandbottommargin
+        \line\bgroup
+          \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
+          \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
+          \vbox\bgroup
+      \fi
+      %
+      \unvbox\headlinebox
+      \pagebody{#1}%
+      \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
+        % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
+        % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
+        % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
+        \vskip 2\baselineskip
+        \unvbox\footlinebox
+      \fi
+      %
+      \ifcropmarks
+          \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
+        \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
+        \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
+        \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
+        \line{%
+          \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+          \hfill
+          \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+        }%
+        \nointerlineskip
+        \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
+      \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
+      \fi
+    }% end of \shipout\vbox
+  }% end of group with \turnoffactive
+  \advancepageno
+  \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
+}
+
+\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
+
+\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
+{\catcode`\@ =11
+\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
+% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
+\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
+  \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
+\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
+\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
+\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
+}
+
+% Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
+% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
+% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
+%
+\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
+\def\nstop{\vbox
+  {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
+\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
+\def\nsbot{\vbox
+  {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
+
+% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
+% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
+% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
+%
+\def\parsearg#1{%
+  \let\next = #1%
+  \begingroup
+    \obeylines
+    \futurelet\temp\parseargx
+}
+
+% If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
+% the like), remove it and recurse.  Otherwise, we're done.
+\def\parseargx{%
+  % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
+  \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
+    \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
+  \else
+    \expandafter\parseargline
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
+{\obeyspaces %
+ \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
+
+{\obeylines %
+  \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
+    \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
+    %
+    % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
+    % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
+    \argremovec #1\c\relax %
+    \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
+    %
+    % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
+    \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
+  }%
+}
+
+% Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
+% do that for us.  The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
+% in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
+% just to delimit the argument to the \c.
+\def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
+\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
+
+% \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
+%    @end itemize  @c foo
+% will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
+% `itemize'.  Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
+% result to \toks0.
+%
+% This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
+% in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
+% Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands.  (If it ever
+% does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
+% here.)  But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
+% \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
+% that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
+%
+\def\removeactivespaces#1{%
+  \begingroup
+    \ignoreactivespaces
+    \edef\temp{#1}%
+    \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% Change the active space to expand to nothing.
+%
+\begingroup
+  \obeyspaces
+  \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
+\endgroup
+
+
+\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
+
+%% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
+%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
+\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
+\def\ENVcheck{%
+\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment.  Type Return to continue.}
+\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
+
+% @begin foo  is the same as @foo, for now.
+\newhelp\EMsimple{Type <Return> to continue.}
+
+\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
+
+\def\beginxxx #1{%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
+{\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
+\csname #1\endcsname\fi}
+
+% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
+%
+\def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
+\def\endxxx #1{%
+  \removeactivespaces{#1}%
+  \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
+  %
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
+      % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
+      \errhelp = \EMsimple
+      \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
+    \else
+      \unmatchedenderror\endthing
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
+    \csname E\endthing\endcsname
+  \fi
+}
+
+% There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started.  Give an error.
+%
+\def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
+  \errhelp = \EMsimple
+  \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
+}
+
+% Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
+%
+\def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
+  \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
+}
+
+
+% Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in
+% \nonfillstart and \quotations).
+\newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt
+\def\singlespace{%
+  % Why was this kern here?  It messes up equalizing space above and below
+  % environments.  --karl, 6may93
+  %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip
+  %\kern \baselineskip}%
+  \setleading \singlespaceskip
+}
+
+%% Simple single-character @ commands
+
+% @@ prints an @
+% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
+\def\@{{\tt \char '100}}
+
+% This is turned off because it was never documented
+% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
+%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
+%% but suppressing ligatures.
+%\def\`{{`}}
+%\def\'{{'}}
+
+% Used to generate quoted braces.
+\def\mylbrace {{\tt \char '173}}
+\def\myrbrace {{\tt \char '175}}
+\let\{=\mylbrace
+\let\}=\myrbrace
+\begingroup
+  % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index.
+  \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12
+  \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
+  \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12
+  @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]%
+  @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]%
+@endgroup
+
+% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
+% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H.
+\let\, = \c
+\let\dotaccent = \.
+\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
+\let\tieaccent = \t
+\let\ubaraccent = \b
+\let\udotaccent = \d
+
+% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
+% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss.
+\def\questiondown{?`}
+\def\exclamdown{!`}
+
+% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
+\def\imacro{i}
+\def\jmacro{j}
+\def\dotless#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
+  \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
+  \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
+\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
+
+% @* forces a line break.
+\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
+
+% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
+\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
+\gdef\enddots{$\mathinner{\ldotp\ldotp\ldotp\ldotp}$\spacefactor=3000}
+
+% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
+\gdef\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
+\gdef\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
+% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
+% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
+\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
+
+% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
+% it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
+% to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
+% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
+% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
+% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
+% the text is small, which looks bad.
+%
+\def\group{\begingroup
+  \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
+    \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
+    \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
+  \fi
+  %
+  % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
+  % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
+  % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it.  (See p.82 of
+  % the TeXbook.)  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
+  % above.  But it's pretty close.
+  \def\Egroup{%
+    \egroup           % End the \vtop.
+    \endgroup         % End the \group.
+  }%
+  %
+  \vtop\bgroup
+    % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
+    % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
+    % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
+    % and the first line afterwards is too small.  But we can't put the
+    % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
+    % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
+    \everypar = {\strut}%
+    %
+    % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
+    % normal interline spacing.
+    \offinterlineskip
+    %
+    % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
+    % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
+    % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
+    % turned off the interline space.  Simplest is to make them be an
+    % empty paragraph.
+    \ifx\par\lisppar
+      \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
+      %
+      % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
+      \obeylines
+    \fi
+    %
+    % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
+    % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
+    % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
+    % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
+    % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
+    % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
+    \comment
+}
+%
+% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
+% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
+%
+\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
+group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
+where each line of input produces a line of output.}
+
+% @need space-in-mils
+% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
+
+\newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
+
+\def\need{\parsearg\needx}
+
+% Old definition--didn't work.
+%\def\needx #1{\par %
+%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
+%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
+%{\baselineskip=0pt%
+%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\penalty 10000
+%\prevdepth=-1000pt
+%}}
+
+\def\needx#1{%
+  % Go into vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
+  % paragraph.
+  \par
+  %
+  % Don't add any leading before our big empty box, but allow a page
+  % break, since the best break might be right here.
+  \allowbreak
+  \nointerlineskip
+  \vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}%
+  %
+  % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
+  % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
+  % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
+  % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
+  % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
+  %
+  % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
+  % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
+  % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
+  % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
+  % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
+  % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
+  % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
+  \penalty9999
+  %
+  % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
+  \kern -#1\mil
+  %
+  % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
+  \nobreak
+}
+
+% @br   forces paragraph break
+
+\let\br = \par
+
+% @dots{}  output some dots
+
+\def\dots{$\ldots$}
+
+% @page    forces the start of a new page
+
+\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
+
+% @exdent text....
+% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
+
+% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
+% That's how much \exdent should take out.
+\newskip\exdentamount
+
+% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
+\def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
+\def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
+
+% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
+\def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
+\def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
+\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
+
+% @inmargin{TEXT} puts TEXT in the margin next to the current paragraph.
+
+\def\inmargin#1{%
+\strut\vadjust{\nobreak\kern-\strutdepth
+  \vtop to \strutdepth{\baselineskip\strutdepth\vss
+  \llap{\rightskip=\inmarginspacing \vbox{\noindent #1}}\null}}}
+\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
+\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
+
+%\hbox{{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
+
+% @include file    insert text of that file as input.
+% Allow normal characters that  we make active in the argument (a file name).
+\def\include{\begingroup
+  \catcode`\\=12
+  \catcode`~=12
+  \catcode`^=12
+  \catcode`_=12
+  \catcode`|=12
+  \catcode`<=12
+  \catcode`>=12
+  \catcode`+=12
+  \parsearg\includezzz}
+% Restore active chars for included file.
+\def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
+  % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
+  \def\thisfile{#1}%
+  \input\thisfile
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\thisfile{}
+
+% @center line   outputs that line, centered
+
+\def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz}
+\def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
+\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+\centerline{#1}}}
+
+% @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
+
+\def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
+\def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
+
+% @comment ...line which is ignored...
+% @c is the same as @comment
+% @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
+
+\def\comment{\catcode 64=\other \catcode 123=\other \catcode 125=\other%
+\parsearg \commentxxx}
+
+\def\commentxxx #1{\catcode 64=0 \catcode 123=1 \catcode 125=2 }
+
+\let\c=\comment
+
+% @paragraphindent  is defined for the Info formatting commands only.
+\let\paragraphindent=\comment
+
+% Prevent errors for section commands.
+% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
+\def\ignoresections{%
+\let\chapter=\relax
+\let\unnumbered=\relax
+\let\top=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsec=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsection=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
+\let\section=\relax
+\let\subsec=\relax
+\let\subsubsec=\relax
+\let\subsection=\relax
+\let\subsubsection=\relax
+\let\appendix=\relax
+\let\appendixsec=\relax
+\let\appendixsection=\relax
+\let\appendixsubsec=\relax
+\let\appendixsubsection=\relax
+\let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
+\let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
+\let\contents=\relax
+\let\smallbook=\relax
+\let\titlepage=\relax
+}
+
+% Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
+% and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
+% incorrectly.
+%
+\def\ignoremorecommands{%
+  \let\defcodeindex = \relax
+  \let\defcv = \relax
+  \let\deffn = \relax
+  \let\deffnx = \relax
+  \let\defindex = \relax
+  \let\defivar = \relax
+  \let\defmac = \relax
+  \let\defmethod = \relax
+  \let\defop = \relax
+  \let\defopt = \relax
+  \let\defspec = \relax
+  \let\deftp = \relax
+  \let\deftypefn = \relax
+  \let\deftypefun = \relax
+  \let\deftypevar = \relax
+  \let\deftypevr = \relax
+  \let\defun = \relax
+  \let\defvar = \relax
+  \let\defvr = \relax
+  \let\ref = \relax
+  \let\xref = \relax
+  \let\printindex = \relax
+  \let\pxref = \relax
+  \let\settitle = \relax
+  \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
+  \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
+  \let\everyheading = \relax
+  \let\evenheading = \relax
+  \let\oddheading = \relax
+  \let\everyfooting = \relax
+  \let\evenfooting = \relax
+  \let\oddfooting = \relax
+  \let\headings = \relax
+  \let\include = \relax
+  \let\lowersections = \relax
+  \let\down = \relax
+  \let\raisesections = \relax
+  \let\up = \relax
+  \let\set = \relax
+  \let\clear = \relax
+  \let\item = \relax
+}
+
+% Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore.
+%
+\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
+
+% Ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @ifnottex, @html, @menu, and @direntry text.
+%
+\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
+\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
+\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
+\def\html{\doignore{html}}
+\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
+\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
+
+% Also ignore @macro ... @end macro.  The user must run texi2dvi,
+% which runs makeinfo to do macro expansion.  Ignore @unmacro, too.
+\def\macro{\doignore{macro}}
+\let\unmacro = \comment
+
+
+% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
+% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
+\let\dircategory = \comment
+
+% Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
+%
+\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
+  % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
+  \ignoresections
+  %
+  % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
+  \long\def\doignoretext##1\end #1{\enddoignore}%
+  %
+  % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
+  \catcode32 = 10
+  %
+  % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
+  \catcode`\{ = 9
+  \catcode`\} = 9
+  %
+  % And now expand that command.
+  \doignoretext
+}
+
+% What we do to finish off ignored text.
+%
+\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
+
+\newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
+\def\obstexwarn{%
+  \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
+  % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
+  % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
+    \immediate\write16{}
+    \immediate\write16{***WARNING*** for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
+    \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
+    \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
+    \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
+    \immediate\write16{  Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
+    \immediate\write16{  (See ftp://ftp.gnu.ai.mit.edu/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)}
+    \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
+    \immediate\write16{  script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
+    \immediate\write16{  to use a workaround.}
+    \immediate\write16{}
+    \global\warnedobstrue
+    \fi
+}
+
+% **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex.  For a
+% workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
+% uncomment the following line:
+%%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
+
+% Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
+% purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
+%
+\def\nestedignore#1{%
+  \obstexwarn
+  % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
+  % command, so that nested ignore constructs work.  Thus, we put the
+  % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result.  To minimize
+  % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
+  % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font.
+  %
+  \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
+    % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
+    \ignoresections
+    %
+    % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
+    % @end command again.
+    \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
+    %
+    % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands.  Most cause no
+    % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
+    % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
+    % undefine them.
+    %
+    % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
+    % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
+    \ignoremorecommands
+    %
+    % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
+    % all the font commands to also use \nullfont.  We don't use
+    % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites
+    % might have that installed.  Therefore, math mode will still
+    % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
+    % stuff compared to the main input.
+    %
+    \nullfont
+    \let\tenrm = \nullfont  \let\tenit = \nullfont  \let\tensl = \nullfont
+    \let\tenbf = \nullfont  \let\tentt = \nullfont  \let\smallcaps = \nullfont
+    \let\tensf = \nullfont
+    % Similarly for index fonts (mostly for their use in
+    % smallexample)
+    \let\indrm = \nullfont  \let\indit = \nullfont  \let\indsl = \nullfont
+    \let\indbf = \nullfont  \let\indtt = \nullfont  \let\indsc = \nullfont
+    \let\indsf = \nullfont
+    %
+    % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
+    \tracinglostchars = 0
+    %
+    % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
+    \frenchspacing
+    %
+    % Don't report underfull hboxes.
+    \hbadness = 10000
+    %
+    % Do minimal line-breaking.
+    \pretolerance = 10000
+    %
+    % Do not execute instructions in @tex
+    \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
+}
+
+% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
+% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
+%
+% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
+% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
+% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
+% didn't need it.  Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
+% losing inside @example, for instance.
+%
+\def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
+  \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
+  \parsearg\setxxx}
+\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
+\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
+  \def\temp{#2}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
+  \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
+  \fi
+  \endgroup
+}
+% Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
+% \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
+% an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
+\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
+
+% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
+%
+\def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
+\def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
+
+% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
+%
+\def\value{\begingroup
+  \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
+  \valuexxx}
+\def\valuexxx#1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    {\{No value for ``#1''\}}%
+  \else
+    \csname SET#1\endcsname
+  \fi
+\endgroup}
+
+% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
+% with @set.
+%
+\def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx}
+\def\ifsetxxx #1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    \expandafter\ifsetfail
+  \else
+    \expandafter\ifsetsucceed
+  \fi
+}
+\def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
+\def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifset}
+
+% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
+% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
+%
+\def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx}
+\def\ifclearxxx #1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    \expandafter\ifclearsucceed
+  \else
+    \expandafter\ifclearfail
+  \fi
+}
+\def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
+\def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
+
+% @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo always succeed; we read the text
+% following, through the first @end iftex (etc.).  Make `@end iftex'
+% (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
+%
+\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
+\def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
+\def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
+\defineunmatchedend{iftex}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
+
+% We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it
+% at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no
+% effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group).  So we must
+% define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value.  (We can't
+% just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since
+% the @ifset might be nested.)
+%
+\def\conditionalsucceed#1{%
+  \edef\temp{%
+    % Remember the current value of \E#1.
+    \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}%
+    %
+    % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value.
+    \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}%
+  }%
+  \temp
+}
+
+% We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the
+% control sequences after we've constructed them.
+%
+\def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
+
+% @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
+%
+\def\asis#1{#1}
+
+% @math means output in math mode.
+% We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because control
+% sequences like \math are expanded when the toc file is written.  Then,
+% we read the toc file back, the $'s will be normal characters (as they
+% should be, according to the definition of Texinfo).  So we must use a
+% control sequence to switch into and out of math mode.
+%
+% This isn't quite enough for @math to work properly in indices, but it
+% seems unlikely it will ever be needed there.
+%
+\let\implicitmath = $
+\def\math#1{\implicitmath #1\implicitmath}
+
+% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
+\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
+\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
+
+\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
+\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
+\def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
+\let\nwnode=\node
+\let\lastnode=\relax
+
+\def\donoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}\fi
+\global\let\lastnode=\relax}
+
+\def\unnumbnoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\unnumbsetref{\lastnode}\fi
+\global\let\lastnode=\relax}
+
+\def\appendixnoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\appendixsetref{\lastnode}\fi
+\global\let\lastnode=\relax}
+
+% @refill is a no-op.
+\let\refill=\relax
+
+% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
+% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
+% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
+\def\setfilename{%
+   \readauxfile
+   \opencontents
+   \openindices
+   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
+   \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
+   %
+   % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
+   % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
+   % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
+   \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
+   \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
+   \closein1
+   \temp
+   %
+   \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
+}
+
+% @bye.
+\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
+
+% \def\macro#1{\begingroup\ignoresections\catcode`\#=6\def\macrotemp{#1}\parsearg\macroxxx}
+% \def\macroxxx#1#2 \end macro{%
+% \expandafter\gdef\macrotemp#1{#2}%
+% \endgroup}
+
+%\def\linemacro#1{\begingroup\ignoresections\catcode`\#=6\def\macrotemp{#1}\parsearg\linemacroxxx}
+%\def\linemacroxxx#1#2 \end linemacro{%
+%\let\parsearg=\relax
+%\edef\macrotempx{\csname M\butfirst\expandafter\string\macrotemp\endcsname}%
+%\expandafter\xdef\macrotemp{\parsearg\macrotempx}%
+%\expandafter\gdef\macrotempx#1{#2}%
+%\endgroup}
+
+%\def\butfirst#1{}
+
+
+\message{fonts,}
+
+% Font-change commands.
+
+% Texinfo supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
+% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
+\newfam\sffam
+\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
+\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
+
+% We don't need math for this one.
+\def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
+
+% Use Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf (11pt).
+\newcount\mainmagstep
+\mainmagstep=\magstephalf
+
+% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
+% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
+% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
+\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
+
+% Use cm as the default font prefix.
+% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
+% before you read in texinfo.tex.
+\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
+\def\fontprefix{cm}
+\fi
+% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
+\def\rmshape{r}
+\def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold
+\def\bfshape{b}
+\def\bxshape{bx}
+\def\ttshape{tt}
+\def\ttbshape{tt}
+\def\ttslshape{sltt}
+\def\itshape{ti}
+\def\itbshape{bxti}
+\def\slshape{sl}
+\def\slbshape{bxsl}
+\def\sfshape{ss}
+\def\sfbshape{ss}
+\def\scshape{csc}
+\def\scbshape{csc}
+
+\ifx\bigger\relax
+\let\mainmagstep=\magstep1
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
+\else
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\fi
+% Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10.
+% cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
+% looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10.
+\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
+
+% A few fonts for @defun, etc.
+\setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
+\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
+
+% Fonts for indices and small examples (9pt).
+% We actually use the slanted font rather than the italic,
+% because texinfo normally uses the slanted fonts for that.
+% Do not make many font distinctions in general in the index, since they
+% aren't very useful.
+\setfont\ninett\ttshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\indrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\indit\slshape{9}{1000}
+\let\indsl=\indit
+\let\indtt=\ninett
+\let\indttsl=\ninett
+\let\indsf=\indrm
+\let\indbf=\indrm
+\setfont\indsc\scshape{10}{900}
+\font\indi=cmmi9
+\font\indsy=cmsy9
+
+% Fonts for title page:
+\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
+\let\titlebf=\titlerm
+\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
+\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
+\def\authorrm{\secrm}
+
+% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
+\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
+\let\chapbf=\chaprm
+\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
+\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
+
+% Section fonts (14.4pt).
+\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\let\secbf\secrm
+\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
+\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
+
+% \setfont\ssecrm\bxshape{10}{\magstep1}    % This size an font looked bad.
+% \setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{\magstep1}    % The letters were too crowded.
+% \setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}
+% \setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
+% \setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{\magstep1}
+
+%\setfont\ssecrm\bfshape{10}{1315}      % Note the use of cmb rather than cmbx.
+%\setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{1315}      % Also, the size is a little larger than
+%\setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{1315}      % being scaled magstep1.
+%\setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{1315}
+%\setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{1315}
+
+%\let\ssecbf=\ssecrm
+
+% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
+\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
+\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
+\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
+% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
+% but that is not a standard magnification.
+
+% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
+% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
+% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we
+% don't bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont (which would
+% also require loading a lot more fonts).
+%
+\def\resetmathfonts{%
+  \textfont0 = \tenrm \textfont1 = \teni \textfont2 = \tensy
+  \textfont\itfam = \tenit \textfont\slfam = \tensl \textfont\bffam = \tenbf
+  \textfont\ttfam = \tentt \textfont\sffam = \tensf
+}
+
+
+% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
+% of just \STYLE.  We do this so that font changes will continue to work
+% in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
+% cases, not the current font.  Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
+% \tenbf}, for example.  By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
+% redefine \bf itself.
+\def\textfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
+  \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
+  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
+  \resetmathfonts}
+\def\titlefonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
+  \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
+  \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
+  \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
+\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts #1}}
+\def\chapfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
+  \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
+  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
+\def\secfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
+  \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
+  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
+\def\subsecfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
+  \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
+  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
+\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
+\def\indexfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\indrm \let\tenit=\indit \let\tensl=\indsl
+  \let\tenbf=\indbf \let\tentt=\indtt \let\smallcaps=\indsc
+  \let\tensf=\indsf \let\teni=\indi \let\tensy=\indsy \let\tenttsl=\indttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{12pt}}
+
+% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
+%
+\textfonts
+
+% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
+\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
+
+% Fonts for short table of contents.
+\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
+
+%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
+%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
+
+% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
+% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
+\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
+\def\smartitalic#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+
+\let\i=\smartitalic
+\let\var=\smartitalic
+\let\dfn=\smartitalic
+\let\emph=\smartitalic
+\let\cite=\smartitalic
+
+\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
+\let\strong=\b
+
+% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
+% the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
+% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
+%
+\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
+\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
+
+\def\t#1{%
+  {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
+  \null
+}
+\let\ttfont=\t
+\def\samp #1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
+\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
+\font\smallsy=cmsy9
+\def\key#1{{\smallrm\textfont2=\smallsy \leavevmode\hbox{%
+  \raise0.4pt\hbox{$\langle$}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
+    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
+     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{$\langle$}}#1}}%
+    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
+  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{$\rangle$}}}}
+% The old definition, with no lozenge:
+%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
+\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
+
+\let\file=\samp
+
+% @code is a modification of @t,
+% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
+\def\tclose#1{%
+  {%
+    % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
+    \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
+    %
+    % Switch to typewriter.
+    \tt
+    %
+    % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
+    \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
+    %
+    % Turn off hyphenation.
+    \nohyphenation
+    %
+    \rawbackslash
+    \frenchspacing
+    #1%
+  }%
+  \null
+}
+
+% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
+% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
+% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
+
+% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
+% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
+% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
+% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
+%  -- rms.
+{
+\catcode`\-=\active
+\catcode`\_=\active
+\catcode`\|=\active
+\global\def\code{\begingroup \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder \codex}
+% The following is used by \doprintindex to insure that long function names
+% wrap around.  It is necessary for - and _ to be active before the index is
+% read from the file, as \entry parses the arguments long before \code is
+% ever called.  -- mycroft
+% _ is always active; and it shouldn't be \let = to an _ that is a
+% subscript character anyway. Then, @cindex @samp{_} (for example)
+% fails.  --karl
+\global\def\indexbreaks{%
+  \catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash
+}
+}
+
+\def\realdash{-}
+\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
+\def\codeunder{\ifusingtt{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}}{\_}}
+\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
+
+%\let\exp=\tclose  %Was temporary
+
+% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
+% then @kbd has no effect.
+
+% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
+%   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
+%   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
+\def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
+\def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
+  \def\arg{#1}%
+  \ifx\arg\worddistinct
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
+  \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\worddistinct{distinct}
+\def\wordexample{example}
+\def\wordcode{code}
+
+% Default is kbdinputdistinct.  (Too much of a hassle to call the macro,
+% the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.)
+\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}
+
+\def\xkey{\key}
+\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
+\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
+
+% @url.  Quotes do not seem necessary, so use \code.
+\let\url=\code
+
+% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional second argument
+% specifying the text to display.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.
+% Perhaps eventually put in a hypertex \special here.
+% 
+\def\uref#1{\urefxxx #1,,\finish}
+\def\urefxxx#1,#2,#3\finish{%
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+    \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})%
+  \else
+    \code{#1}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% rms does not like the angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
+% So now @email is just like @uref.
+%\def\email#1{$\langle${\tt #1}$\rangle$}
+\let\email=\uref
+
+% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
+% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
+% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
+% this property, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
+
+% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
+% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of
+% @dmn{}pt.
+%
+\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
+
+\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
+
+% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
+% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
+% Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
+%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
+
+\def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
+% Use of \lowercase was suggested.
+\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
+\def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
+
+% @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
+\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
+
+
+\message{page headings,}
+
+\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
+\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
+
+% First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
+\newif\ifseenauthor
+\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
+
+\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
+\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
+        \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
+
+\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
+   \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
+% I deinstalled the following change because \cmr12 is undefined.
+% This change was not in the ChangeLog anyway.  --rms.
+%   \let\subtitlerm=\cmr12
+   \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
+   %
+   \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}%
+   %
+   % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
+   \vglue\titlepagetopglue
+   %
+   % Now you can print the title using @title.
+   \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
+   \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
+                    % print a rule at the page bottom also.
+                    \finishedtitlepagefalse
+                    \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
+   % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
+   \finishedtitlepagetrue
+   %
+   % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
+   \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
+   \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
+   %
+   % @author should come last, but may come many times.
+   \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
+   \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
+      {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
+   %
+   % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
+   % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
+   \let\oldpage = \page
+   \def\page{%
+      \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+         \finishtitlepage
+      \fi
+      \oldpage
+      \let\page = \oldpage
+      \hbox{}}%
+%   \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
+}
+
+\def\Etitlepage{%
+   \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+      \finishtitlepage
+   \fi
+   % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
+   % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
+   % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
+   % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
+   \oldpage
+   \endgroup
+   \HEADINGSon
+}
+
+\def\finishtitlepage{%
+   \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
+   \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
+   \finishedtitlepagetrue
+}
+
+%%% Set up page headings and footings.
+
+\let\thispage=\folio
+
+\newtoks \evenheadline    % Token sequence for heading line of even pages
+\newtoks \oddheadline     % Token sequence for heading line of odd pages
+\newtoks \evenfootline    % Token sequence for footing line of even pages
+\newtoks \oddfootline     % Token sequence for footing line of odd pages
+
+% Now make Tex use those variables
+\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
+                            \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
+\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
+                            \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
+\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
+
+% Commands to set those variables.
+% For example, this is what  @headings on  does
+% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
+% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
+% @evenfooting @thisfile||
+% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
+
+\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
+\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
+\def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
+
+\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
+\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
+\def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
+
+{\catcode`\@=0 %
+
+\gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
+
+\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+  \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
+  %
+  % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
+  % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
+  \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
+  \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
+}
+
+\gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
+%
+}% unbind the catcode of @.
+
+% @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
+% @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
+% @headings off         turns them off.
+% @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
+% @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
+% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
+% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
+
+\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\HEADINGSoff{
+\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
+\HEADINGSoff
+% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
+% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
+% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
+% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
+% edge of all pages.
+\def\HEADINGSdouble{
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+}
+\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+
+% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
+% page number on top right.
+\def\HEADINGSsingle{
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+}
+\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
+
+\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
+\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
+\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+}
+
+\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
+\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+}
+
+% Subroutines used in generating headings
+% Produces Day Month Year style of output.
+\def\today{\number\day\space
+\ifcase\month\or
+January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
+July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
+\space\number\year}
+
+% Use this if you want the Month Day, Year style of output.
+%\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
+%January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
+%July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
+%\space\number\day, \number\year}
+
+% @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings
+% It generates no output of its own
+
+\def\thistitle{No Title}
+\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
+\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
+
+
+\message{tables,}
+
+% @tabs -- simple alignment
+
+% These don't work.  For one thing, \+ is defined as outer.
+% So these macros cannot even be defined.
+
+%\def\tabs{\parsearg\tabszzz}
+%\def\tabszzz #1{\settabs\+#1\cr}
+%\def\tabline{\parsearg\tablinezzz}
+%\def\tablinezzz #1{\+#1\cr}
+%\def\&{&}
+
+% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
+
+% default indentation of table text
+\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
+% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
+\newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in
+% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
+\newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in
+
+% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
+\newdimen\itemmax
+
+% Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
+% these defs.
+% They also define \itemindex
+% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
+
+\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
+
+\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
+
+\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
+\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
+
+\def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
+\def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
+
+\def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
+\def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
+
+\def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
+                 \itemzzz {#1}}
+
+\def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
+                 \itemzzz {#1}}
+
+\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
+  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+  \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
+  \itemindex{#1}%
+  \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
+  %
+  % Be sure we are not still in the middle of a paragraph.
+  %{\parskip = 0in
+  %\par
+  %}%
+  %
+  % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
+  % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
+  % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
+  % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
+  % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
+  \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
+    %
+    % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
+    % but leave it ragged-right.
+    \begingroup
+      \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
+      \advance\hsize by\tableindent
+      \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
+      \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
+    \endgroup
+    %
+    % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
+    % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
+    \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
+    %
+    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  Unfortunately
+    % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
+    % \baselineskip glue.
+    \nobreak
+    \endgroup
+    \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
+  \else
+    % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the
+    % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.  Since that
+    % text will be indented by \tableindent, we make the item text be in
+    % a zero-width box.
+    \noindent
+    \rlap{\hskip -\tableindent\box0}\ignorespaces%
+    \endgroup%
+    \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
+\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
+\def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
+\def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
+\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
+\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
+
+%% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work
+\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
+
+\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\dontindex#1        \endtabley}}
+
+\def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\fnitemindex#1        \endtabley
+\def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\Etable=\relax}}
+
+\def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\vritemindex#1        \endtabley
+\def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\Etable=\relax}}
+
+\def\dontindex #1{}
+\def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
+\def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
+
+{\obeyspaces %
+\gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
+\tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
+
+\def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+\aboveenvbreak %
+\begingroup %
+\def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
+\let\itemindex=#1%
+\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
+\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
+\ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
+\def\itemfont{#2}%
+\itemmax=\tableindent %
+\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
+\advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
+\exdentamount=\tableindent
+\parindent = 0pt
+\parskip = \smallskipamount
+\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
+\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\item = \internalBitem %
+\let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
+\let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
+\let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
+\let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
+\let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
+}
+
+% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
+
+\newcount \itemno
+
+\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
+
+\def\itemizezzz #1{%
+  \begingroup % ended by the @end itemsize
+  \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
+}
+
+\def\itemizey #1#2{%
+\aboveenvbreak %
+\itemmax=\itemindent %
+\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
+\advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
+\exdentamount=\itemindent
+\parindent = 0pt %
+\parskip = \smallskipamount %
+\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
+\def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\def\itemcontents{#1}%
+\let\item=\itemizeitem}
+
+% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
+% These are `.?!:;,'
+\def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000
+  \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 }
+
+% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
+% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
+%
+\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
+
+% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
+% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
+% argument is the same as `1'.
+%
+\def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
+\def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
+\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
+  \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
+  %
+  % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
+  \def\thearg{#1}%
+  \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
+  %
+  % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a
+  % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
+  % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
+  % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
+  % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
+  \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
+  \ifx\rest\empty
+    % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.
+    % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
+    % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
+    %   not equal to itself.
+    % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
+    %
+    % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
+    % continuing to look for a <number>.
+    %
+    \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
+      \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
+    \else
+      % It's a letter.
+      \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
+        \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
+      \else
+        \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.
+    \numericenumerate
+  \fi
+}
+
+% An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is
+% given in \thearg.
+%
+\def\numericenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \thearg
+  \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
+}
+
+% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+  \startenumeration{%
+    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+    \ifnum\itemno=0
+      \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+                  alphabet}%
+    \fi
+    \char\lccode\itemno
+  }%
+}
+
+% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+  \startenumeration{%
+    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+    \ifnum\itemno=0
+      \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+                  alphabet}
+    \fi
+    \char\uccode\itemno
+  }%
+}
+
+% Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
+% common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
+% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
+%
+\def\startenumeration#1{%
+  \advance\itemno by -1
+  \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
+}
+
+% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
+% to @enumerate.
+%
+\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
+\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
+\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+
+% Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
+
+\def\itemizeitem{%
+\advance\itemno by 1
+{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
+\ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
+{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
+\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
+\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
+\flushcr}
+
+% @multitable macros
+% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
+%
+% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
+% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width
+% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
+% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
+
+% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
+
+% To make preamble:
+%
+% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
+%   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
+%   @item ...
+%
+%   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
+%   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
+%   columns as desired.
+
+
+% Or use a template:
+%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+%   @item ...
+%   using the widest term desired in each column.
+%
+% For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
+% the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
+% will parse correctly, i.e.,
+%
+%     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
+%      template}
+% Not:
+%     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
+%      {Column 3 template}
+
+% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
+% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
+% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
+% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
+
+% @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
+% own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
+
+% Sample multitable:
+
+%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
+%   @item
+%   first col stuff
+%   @tab
+%   second col stuff
+%   @tab
+%   third col
+%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
+%   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
+%
+%         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
+%   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
+%   @end multitable
+
+% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
+% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
+% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
+% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
+% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
+%                                                            to baseline.
+%   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
+
+%%%%
+% Dimensions
+
+\newskip\multitableparskip
+\newskip\multitableparindent
+\newdimen\multitablecolspace
+\newskip\multitablelinespace
+\multitableparskip=0pt
+\multitableparindent=6pt
+\multitablecolspace=12pt
+\multitablelinespace=0pt
+
+%%%%
+% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
+\let\endsetuptable\relax
+\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
+\let\columnfractions\relax
+\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
+\newif\ifsetpercent
+
+%% 2/1/96, to allow fractions to be given with more than one digit.
+\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {\global\advance\colcount by1 %
+\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#1\hsize}%
+\setuptable}
+
+\newcount\colcount
+\def\setuptable#1{\def\firstarg{#1}%
+\ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable\let\go\relax%
+\else
+  \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions\global\setpercenttrue%
+  \else
+    \ifsetpercent
+       \let\go\pickupwholefraction   % In this case arg of setuptable
+                                     % is the decimal point before the
+                                     % number given in percent of hsize.
+                                     % We don't need this so we don't use it.
+    \else
+       \global\advance\colcount by1
+       \setbox0=\hbox{#1 }% Add a normal word space as a separator;
+                          % typically that is always in the input, anyway.
+       \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
+    \fi%
+  \fi%
+\ifx\go\pickupwholefraction\else\let\go\setuptable\fi%
+\fi\go}
+
+%%%%
+% multitable syntax
+\def\tab{&\hskip1sp\relax} % 2/2/96
+                           % tiny skip here makes sure this column space is
+                           % maintained, even if it is never used.
+
+
+%%%%
+% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
+
+\def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
+
+\def\dotable#1{\bgroup
+\let\item\cr
+\tolerance=9500
+\hbadness=9500
+\setmultitablespacing
+\parskip=\multitableparskip
+\parindent=\multitableparindent
+\overfullrule=0pt
+\global\colcount=0\relax%
+\def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\global\everycr{}\cr\egroup\egroup}%
+ % To parse everything between @multitable and @item :
+\setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
+ % Need to reset this to 0 after \setuptable.
+\global\colcount=0\relax%
+ %
+ % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
+ % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
+ % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
+ % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
+\halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax%
+\multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
+ % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
+ % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
+ % the first one.
+ %  If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
+ % to the width of each template entry.
+ %  If user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
+ % we will use that dimension as the width of the column, and
+ % the \leftskip will keep entries from bumping into each other.
+ % Table will start at left margin and final column will justify at
+ % right margin.
+\ifnum\colcount=1
+\else
+  \ifsetpercent
+  \else
+   % If user has <not> set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
+   % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace
+  \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
+  \fi
+ % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
+\leftskip=\multitablecolspace
+\fi
+ % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
+ % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
+ % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
+ % For example:
+ % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
+ % @item @code{#}
+ % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
+ % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
+ % characters.
+ \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
+ % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
+ % each line. Every column  entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
+ % The table preamble
+ % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
+\global\everycr{\noalign{%
+% \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
+% Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
+% breaks over pages Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the problem
+% manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
+\global\colcount=0\relax}}
+}
+
+\def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
+% If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
+% current baselineskip.
+\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
+%% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
+%% to keep lines equally spaced
+\let\multistrut = \strut
+%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
+%% table. If not, do nothing.
+%%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
+\else
+\gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
+width0pt\relax} \fi
+\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\fi%
+\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\fi}
+
+
+\message{indexing,}
+% Index generation facilities
+
+% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
+% except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
+{\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
+
+% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
+% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
+% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
+% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
+% the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.
+% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
+% for the sake of vms.
+
+\def\newindex #1{
+\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname% Define number for output file
+\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
+\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define \xxxindex
+\noexpand\doindex {#1}}
+}
+
+% @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
+
+\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
+
+% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
+
+\def\newcodeindex #1{
+\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname% Define number for output file
+\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
+\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define \xxxindex
+\noexpand\docodeindex {#1}}
+}
+
+\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
+
+% @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
+% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
+\def\synindex #1 #2 {%
+\expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
+\expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
+\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define \xxxindex
+\noexpand\doindex {#2}}%
+}
+
+% @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
+% inside @code.
+\def\syncodeindex #1 #2 {%
+\expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
+\expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
+\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define \xxxindex
+\noexpand\docodeindex {#2}}%
+}
+
+% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
+% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
+%  and it is "foo", the name of the index.
+
+% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
+% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
+
+% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
+% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
+
+\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
+\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
+
+% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
+\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
+\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
+
+\def\indexdummies{%
+% Take care of the plain tex accent commands.
+\def\"{\realbackslash "}%
+\def\`{\realbackslash `}%
+\def\'{\realbackslash '}%
+\def\^{\realbackslash ^}%
+\def\~{\realbackslash ~}%
+\def\={\realbackslash =}%
+\def\b{\realbackslash b}%
+\def\c{\realbackslash c}%
+\def\d{\realbackslash d}%
+\def\u{\realbackslash u}%
+\def\v{\realbackslash v}%
+\def\H{\realbackslash H}%
+% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
+\def\oe{\realbackslash oe}%
+\def\ae{\realbackslash ae}%
+\def\aa{\realbackslash aa}%
+\def\OE{\realbackslash OE}%
+\def\AE{\realbackslash AE}%
+\def\AA{\realbackslash AA}%
+\def\o{\realbackslash o}%
+\def\O{\realbackslash O}%
+\def\l{\realbackslash l}%
+\def\L{\realbackslash L}%
+\def\ss{\realbackslash ss}%
+% Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry.
+% (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to
+% laboriously list every single command here.)
+\def\@{@}% will be @@ when we switch to @ as escape char.
+%\let\{ = \lbracecmd
+%\let\} = \rbracecmd
+\def\_{{\realbackslash _}}%
+\def\w{\realbackslash w }%
+\def\bf{\realbackslash bf }%
+%\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }%
+\def\sl{\realbackslash sl }%
+\def\sf{\realbackslash sf}%
+\def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
+\def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
+\def\less{\realbackslash less}%
+\def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
+%\def\char{\realbackslash char}%
+\def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
+\def\dots{\realbackslash dots }%
+\def\result{\realbackslash result}%
+\def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
+\def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
+\def\print{\realbackslash print}%
+\def\error{\realbackslash error}%
+\def\point{\realbackslash point}%
+\def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}%
+\def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}%
+\def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}%
+\def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}%
+\def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}%
+\def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}%
+\def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}%
+\def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}%
+\def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}%
+\def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}%
+\def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}%
+\def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}%
+\def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}%
+\def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}%
+\def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}%
+\def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}%
+\def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}%
+\def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}%
+\def\value##1{\realbackslash value {##1}}%
+\unsepspaces
+}
+
+% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
+% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
+% expansion of \tie (\\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
+{\obeyspaces
+ \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
+
+% \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands.
+% This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by.
+\def\indexdummyfont#1{#1}
+\def\indexdummytex{TeX}
+\def\indexdummydots{...}
+
+\def\indexnofonts{%
+% Just ignore accents.
+\let\,=\indexdummyfont
+\let\"=\indexdummyfont
+\let\`=\indexdummyfont
+\let\'=\indexdummyfont
+\let\^=\indexdummyfont
+\let\~=\indexdummyfont
+\let\==\indexdummyfont
+\let\b=\indexdummyfont
+\let\c=\indexdummyfont
+\let\d=\indexdummyfont
+\let\u=\indexdummyfont
+\let\v=\indexdummyfont
+\let\H=\indexdummyfont
+\let\dotless=\indexdummyfont
+% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
+\def\oe{oe}%
+\def\ae{ae}%
+\def\aa{aa}%
+\def\OE{OE}%
+\def\AE{AE}%
+\def\AA{AA}%
+\def\o{o}%
+\def\O{O}%
+\def\l{l}%
+\def\L{L}%
+\def\ss{ss}%
+\let\w=\indexdummyfont
+\let\t=\indexdummyfont
+\let\r=\indexdummyfont
+\let\i=\indexdummyfont
+\let\b=\indexdummyfont
+\let\emph=\indexdummyfont
+\let\strong=\indexdummyfont
+\let\cite=\indexdummyfont
+\let\sc=\indexdummyfont
+%Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
+% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |...
+%\let\tt=\indexdummyfont
+\let\tclose=\indexdummyfont
+\let\code=\indexdummyfont
+\let\file=\indexdummyfont
+\let\samp=\indexdummyfont
+\let\kbd=\indexdummyfont
+\let\key=\indexdummyfont
+\let\var=\indexdummyfont
+\let\TeX=\indexdummytex
+\let\dots=\indexdummydots
+\def\@{@}%
+}
+
+% To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape.
+% We must first make another character (@) an escape
+% so we do not become unable to do a definition.
+
+{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other
+@gdef@realbackslash{\}}
+
+\let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
+
+\let\SETmarginindex=\relax %initialize!
+% workhorse for all \fooindexes
+% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there
+\def\doind #1#2{%
+  % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
+  \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
+    \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
+  \fi
+  {%
+    \count255=\lastpenalty
+    {%
+      \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
+      \escapechar=`\\
+      {%
+        \let\folio=0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
+        \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
+        % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
+        %
+        % First process the index-string with all font commands turned off
+        % to get the string to sort by.
+        {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2}}%
+        %
+        % Now produce the complete index entry, with both the sort key and the
+        % original text, including any font commands.
+        \toks0 = {#2}%
+        \edef\temp{%
+          \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
+            \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
+        }%
+        \temp
+      }%
+    }%
+    \penalty\count255
+  }%
+}
+
+\def\dosubind #1#2#3{%
+{\count10=\lastpenalty %
+{\indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
+\escapechar=`\\%
+{\let\folio=0%
+\def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}%
+%
+% Now process the index-string once, with all font commands turned off,
+% to get the string to sort the index by.
+{\indexnofonts
+\xdef\temp1{#2 #3}%
+}%
+% Now produce the complete index entry.  We process the index-string again,
+% this time with font commands expanded, to get what to print in the index.
+\edef\temp{%
+\write \csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
+\realbackslash entry {\temp1}{\folio}{#2}{#3}}}%
+\temp }%
+}\penalty\count10}}
+
+% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
+%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
+% or
+%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
+% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
+% containing these kinds of lines:
+%  \initial {c}
+%     before the first topic whose initial is c
+%  \entry {topic}{pagelist}
+%     for a topic that is used without subtopics
+%  \primary {topic}
+%     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
+%  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
+%     for each subtopic.
+
+% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
+% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
+
+\def\findex {\fnindex}
+\def\kindex {\kyindex}
+\def\cindex {\cpindex}
+\def\vindex {\vrindex}
+\def\tindex {\tpindex}
+\def\pindex {\pgindex}
+
+\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
+{\obeylines %
+\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
+\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
+
+% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
+
+% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
+% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
+%
+\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
+\def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
+  \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
+  %
+  \indexfonts \rm
+  \tolerance = 9500
+  \indexbreaks
+  %
+  % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
+  \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
+  \ifeof 1
+    % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
+    % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
+    % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
+    % there is some text.
+    (Index is nonexistent)
+  \else
+    %
+    % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
+    % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
+    % it can discover if there is anything in it.
+    \read 1 to \temp
+    \ifeof 1
+      (Index is empty)
+    \else
+      % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
+      % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
+      % to make right now.
+      \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
+      \catcode`\\ = 0
+      \catcode`\@ = 11
+      \escapechar = `\\
+      \begindoublecolumns
+      \input \jobname.#1s
+      \enddoublecolumns
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \closein 1
+\endgroup}
+
+% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
+% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
+
+% Same as \bigskipamount except no shrink.
+% \balancecolumns gets confused if there is any shrink.
+\newskip\initialskipamount \initialskipamount 12pt plus4pt
+
+\def\initial #1{%
+{\let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
+\ifdim\lastskip<\initialskipamount
+\removelastskip \penalty-200 \vskip \initialskipamount\fi
+\line{\secbf#1\hfill}\kern 2pt\penalty10000}}
+
+% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
+% flush to the right margin.  It is used for index and table of contents
+% entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
+%
+\def\entry #1#2{\begingroup
+  %
+  % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
+  % affect previous text.
+  \par
+  %
+  % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
+  \parfillskip = 0in
+  %
+  % No extra space above this paragraph.
+  \parskip = 0in
+  %
+  % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
+  \finalhyphendemerits = 0
+  %
+  % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
+  % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
+  % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
+  % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
+  % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
+  %
+  % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
+  % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
+  \hangindent=2em
+  %
+  % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
+  % with blank space.
+  \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
+  %
+  % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
+  % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
+  \noindent
+  %
+  % Insert the text of the index entry.  TeX will do line-breaking on it.
+  #1%
+  % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
+  % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
+  % cursed by a Unix daemon.
+  \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
+  \def\tempb{#2}%
+  \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
+  \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
+  \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
+    %
+    % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
+    % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
+    % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
+    \hfil\penalty50
+    \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
+    %
+    % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
+    % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
+    % \hbox ensues.
+    \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
+  \fi%
+  \par
+\endgroup}
+
+% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
+\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
+  \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
+
+\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
+
+\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
+
+\def\secondary #1#2{
+{\parfillskip=0in \parskip=0in
+\hangindent =1in \hangafter=1
+\noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill #2\par
+}}
+
+% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
+% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
+% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
+\catcode`\@=11
+
+\newbox\partialpage
+\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
+
+\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
+  % Grab any single-column material above us.
+  \output = {\global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
+    % 
+    % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
+    % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
+    % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
+    % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In
+    % that case, we must prevent the second \partialpage from
+    % simply overwriting the first, causing us to lose the page.
+    % This will preserve it until a real output routine can ship it
+    % out.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this runs and
+    % this will be a no-op.
+    \unvbox\partialpage
+    %
+    % Unvbox the main output page.
+    \unvbox255
+    \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
+  }}%
+  \eject
+  %
+  % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
+  \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
+  %
+  % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this
+  % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
+  % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple
+  % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
+  % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
+  %
+  % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
+  % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
+  % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant
+  % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
+  % as it did when we hard-coded it.
+  %
+  % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
+  % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
+  % been clobbered.
+  %
+  \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
+    \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
+    \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
+  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+  %
+  % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
+  % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
+  \vsize = 2\vsize
+}
+\def\doublecolumnout{%
+  \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
+  % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
+  % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
+  % previous page.
+  \dimen@=\pageheight \advance\dimen@ by-\ht\partialpage
+  % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
+  \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
+  \onepageout\pagesofar
+  \unvbox255
+  \penalty\outputpenalty
+}
+\def\pagesofar{%
+  % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
+  % followed by the two boxes we just split.
+  \unvbox\partialpage
+  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+  \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
+}
+\def\enddoublecolumns{%
+  \output = {\balancecolumns}\eject % split what we have
+  \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
+  %
+  % Back to normal single-column typesetting, but take account of the
+  % fact that we just accumulated some stuff on the output page.
+  \pagegoal = \vsize
+}
+\def\balancecolumns{%
+  % Called at the end of the double column material.
+  \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}%
+  \dimen@ = \ht0
+  \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
+  \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
+  \divide\dimen@ by 2
+  \splittopskip = \topskip
+  % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
+  {\vbadness=10000 \loop
+    \global\setbox3=\copy0
+    \global\setbox1=\vsplit3 to\dimen@
+    \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ \global\advance\dimen@ by1pt
+   \repeat}%
+  \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
+  \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
+  \pagesofar
+}
+\catcode`\@ = \other
+
+
+\message{sectioning,}
+% Define chapters, sections, etc.
+
+\newcount\chapno
+\newcount\secno        \secno=0
+\newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
+\newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0
+
+% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
+\newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
+\def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
+
+\newwrite\contentsfile
+% This is called from \setfilename.
+\def\opencontents{\openout\contentsfile = \jobname.toc }
+
+% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
+% page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise
+
+\def\thischapter{} \def\thissection{}
+\def\seccheck#1{\ifnum \pageno<0
+  \errmessage{@#1 not allowed after generating table of contents}%
+\fi}
+
+\def\chapternofonts{%
+  \let\rawbackslash=\relax
+  \let\frenchspacing=\relax
+  \def\result{\realbackslash result}%
+  \def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
+  \def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
+  \def\print{\realbackslash print}%
+  \def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
+  \def\dots{\realbackslash dots}%
+  \def\result{\realbackslash result}%
+  \def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
+  \def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
+  \def\print{\realbackslash print}%
+  \def\error{\realbackslash error}%
+  \def\point{\realbackslash point}%
+  \def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}%
+  \def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
+  \def\bf{\realbackslash bf}%
+  \def\w{\realbackslash w}%
+  \def\less{\realbackslash less}%
+  \def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
+  \def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
+  \def\char{\realbackslash char}%
+  \def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose{##1}}%
+  \def\code##1{\realbackslash code{##1}}%
+  \def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp{##1}}%
+  \def\r##1{\realbackslash r{##1}}%
+  \def\b##1{\realbackslash b{##1}}%
+  \def\key##1{\realbackslash key{##1}}%
+  \def\file##1{\realbackslash file{##1}}%
+  \def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd{##1}}%
+  % These are redefined because @smartitalic wouldn't work inside xdef.
+  \def\i##1{\realbackslash i{##1}}%
+  \def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite{##1}}%
+  \def\var##1{\realbackslash var{##1}}%
+  \def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph{##1}}%
+  \def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn{##1}}%
+}
+
+\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
+\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
+
+% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
+\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
+\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
+
+% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
+\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
+\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
+
+% Choose a numbered-heading macro
+% #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
+% #2 is text for heading
+\def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+  \chapterzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \seczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+    \chapterzzz{#2}
+  \else
+    \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+  \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
+\def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+  \appendixzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+    \appendixzzz{#2}
+  \else
+    \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
+  \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
+\def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+  \unnumberedzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+    \unnumberedzzz{#2}
+  \else
+    \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+  \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+
+\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
+\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
+\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
+\def\chapterzzz #1{\seccheck{chapter}%
+\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+\global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter \the\chapno}%
+\chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+% We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
+% because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
+\xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp  %
+\donoderef %
+\global\let\section = \numberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+}}
+
+\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
+\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
+\def\appendixzzz #1{\seccheck{appendix}%
+\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+\global\advance \appendixno by 1 \message{Appendix \appendixletter}%
+\chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+\xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
+  {\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp  %
+\appendixnoderef %
+\global\let\section = \appendixsec
+\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
+}}
+
+% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
+\outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
+\def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
+
+\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
+\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
+\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
+\def\unnumberedzzz #1{\seccheck{unnumbered}%
+\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+%
+% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
+% argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
+% expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
+% expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
+% to be executed, not expanded).
+%
+% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
+% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
+% \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
+% simply yielding the contents of the <toks register>.
+\toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
+%
+\unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
+\gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp  %
+\unnumbnoderef %
+\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
+}}
+
+\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
+\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
+\def\seczzz #1{\seccheck{section}%
+\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash secentry %
+{\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp %
+\donoderef %
+\penalty 10000 %
+}}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
+\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
+\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsection}%
+\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash secentry %
+{\the\toks0}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp %
+\appendixnoderef %
+\penalty 10000 %
+}}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
+\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsec}%
+\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{\the\toks0}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp %
+\unnumbnoderef %
+\penalty 10000 %
+}}
+
+\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
+\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{subsection}%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
+\subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsecentry %
+{\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp %
+\donoderef %
+\penalty 10000 %
+}}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsubsec}%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
+\subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsecentry %
+{\the\toks0}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp %
+\appendixnoderef %
+\penalty 10000 %
+}}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsubsec}%
+\plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry{\the\toks0}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp %
+\unnumbnoderef %
+\penalty 10000 %
+}}
+
+\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{subsubsection}%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
+\subsubsecheading {#1}
+  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}
+  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}
+  {\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp %
+\donoderef %
+\penalty 10000 %
+}}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsubsubsec}%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
+\subsubsecheading {#1}
+  {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
+  {\appendixletter}
+  {\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp %
+\appendixnoderef %
+\penalty 10000 %
+}}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsubsubsec}%
+\plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry{\the\toks0}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp %
+\unnumbnoderef %
+\penalty 10000 %
+}}
+
+% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
+% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
+\def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
+\def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
+
+\def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
+\def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
+\def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
+\def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
+
+\def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
+\def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
+\def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
+\def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
+
+% These macros control what the section commands do, according
+% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
+% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
+\global\let\section = \numberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+
+% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
+
+% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and
+% such:
+%       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
+%          overlong headings to fold.
+%       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
+%          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
+%       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
+%          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
+
+
+\def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
+\def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
+{\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
+{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                  \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+                  \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+
+\def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
+\def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
+{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                  \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+                  \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+
+% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
+\def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
+\def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
+\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
+
+% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
+% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
+% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
+
+%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
+\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
+
+\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
+
+%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
+% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
+
+\newskip\chapheadingskip
+
+\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
+\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
+\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
+
+\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGoff{
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGon{
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGodd{
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
+
+\CHAPPAGon
+
+\def\CHAPFplain{
+\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
+\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
+\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
+
+% Plain chapter opening.
+% #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
+\def\chfplain#1#2{%
+  \pchapsepmacro
+  {%
+    \chapfonts \rm
+    \def\chapnum{#2}%
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
+    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
+          \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
+          \unhbox0 #1\par}%
+  }%
+  \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
+  \nobreak
+}
+
+% Plain opening for unnumbered.
+\def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
+
+% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
+\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
+\def\centerchfplain#1{{%
+  \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
+    \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
+    \leftskip = \rightskip
+    \parfillskip = 0pt
+  }%
+  \chfplain{#1}{}%
+}}
+
+\CHAPFplain % The default
+
+\def\unnchfopen #1{%
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                       \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+                       \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 10000 %
+}
+
+\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
+\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
+\par\penalty 5000 %
+}
+
+\def\centerchfopen #1{%
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                       \parindent=0pt
+                       \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 10000 %
+}
+
+\def\CHAPFopen{
+\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
+\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
+\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
+
+
+% Section titles.
+\newskip\secheadingskip
+\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
+\def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
+\def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
+
+% Subsection titles.
+\newskip \subsecheadingskip
+\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
+\def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
+\def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
+
+% Subsubsection titles.
+\let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
+\let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
+\def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
+\def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
+
+
+% Print any size section title.
+%
+% #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
+% number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
+\def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
+  {%
+    \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
+    \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
+  }%
+  {%
+    % Switch to the right set of fonts.
+    \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
+    %
+    % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
+    \def\secnum{#2}%
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
+    %
+    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
+          \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
+          \unhbox0 #3}%
+  }%
+  \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak
+}
+
+
+\message{toc printing,}
+% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
+% to \contentsfile.
+
+\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
+\def\startcontents#1{%
+   % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
+   % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
+   % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
+   % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
+   \contentsalignmacro
+   \immediate\closeout \contentsfile
+   \ifnum \pageno>0
+      \pageno = -1              % Request roman numbered pages.
+   \fi
+   % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
+   % It is abundantly clear what they are.
+   \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
+   \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
+      \catcode`\\=0  \catcode`\{=1  \catcode`\}=2  \catcode`\@=11
+      % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
+      % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation.  --karl, 9jul97.
+      %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
+      \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
+      \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
+}
+
+
+% Normal (long) toc.
+\outer\def\contents{%
+   \startcontents{\putwordTableofContents}%
+      \input \jobname.toc
+   \endgroup
+   \vfill \eject
+}
+
+% And just the chapters.
+\outer\def\summarycontents{%
+   \startcontents{\putwordShortContents}%
+      %
+      \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
+      \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
+      % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
+      \secfonts
+      \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl
+      \rm
+      \hyphenpenalty = 10000
+      \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
+      \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
+      \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{}
+      \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
+      \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{}
+      \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
+      \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{}
+      \input \jobname.toc
+   \endgroup
+   \vfill \eject
+}
+\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
+
+% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
+% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
+% The last argument is the page number.
+% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
+
+% Chapter-level things, for both the long and short contents.
+\def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
+
+% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings
+\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
+  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno{#3}}%
+}
+
+% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
+% The arg is, e.g. `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
+% We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
+% command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
+% for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
+\setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix }
+\newdimen\shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth = \wd0
+
+\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
+  % We typeset #1 in a box of constant width, regardless of the text of
+  % #1, so the chapter titles will come out aligned.
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{#1}%
+  \dimen0 = \ifdim\wd0 > \shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth \else 0pt \fi
+  %
+  % This space should be plenty, since a single number is .5em, and the
+  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
+  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
+  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
+  \advance\dimen0 by 1.1em
+  \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hfil}%
+}
+
+\def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}}
+\def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno{#2}}}
+
+% Sections.
+\def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\def\unnumbsecentry#1#2{\dosecentry{#1}{#2}}
+
+% Subsections.
+\def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
+\def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
+
+% And subsubsections.
+\def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+  \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
+\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
+
+% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
+\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
+
+% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
+% page number.
+%
+% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
+% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
+\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
+   \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
+   \begingroup
+     \chapentryfonts
+     \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+   \endgroup
+   \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
+}
+
+\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+\endgroup}
+
+% Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
+% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here.  (We
+% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
+% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
+%
+% \turnoffactive is for the sake of @" used for umlauts.
+\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
+  \entry{\turnoffactive #1}{\turnoffactive #2}%
+\endgroup}
+
+% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
+\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
+
+\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+
+\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
+\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
+\let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
+\let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
+
+
+\message{environments,}
+
+% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
+% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
+% Furthermore, these definitions must come after we define our fonts.
+\newbox\dblarrowbox    \newbox\longdblarrowbox
+\newbox\pushcharbox    \newbox\bullbox
+\newbox\equivbox       \newbox\errorbox
+
+%{\tentt
+%\global\setbox\dblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}
+%\global\setbox\longdblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}
+%\global\setbox\pushcharbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}
+%\global\setbox\equivbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}
+% Adapted from the manmac format (p.420 of TeXbook)
+%\global\setbox\bullbox = \hbox to 1em{\kern.15em\vrule height .75ex width .85ex
+%                                      depth .1ex\hfil}
+%}
+
+% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
+\def\point{$\star$}
+\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
+\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
+\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
+\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
+
+% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
+{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
+\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
+% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
+\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
+
+\global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
+   \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
+   \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
+   \vbox{
+      \hrule height\dimen2
+      \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
+         \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
+         \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
+      \hrule height\dimen2}
+    \hfil}
+
+% The @error{} command.
+\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
+
+% @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
+% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
+% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
+
+\def\tex{\begingroup
+\catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
+\catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
+\catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie
+\catcode `\%=14
+\catcode 43=12 % plus
+\catcode`\"=12
+\catcode`\==12
+\catcode`\|=12
+\catcode`\<=12
+\catcode`\>=12
+\escapechar=`\\
+%
+\let\,=\ptexcomma
+\let\{=\ptexlbrace
+\let\}=\ptexrbrace
+\let\.=\ptexdot
+\let\*=\ptexstar
+\let\dots=\ptexdots
+\def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
+\def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
+\def\@{@}%
+\let\bullet=\ptexbullet
+\let\b=\ptexb \let\c=\ptexc \let\i=\ptexi \let\t=\ptext
+%
+\let\Etex=\endgroup}
+
+% Define @lisp ... @endlisp.
+% @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
+% including the definition of @endlisp (which normally is erroneous).
+
+% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
+\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
+
+% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
+% such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
+% have any width.
+\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
+
+% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
+% space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
+% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
+% should produce a line of output anyway.
+%
+{\obeyspaces %
+\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
+
+% Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is.  This is
+% for use in \parsearg.
+{\sepspaces%
+\global\let\obeyedspace= }
+
+% This space is always present above and below environments.
+\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
+
+% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
+% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
+% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
+% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip
+%
+\def\aboveenvbreak{{\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
+\endgraf \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
+\removelastskip \penalty-50 \vskip\envskipamount \fi}}
+
+\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
+
+% \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
+\let\nonarrowing=\relax
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around argument
+\font\circle=lcircle10
+\newdimen\circthick
+\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
+\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
+\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
+%
+\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
+\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
+\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
+\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
+\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+        \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
+        \hskip\rskip}}
+\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+        \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
+        \hskip\rskip}}
+%
+\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
+
+\long\def\cartouche{%
+\begingroup
+        \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
+        \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
+        \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
+                          \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
+        \cartouter=\hsize
+        \advance\cartouter by 18pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
+%                                    side, and for 6pt waste from
+%                                    each corner char
+        \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
+        % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
+        \let\nonarrowing=\comment
+        \vbox\bgroup
+                \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
+                \carttop
+                \hbox\bgroup
+                        \hskip\lskip
+                        \vrule\kern3pt
+                        \vbox\bgroup
+                                \hsize=\cartinner
+                                \kern3pt
+                                \begingroup
+                                        \baselineskip=\normbskip
+                                        \lineskip=\normlskip
+                                        \parskip=\normpskip
+                                        \vskip -\parskip
+\def\Ecartouche{%
+                                \endgroup
+                                \kern3pt
+                        \egroup
+                        \kern3pt\vrule
+                        \hskip\rskip
+                \egroup
+                \cartbot
+        \egroup
+\endgroup
+}}
+
+
+% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
+% inside a group.
+\def\nonfillstart{%
+  \aboveenvbreak
+  \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
+  \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
+  \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
+  \singlespace
+  \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
+  \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
+  \parskip = 0pt
+  \parindent = 0pt
+  \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
+  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
+  % at next level down.
+  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+    \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
+    \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
+    \let\nonarrowing=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+
+% To ending an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph
+% (via \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group.  That way we
+% keep the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue
+% will be inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the
+% document, after the environment.
+%
+\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+
+\def\lisp{\begingroup
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
+  \tt
+  % Make @kbd do something special, if requested.
+  \let\kbdfont\kbdexamplefont
+  \rawbackslash % have \ input char produce \ char from current font
+  \gobble
+}
+
+% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the
+% environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
+%
+% We must call \lisp last in the definition, since it reads the
+% return following the @example (or whatever) command.
+%
+\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+\def\smallexample{\begingroup \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+\def\smalllisp{\begingroup \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+
+% @smallexample and @smalllisp.  This is not used unless the @smallbook
+% command is given.  Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
+%
+\def\smalllispx{\begingroup
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Esmalllisp = \nonfillfinish
+  \let\Esmallexample = \nonfillfinish
+  %
+  % Smaller fonts for small examples.
+  \indexfonts \tt
+  \rawbackslash % make \ output the \ character from the current font (tt)
+  \gobble
+}
+
+% This is @display; same as @lisp except use roman font.
+%
+\def\display{\begingroup
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
+  \gobble
+}
+
+% This is @format; same as @display except don't narrow margins.
+%
+\def\format{\begingroup
+  \let\nonarrowing = t
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
+  \gobble
+}
+
+% @flushleft (same as @format) and @flushright.
+%
+\def\flushleft{\begingroup
+  \let\nonarrowing = t
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Eflushleft = \nonfillfinish
+  \gobble
+}
+\def\flushright{\begingroup
+  \let\nonarrowing = t
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
+  \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
+  \gobble}
+
+% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
+% and narrows the margins.
+%
+\def\quotation{%
+  \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
+  {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
+  \singlespace
+  \parindent=0pt
+  % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
+  % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
+  \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
+  %
+  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
+  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+    \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
+    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
+  \fi
+}
+
+\message{defuns,}
+% Define formatter for defuns
+% First, allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
+\def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
+
+\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
+\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
+\newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt
+\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
+
+\newcount\parencount
+% define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things.
+% \functionparens affects the group it is contained in.
+\def\activeparens{%
+\catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active
+\catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active}
+
+% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
+\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
+
+{\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
+
+% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
+% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
+% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
+\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
+\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
+
+\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
+\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
+% This is used to turn on special parens
+% but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
+\gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
+
+% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
+% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
+\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
+  \global\advance\parencount by 1
+}
+%
+% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
+\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
+%
+\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
+  % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
+  \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
+  \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
+% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
+\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\&#1}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
+%
+\gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
+} % End of definition inside \activeparens
+%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
+%% contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ]
+\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
+\def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
+\def\ampnr{\&}
+\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
+\def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
+
+% First, defname, which formats the header line itself.
+% #1 should be the function name.
+% #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function".
+
+\def\defname #1#2{%
+% Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were
+% outside the @def...
+\dimen2=\leftskip
+\advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
+\dimen3=\rightskip
+\advance\dimen3 by -\defbodyindent
+\noindent        %
+\setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}%
+\dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
+\dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations
+\parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1     %
+% Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such)
+% ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin,
+% but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking
+{% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
+% so that \rightline will obey them.
+\advance \hsize by -\dimen2 \advance \hsize by -\dimen3
+\rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}}}%
+% Make all lines underfull and no complaints:
+\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
+\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+{\df #1}\enskip        % Generate function name
+}
+
+% Actually process the body of a definition
+% #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun.
+% #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx.
+% #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header,
+%    such as \defunheader.
+
+\def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup %
+\catcode 61=\active % 61 is `='
+\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}
+
+\def\defmethparsebody #1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}}
+
+\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
+
+% These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
+% except that they do not make parens into active characters.
+% These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
+
+\def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup %
+\catcode 61=\active %
+\obeylines\spacesplit#3}
+
+% This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody.  It could probably be used for
+% some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals.
+%
+\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
+  \begingroup\inENV %
+  \medbreak %
+  % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+  % so that it will exit this group.
+  \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+  \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+  \parindent=0in
+  \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent
+  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+  \begingroup\obeylines
+}
+
+\def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
+}
+
+% This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
+% type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
+% termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument.  Sigh.
+% \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
+%
+% So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name.  That
+% way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
+% won't strip off the braces.
+%
+\def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
+}
+
+% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
+% braces (if any).  That's what this does.
+%
+\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
+
+% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
+% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
+% (which might be empty) the arguments.
+%
+\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
+  #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
+}%
+
+\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
+\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
+
+% Split up #2 at the first space token.
+% call #1 with two arguments:
+%  the first is all of #2 before the space token,
+%  the second is all of #2 after that space token.
+% If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
+% and the second is passed as empty.
+
+{\obeylines
+\gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}%
+\long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{%
+\ifx\relax #3%
+#1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}}
+
+% So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions.
+
+% Define @defun.
+
+% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun
+% Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
+
+\def\defunargs #1{\functionparens \sl
+% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
+% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
+\hyphenchar\tensl=0
+#1%
+\hyphenchar\tensl=45
+\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+\endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000%
+}
+
+\def\deftypefunargs #1{%
+% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
+% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
+% Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
+\boldbraxnoamp
+\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+\endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000%
+}
+
+% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
+
+% @deffn Command forward-char nchars
+
+\def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
+
+\def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defun == @deffn Function
+
+\def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
+
+\def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{Function}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
+
+\def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
+
+% #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name and args.
+\def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
+% #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
+\def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
+\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Function}%
+\deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
+
+\def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
+
+% \defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$
+% puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
+\def\defheaderxcond#1#2$$${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
+
+% #1 is the classification.  #2 is the data type.  #3 is the name and args.
+\def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
+% #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
+\doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup
+\normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
+%               at least some C++ text from working
+\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}%
+\deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defmac == @deffn Macro
+
+\def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
+
+\def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{Macro}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defspec == @deffn Special Form
+
+\def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
+
+\def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{Special Form}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% This definition is run if you use @defunx
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
+
+\def\deffnx #1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
+\def\defunx #1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
+\def\defmacx #1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
+\def\defspecx #1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypefnx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypemethodx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypeunx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypeunx in invalid context}}
+
+% @defmethod, and so on
+
+% @defop {Funny Method} foo-class frobnicate argument
+
+\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
+\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
+
+\def\defopheader #1#2#3{%
+\dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{on #1}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype{} on #1}%
+\defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @deftypemethod foo-class return-type foo-method args
+%
+\def\deftypemethod{%
+  \defmethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
+  \deftypefnheaderx{Method on #1}{#2}#3 #4\relax
+}
+
+% @defmethod == @defop Method
+
+\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
+
+\def\defmethodheader #1#2#3{%
+\dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{on #1}% entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{Method on #1}%
+\defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
+
+\def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
+\defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
+
+\def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
+\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype{} of #1}%
+\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @defivar == @defcv {Instance Variable}
+
+\def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
+
+\def\defivarheader #1#2#3{%
+\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{Instance Variable of #1}%
+\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% These definitions are run if you use @defmethodx, etc.,
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @defmethod, etc.
+
+\def\defopx #1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
+\def\defmethodx #1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
+\def\defcvx #1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
+\def\defivarx #1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
+
+% Now @defvar
+
+% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
+% This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
+% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
+\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000}
+
+% @defvr Counter foo-count
+
+\def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
+
+\def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
+
+% @defvar == @defvr Variable
+
+\def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
+
+\def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{Variable}%
+\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
+
+\def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
+
+\def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{User Option}%
+\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @deftypevar int foobar
+
+\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
+
+% #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
+% is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
+\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
+\dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Variable}%
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000
+\endgroup}
+\def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
+
+% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
+
+\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
+
+\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000
+\endgroup}
+
+% This definition is run if you use @defvarx
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @defvar or @defvarx.
+
+\def\defvrx #1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
+\def\defvarx #1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
+\def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypevarx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypevrx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
+
+% Now define @deftp
+% Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
+
+\def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
+
+% @deftp Class window height width ...
+
+\def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
+
+\def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
+
+% This definition is run if you use @deftpx, etc
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @deftp, etc.
+
+\def\deftpx #1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
+
+
+\message{cross reference,}
+% Define cross-reference macros
+\newwrite \auxfile
+
+\newif\ifhavexrefs  % True if xref values are known.
+\newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
+
+% @inforef is simple.
+\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
+\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
+  node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
+
+% \setref{foo} defines a cross-reference point named foo.
+
+\def\setref#1{%
+\dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
+\dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
+\dosetq{#1-snt}{Ysectionnumberandtype}}
+
+\def\unnumbsetref#1{%
+\dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
+\dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
+\dosetq{#1-snt}{Ynothing}}
+
+\def\appendixsetref#1{%
+\dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
+\dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
+\dosetq{#1-snt}{Yappendixletterandtype}}
+
+% \xref, \pxref, and \ref generate cross-references to specified points.
+% For \xrefX, #1 is the node name, #2 the name of the Info
+% cross-reference, #3 the printed node name, #4 the name of the Info
+% file, #5 the name of the printed manual.  All but the node name can be
+% omitted.
+%
+\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
+  \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
+  \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
+  \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
+  \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
+    % No printed node name was explicitly given.
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
+      % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
+      \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+    \else
+      % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
+      % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
+      \ifdim \wd1>0pt%
+        % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
+        \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+      \else
+        \ifhavexrefs
+          % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
+          \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
+        \else
+          % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
+          \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+        \fi%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  %
+  % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
+  % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
+  % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
+  % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
+  % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
+  % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
+  \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+    \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' in \cite{\printedmanual}%
+  \else
+    % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
+    % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
+    % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
+    % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
+    % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
+    {\turnoffactive \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
+    \space [\printednodename],\space
+    \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
+  \fi
+\endgroup}
+
+% \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros
+
+% Use \turnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
+% work in node names.
+\def\dosetq #1#2{{\let\folio=0 \turnoffactive
+\edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq {#1}{#2}}}%
+\next}}
+
+% \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into
+% CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...}
+% When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character
+
+\def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
+
+% Things to be expanded by \internalsetq
+
+\def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
+
+\def\Ytitle{\thissection}
+
+\def\Ynothing{}
+
+\def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
+\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno %
+\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno %
+\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
+\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
+\else %
+\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
+\fi \fi \fi }
+
+\def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
+\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}%
+\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno %
+\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
+\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
+\else %
+\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
+\fi \fi \fi }
+
+\gdef\xreftie{'tie}
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
+% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
+%
+\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
+  \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0.
+\else
+  \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
+\fi
+
+% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
+% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
+
+\def\refx#1#2{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax
+    % If not defined, say something at least.
+    $\langle$un\-de\-fined$\rangle$%
+    \ifhavexrefs
+      \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
+    \else
+      \ifwarnedxrefs\else
+        \global\warnedxrefstrue
+        \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % It's defined, so just use it.
+    \csname X#1\endcsname
+  \fi
+  #2% Output the suffix in any case.
+}
+
+% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
+\def\xrdef #1#2{{%
+  \catcode`\'=\other
+  \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname{#2}%
+}}
+
+% Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
+\def\readauxfile{\begingroup
+  \catcode`\^^@=\other
+  \catcode`\^^A=\other
+  \catcode`\^^B=\other
+  \catcode`\^^C=\other
+  \catcode`\^^D=\other
+  \catcode`\^^E=\other
+  \catcode`\^^F=\other
+  \catcode`\^^G=\other
+  \catcode`\^^H=\other
+  \catcode`\^^K=\other
+  \catcode`\^^L=\other
+  \catcode`\^^N=\other
+  \catcode`\^^P=\other
+  \catcode`\^^Q=\other
+  \catcode`\^^R=\other
+  \catcode`\^^S=\other
+  \catcode`\^^T=\other
+  \catcode`\^^U=\other
+  \catcode`\^^V=\other
+  \catcode`\^^W=\other
+  \catcode`\^^X=\other
+  \catcode`\^^Z=\other
+  \catcode`\^^[=\other
+  \catcode`\^^\=\other
+  \catcode`\^^]=\other
+  \catcode`\^^^=\other
+  \catcode`\^^_=\other
+  \catcode`\@=\other
+  \catcode`\^=\other
+  % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
+  % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
+  % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
+  % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
+  % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
+  % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
+  % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
+  % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
+  %
+  % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
+  % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
+  % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
+  %
+  \catcode`\~=\other
+  \catcode`\[=\other
+  \catcode`\]=\other
+  \catcode`\"=\other
+  \catcode`\_=\other
+  \catcode`\|=\other
+  \catcode`\<=\other
+  \catcode`\>=\other
+  \catcode`\$=\other
+  \catcode`\#=\other
+  \catcode`\&=\other
+  % `\+ does not work, so use 43.
+  \catcode43=\other
+  % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
+  {%
+    \count 1=128
+    \def\loop{%
+      \catcode\count 1=\other
+      \advance\count 1 by 1
+      \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
+    }%
+  }%
+  % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now).
+  % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
+  % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
+  % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
+  % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
+  % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
+  \catcode`\{=1
+  \catcode`\}=2
+  \catcode`\%=\other
+  \catcode`\'=0
+  \catcode`\\=\other
+  %
+  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
+  \ifeof 1 \else
+    \closein 1
+    \input \jobname.aux
+    \global\havexrefstrue
+    \global\warnedobstrue
+  \fi
+  % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
+  \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
+\endgroup}
+
+
+% Footnotes.
+
+\newcount \footnoteno
+
+% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
+% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
+% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
+% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
+% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
+\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
+
+% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
+\let\footnotestyle=\comment
+
+\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
+
+{\catcode `\@=11
+%
+% Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
+\gdef\footnote{%
+  \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
+  \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
+  %
+  % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
+  % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
+  \let\@sf\empty
+  \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
+  %
+  % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
+  \unskip
+  \thisfootno\@sf
+  \footnotezzz
+}%
+
+% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
+% footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
+%
+% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
+% \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
+% the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
+%
+\long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup
+  % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
+  % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
+  % So reset some parameters.
+  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+  \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
+  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
+  \floatingpenalty\@MM
+  \leftskip\z@skip
+  \rightskip\z@skip
+  \spaceskip\z@skip
+  \xspaceskip\z@skip
+  \parindent\defaultparindent
+  %
+  % Hang the footnote text off the number.
+  \hang
+  \textindent{\thisfootno}%
+  %
+  % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
+  % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
+  % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
+  \footstrut
+  \futurelet\next\fo@t
+}
+\def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
+  \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next}
+\def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
+\def\f@t#1{#1\@foot}
+\def\@foot{\strut\egroup}
+
+}%end \catcode `\@=11
+
+% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
+% correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
+% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
+%
+\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
+\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
+\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
+%
+\def\setleading#1{%
+  \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
+  \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
+  \normalbaselines
+  \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
+    \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
+                    depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
+  }%
+}
+
+% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
+% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
+% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
+% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
+% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
+%
+\def\|{%
+  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
+  \leavevmode
+  %
+  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
+  \vadjust{%
+    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
+    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
+    \vskip-\baselineskip
+    %
+    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
+    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
+    \llap{%
+      %
+      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
+      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
+      %
+      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
+      \hskip 12pt
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+
+% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
+% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
+% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
+%
+\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
+
+% @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
+% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
+% 
+% Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image
+% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
+% undone and the next image would fail.
+\openin 1 = xepsf.tex
+\ifeof 1 \else
+  \closein 1
+  \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% do not bother showing banner
+  \input epsf.tex
+\fi
+%
+\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
+\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
+  work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
+  it from ftp://ftp.tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
+%
+% Only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
+\def\image#1{%
+  \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
+    \ifwarnednoepsf \else
+      \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
+      \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
+      \global\warnednoepsftrue
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \imagexxx #1,,,\finish
+  \fi
+}
+%
+% Arguments to @image:
+% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
+% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
+% #4 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
+\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
+  % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
+  \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
+}
+
+% End of control word definitions.
+
+
+\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
+
+\def\openindices{%
+   \newindex{cp}%
+   \newcodeindex{fn}%
+   \newcodeindex{vr}%
+   \newcodeindex{tp}%
+   \newcodeindex{ky}%
+   \newcodeindex{pg}%
+}
+
+% Set some numeric style parameters, for 8.5 x 11 format.
+
+\hsize = 6in
+\hoffset = .25in
+\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
+\parindent = \defaultparindent
+\parskip 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+\setleading{13.2pt}
+\advance\topskip by 1.2cm
+
+\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
+\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
+\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+
+% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
+\vbadness=10000
+
+% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
+\widowpenalty=10000
+\clubpenalty=10000
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
+% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of
+% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
+% \hsize.  This makes it come to about 9pt for the 8.5x11 format.
+%
+\ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
+  % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
+  \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
+\else
+  \emergencystretch = \hsize
+  \divide\emergencystretch by 45
+\fi
+
+% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 format  (or else 7x9.25)
+\def\smallbook{
+  \global\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
+  \global\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
+  \global\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+  %
+  \global\lispnarrowing = 0.3in
+  \setleading{12pt}
+  \advance\topskip by -1cm
+  \global\parskip 2pt plus 1pt
+  \global\hsize = 5in
+  \global\vsize=7.5in
+  \global\tolerance=700
+  \global\hfuzz=1pt
+  \global\contentsrightmargin=0pt
+  \global\deftypemargin=0pt
+  \global\defbodyindent=.5cm
+  %
+  \global\pagewidth=\hsize
+  \global\pageheight=\vsize
+  %
+  \global\let\smalllisp=\smalllispx
+  \global\let\smallexample=\smalllispx
+  \global\def\Esmallexample{\Esmalllisp}
+}
+
+% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
+\def\afourpaper{
+\global\tolerance=700
+\global\hfuzz=1pt
+\setleading{12pt}
+\global\parskip 15pt plus 1pt
+
+\global\vsize= 53\baselineskip
+\advance\vsize by \topskip
+%\global\hsize=   5.85in     % A4 wide 10pt
+\global\hsize=  6.5in
+\global\outerhsize=\hsize
+\global\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
+\global\outervsize=\vsize
+\global\advance\outervsize by 0.6in
+
+\global\pagewidth=\hsize
+\global\pageheight=\vsize
+}
+
+\bindingoffset=0pt
+\normaloffset=\hoffset
+\pagewidth=\hsize
+\pageheight=\vsize
+
+% Allow control of the text dimensions.  Parameters in order: textheight;
+% textwidth; voffset; hoffset; binding offset; topskip.
+% All require a dimension;
+% header is additional; added length extends the bottom of the page.
+
+\def\changepagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{
+ \global\vsize= #1
+ \global\topskip= #6
+ \advance\vsize by \topskip
+ \global\voffset= #3
+ \global\hsize= #2
+ \global\outerhsize=\hsize
+ \global\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
+ \global\outervsize=\vsize
+ \global\advance\outervsize by 0.6in
+ \global\pagewidth=\hsize
+ \global\pageheight=\vsize
+ \global\normaloffset= #4
+ \global\bindingoffset= #5}
+
+% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.  Top margin
+% 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm.
+\def\afourlatex
+        {\global\tolerance=700
+        \global\hfuzz=1pt
+        \setleading{12pt}
+        \global\parskip 15pt plus 1pt
+        \advance\baselineskip by 1.6pt
+        \changepagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}
+        }
+
+% Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format.
+\def\afourwide{\afourpaper
+\changepagesizes{9.5in}{6.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}}
+
+% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
+\catcode`\"=\other
+\catcode`\~=\other
+\catcode`\^=\other
+\catcode`\_=\other
+\catcode`\|=\other
+\catcode`\<=\other
+\catcode`\>=\other
+\catcode`\+=\other
+\def\normaldoublequote{"}
+\def\normaltilde{~}
+\def\normalcaret{^}
+\def\normalunderscore{_}
+\def\normalverticalbar{|}
+\def\normalless{<}
+\def\normalgreater{>}
+\def\normalplus{+}
+
+% This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
+% where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
+% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
+%
+% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
+% otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
+% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
+% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\the\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
+
+% Turn off all special characters except @
+% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
+% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
+% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
+
+\catcode`\"=\active
+\def\activedoublequote{{\tt \char '042}}
+\let"=\activedoublequote
+\catcode`\~=\active
+\def~{{\tt \char '176}}
+\chardef\hat=`\^
+\catcode`\^=\active
+\def^{{\tt \hat}}
+
+\catcode`\_=\active
+\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
+% Subroutine for the previous macro.
+\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}}
+
+\catcode`\|=\active
+\def|{{\tt \char '174}}
+\chardef \less=`\<
+\catcode`\<=\active
+\def<{{\tt \less}}
+\chardef \gtr=`\>
+\catcode`\>=\active
+\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
+\catcode`\+=\active
+\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
+%\catcode 27=\active
+%\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$}
+
+% Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
+{\catcode`\==\active
+\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
+
+\catcode`+=\active
+\catcode`\_=\active
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
+% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
+% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
+% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
+\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
+
+\catcode`\@=0
+
+% \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font
+\global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
+%{\catcode`\\=\other
+%@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}}
+
+% \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx.
+{\catcode`\\=\active
+@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }}
+
+% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
+\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
+
+% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
+\escapechar=`\@
+
+% \catcode 17=0   % Define control-q
+\catcode`\\=\active
+
+% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
+% even after parsing them.
+@def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
+@let\=@realbackslash
+@let~=@normaltilde
+@let^=@normalcaret
+@let_=@normalunderscore
+@let|=@normalverticalbar
+@let<=@normalless
+@let>=@normalgreater
+@let+=@normalplus}
+
+@def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
+@let\=@normalbackslash
+@let~=@normaltilde
+@let^=@normalcaret
+@let_=@normalunderscore
+@let|=@normalverticalbar
+@let<=@normalless
+@let>=@normalgreater
+@let+=@normalplus}
+
+% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
+% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
+@otherifyactive
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
+% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
+% a backslash.
+%
+@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
+@global@let\ = @eatinput
+
+% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
+% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
+% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
+% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
+% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
+%
+@gdef@fixbackslash{@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
+  @catcode`+=@active @catcode`@_=@active}
+
+%% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.  The @rm below
+%% makes sure that the current font starts out as the newly loaded cmr10
+@catcode`@$=@other @catcode`@%=@other @catcode`@&=@other @catcode`@#=@other
+
+@textfonts
+@rm
+
+@c Local variables:
+@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
+@c End:
diff --git a/contrib/amd/doc/version.texi b/contrib/amd/doc/version.texi
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..225ecdbacb37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/amd/doc/version.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+@set UPDATED 22 April 1998
+@set EDITION 6.0a16
+@set VERSION 6.0a16